Docstoc

PFED_v4-0_User_Manual-booklet

Document Sample
PFED_v4-0_User_Manual-booklet Powered By Docstoc
					             Pocket-sized Forward Entry Device
                     PFED Version 4.0

                   AN/PSG-10 (V)1 R-PDA
                AN/PSG-10 (V)2 R-PDA w/PPS
               AN/PSG-10 (V)3 R-PDA w/SAASM

                                    User Manual

                                  March 16, 2009

                                          DRAFT
Distribution authorized to U.S. Government agencies and their contractors for official use or for
administrative or operational purposes only. This determination was made on 27 January 2004.
Other requests for the document will be referred to Commander U.S. Army Communications-
Electronics Command and Fort Monmouth, ATTN: AMSEL-LC-LEO-E-ED, Fort Monmouth, New
Jersey 07703-5006.
DESTRUCTION NOTICE - Destroy by any method that will prevent disclosure of contents or
reconstruction of the document.

HEADQUARTERS, DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
Table Of Contents                                                                     PFED User Manual


                                         Table of Contents

CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION AND SYSTEM OVERVIEW.................... 1
  1.1 INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................... 1
  1.2 CONCEPT OF OPERATIONS.......................................................................... 1
  1.3 SYSTEM OVERVIEW ................................................................................... 1
CHAPTER 2 PFED SYSTEM ASSEMBLY ................................................... 3
  2.1 INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................... 3
  2.2 BASIC PFED COMPONENTS ....................................................................... 3
    2.2.1   Uniform Integration ....................................................................... 7
    2.2.2   Additional Devices ......................................................................... 8
CHAPTER 3 HANDHELD SETUP ................................................................. 9
  3.1 INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................... 9
    3.1.1   Handheld/Desktop Device Application Differences ....................... 9
    3.1.2   Keypad Operation ........................................................................ 10
    3.1.3   Field Types ................................................................................... 10
  3.2 INITIAL SYSTEM INSTALLATION (3900 MODEL)....................................... 11
    3.2.1   Hard Reset Using External Buttons on the 3900.......................... 12
    3.2.2   Hard Reset Using Reset Application on the 3900......................... 14
    3.2.3   Reset Process on the 3900............................................................ 15
    3.2.4   Application Installation on the 3900 ............................................ 16
    3.2.5   PointSec Installation or System Recovery on the 3900 ................ 18
  3.3 RESETTING THE DEVICE (3900 MODEL) .................................................. 21
    3.3.1   Soft Reset on the 3900 .................................................................. 22
  3.4 HANDHELD DEVICE SETTINGS (3900 MODEL) ......................................... 22
    3.4.1   Access System Setting Options on the 3900.................................. 22
    3.4.2   Power Configuration on the 3900 ................................................ 23
    3.4.3   System Clock on the 3900............................................................. 25
    3.4.4   Power Low Warning on the 3900 ................................................. 28
  3.5 BLUETOOTH MODE (3900 MODEL) .......................................................... 29
  3.6 EXTERNAL BUTTONS (3900 MODEL) ....................................................... 30
  3.7 INITIAL SYSTEM INSTALLATION (5700 MODEL)....................................... 31
    3.7.1   Hard Reset Using External Buttons.............................................. 31
    3.7.2   Hard Reset Using Reset Application on the 5700......................... 33
    3.7.3   Reset Process on the 5700............................................................ 33
    3.7.4   Application Installation on the 5700 ............................................ 34
    3.7.5   PointSec Installation or System Recovery on the 5700 ................ 36
  3.8 RESETTING THE DEVICE (5700 MODEL) .................................................. 39
    3.8.1   Soft Reset on the 5700 .................................................................. 40
  3.9 HANDHELD DEVICE SETTINGS (5700 MODEL) ......................................... 40
DRAFT                                               i                                      March 16, 2009
Table Of Contents                                                                             PFED User Manual

    3.9.1         Access System Setting Options on the 5700.................................. 40
    3.9.2         Power Configuration on the 5700 ................................................ 40
    3.9.3         System Clock on the 5700............................................................. 43
    3.9.4         Power Low Warning on the 5700 ................................................. 46
  3.10            LOCK/UNLOCK DEVICE (5700 MODEL)......................................... 47
  3.11            STEALTH MODE (5700 MODEL) .................................................... 48
  3.12            BLUETOOTH MODE (5700 MODEL) ............................................... 49
  3.13            EXTERNAL BUTTONS (5700 MODEL) ............................................ 50
CHAPTER 4 MAIN SCREEN........................................................................ 51
  4.1 ACTIVATING THE PFED APPLICATION ..................................................... 51
  4.2 PFED NAVIGATION ................................................................................. 53
    4.2.1   Title Bar Ok Button ...................................................................... 53
    4.2.2   Minimizing PFED......................................................................... 53
  4.3 TOOLBAR ................................................................................................. 54
    4.3.1   GPS/Manual Time Sync................................................................ 55
    4.3.2   Communications Status ................................................................ 55
    4.3.3   Transmit Queue ............................................................................ 55
    4.3.4   Fire Mission Monitor ................................................................... 55
    4.3.5   Check Firing................................................................................. 56
    4.3.6   System Alert.................................................................................. 56
    4.3.7   Handheld Keypad ......................................................................... 56
  4.4 SETTING UP YOUR PFED HANDHELD...................................................... 56
    4.4.1   GPS/Manual Time Sync................................................................ 56
    4.4.2   Operator (Positional) Location .................................................... 57
        4.4.2.1      Non-existent GPS Device or Embedded GPS ...................................... 58
        4.4.2.2      Disconnected GPS Device ................................................................... 59
        4.4.2.3      GPS Device Not Providing Data.......................................................... 60
        4.4.2.4      Position Data Not Updated within Set Time Period............................. 60
        4.4.2.5      Setting Operator (Positional) Location ................................................ 61
     4.4.3        Waypoint/Route Configuration and Navigation ........................... 63
        4.4.3.1      Use Current Location as Waypoint ...................................................... 63
        4.4.3.2      Create/Edit Waypoints ......................................................................... 64
        4.4.3.3      Create/Edit Routes ............................................................................... 65
        4.4.3.4      Record A Route ................................................................................... 67
        4.4.3.5      Navigate To Waypoints/Routes ........................................................... 68
        4.4.3.6      Define Thresholds................................................................................ 72
     4.4.4        Edit Menu Overview ..................................................................... 72
     4.4.5        Address/Unit List Setup ................................................................ 73
     4.4.6        Own Unit Information (Own Unit Info) Setup .............................. 73
     4.4.7        Map Datum Information (Map Datum Info) Setup....................... 79
        4.4.7.1      Datum/Area/Ellipsoid .......................................................................... 80
        4.4.7.2      Grid Declination and Magnetic Variance............................................. 85
     4.4.8        Devices Setup ............................................................................... 85

DRAFT                                                   ii                                         March 16, 2009
Table Of Contents                                                                                   PFED User Manual                 Appendix G – Document Change History                            PFED User Manual

     4.4.9        Fire Support Setup - Target Numbering....................................... 85                                                                  Section 3.2.3 marked for modification for new
     4.4.10       Fire Support Setup - Planned Target List..................................... 86                                                                 PointSec instructions.
        4.4.10.1     Creating New Targets .......................................................................... 87                                            Figure 3-23 changed.
        4.4.10.2     Modify Existing Targets ...................................................................... 88                                             Sections 3.6, 3.7, 3.8, 3.9, 3.10 and 3.11 new
        4.4.10.3     Removing Existing Targets.................................................................. 88                                                sections for model 5700 device.
        4.4.10.4     Exit Screen........................................................................................... 88            V79        8/14/08       Sections 3.5 & 3.12 new for the Bluetooth mode.
     4.4.11       Fire Support Setup – CFF Templates........................................... 88                                        V82        8/29/08       Section B.8 New Troubleshooting for Bluetooth
     4.4.12       Fire Support Setup – Known Points ............................................. 90                                                               Mode.
        4.4.12.1     Creating New Known Points................................................................ 90                                                  Section 3.7.3 updated step 8 and figure 3-54
        4.4.12.2     Modify Existing Known Points............................................................ 92                                                   updated.
        4.4.12.3     Removing Existing Known Points ....................................................... 92                                                     Section 3.7.5 updated.
        4.4.12.4     Exit Screen........................................................................................... 92            V84        11/18/08      Section 4.4.3.4 Step 3 changed, step 4 removed and
     4.4.13       Fire Support Setup – FSCMs/Geometries .................................... 92                                                                    note removed.
     4.4.14       Preferences (Prefs) Setup - Measurement Units........................... 94                                                                      Figure 8-4 replaced
     4.4.15       Preferences (Prefs) Setup – Automatic Position Reporting.......... 95                                                                            Section 8.2.2 new sub-section titled
                                                                                                                                                                   Volleys/Comments with a new step 23 & 24 and
     4.4.16       Preferences (Prefs) Setup – Hotkeys ............................................ 97                                                              Figure 8-20.
     4.4.17       Preferences (Prefs) Setup – SALUTE/ATI.................................... 98                                       V1 (previous   3/17/07       Version established for V4.0 software.
     4.4.18       Database Maintenance................................................................. 98                              version
     4.4.19       Exiting PFED ............................................................................... 99                      deployed)
                                                                                                                                          V3         3/17/09       All references to Package-11 have been removed,
CHAPTER 5 COMMUNICATIONS ........................................................... 100                                                                           and the System Types drop down selections for Own
                                                                                                                                                                   Unit Info has been updated.
  5.1 INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................... 100
                                                                                                                                                                   All references to Vector device has been removed
    5.1.1  Device Setup ............................................................................... 100
                                                                                                                                                                   Section 4.4.3.1 new steps added, 2 through 5.
        5.1.1.1      Configuring Devices .......................................................................... 100
                                                                                                                                                                   Section 4.4.3.2 new steps added, 8 through 10.
     5.1.2        Address/Unit List Setup .............................................................. 110
        5.1.2.1      Units Configuration ........................................................................... 111                                           Section 4.4.3.3 new steps and notes changed.
        5.1.2.2      Network Information ......................................................................... 112                                             Section 4.4.3.4 step 3 changed.
        5.1.2.3      Message Configuration ...................................................................... 114                                              Section 4.4.3.5 removed 2 steps.
  5.2 COMMUNICATIONS STATUS ................................................................... 116                                                                Section 4.4.3.6 new section.
    5.2.1  Device Status Information .......................................................... 117                                                                Section 5.1.1.1 Major changes to this section,
                                                                                                                                                                   removed any Vector device replaced with Leica,
    5.2.2  Resetting a Device ...................................................................... 118                                                           changed instructions for the Leica device.
  5.3 TRANSMISSION STATUS ......................................................................... 118                                                            Section 5.1.2.1 new note.
    5.3.1  Accessing Transmission Queue .................................................. 119                                                                     Section 5.2.2 entire section changed for new
        5.3.1.1      Aborting a Transmission.................................................................... 120                                               instructions.
        5.3.1.2      Retrying a Transmission .................................................................... 121                                              Section 8.3.5 new section.
        5.3.1.3      Deferring a Transmission................................................................... 121                                               New version created for 4.0 release.
        5.3.1.4      Sending to a New Unit ....................................................................... 121
                                                                                                                                                                   Section 7.2.4.2 for the Class IX Supplies section, a
        5.3.1.5      Exit..................................................................................................... 121                                 new note has been added.
  5.4 ALERTS .................................................................................................. 122                                                Section 7.2.9.2.1 steps 4 & 5 modified for new
    5.4.1  Accessing Alerts ......................................................................... 122                                                          screen shot.
                                                                                                                                                                   Figures 4-40, 4-42, 7-38, 7-39 and 8-27 replaced.
CHAPTER 6 MESSAGING.......................................................................... 123
  6.1 INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................... 123
  6.2 ACCESSING THE MESSAGE SCREEN........................................................ 123
  6.3 SENDING A MESSAGE (NEW PTM)......................................................... 123
DRAFT                                                      iii                                            March 16, 2009             DRAFT                                  282                             March 16, 2009
Appendix G – Document Change History                            PFED User Manual      Table Of Contents                                                                             PFED User Manual

                              device.                                                      6.3.1  Composing a Message................................................................ 124
                              New section B.5 for Vector configuration                     6.3.2  Selecting Recipients.................................................................... 124
                              troubleshooting.                                             6.3.3  Selecting Priority........................................................................ 125
                              All Note boxess, Caution boxes, Warning boxes and            6.3.4  Saving Messages......................................................................... 125
                              Tip boxes have been reformatted to identify their
                              importance and distinguish between their differences.        6.3.5  Opening a Saved Message.......................................................... 125
     V47        1/10/08       Section B.5 Vector troubleshooting mdofied based             6.3.6  Deleting a Saved Message.......................................................... 126
                              on client comment.                                           6.3.7  Transmitting a Message ............................................................. 126
                                                                                         6.4 RECEIVING MESSAGES (INBOX) ............................................................. 126
     V49        1/16/08       Section C.6 new section covering LLDR setup.
                                                                                           6.4.1  Sorting ........................................................................................ 128
     V50        1/18/08       Changed references to models of PFED to be
                              AN/PSG-!0 (V)1 for the c, AN/PSG-10 (V)2 for the g,          6.4.2  Viewing....................................................................................... 129
                              and AN/PSG-10 (V)3 for the S                                 6.4.3  Routing ....................................................................................... 129
     V54        1/21/08       Chapter 2 & 3 figures 2-2 updated with Vector, 2-3           6.4.4  Updating..................................................................................... 130
                              updated with handheld with V2 dome, 2-13 updated             6.4.5  Denying ...................................................................................... 130
                              with current dome, 3-25 updated with current dome.           6.4.6  Forwarding/Replying ................................................................. 130
     V59         2/7/08       Page 8 last butllet text modified.                           6.4.7  Locking/Unlocking Messages ..................................................... 131
                              Page 9 last note text modified.                              6.4.8  Editing ........................................................................................ 131
                              Section 3.2.3 step 2 moved.                                  6.4.9  Deleting ...................................................................................... 132
                              Section 3.2.4 steps 5 through 7 modified.                    6.4.10 Auto Routing............................................................................... 132
                              Section 3.4.3 step 16 modified for Casablanca entry.       6.5 SENT MESSAGES (OUTBOX)................................................................... 132
                              Section 4.1 Durress mode note box moved.
                                                                                           6.5.1  Viewing....................................................................................... 133
                              Section 4.2.2 steps 1 and 2 modified.
                                                                                           6.5.2  Deleting ...................................................................................... 133
                              Section 4.4.2.2 new note box entered.
                              Section 4.4.6 second note box under figure 4-34         CHAPTER 7 REPORTS ............................................................................... 134
                              moved below step 6 and next note box moved under
                              step 7.                                                    7.1 INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................... 134
                              Section 5.1 second paragraph removed and note              7.2 ACCESSING REPORTS/REQUESTS OPTION .............................................. 134
                              boxes under steps 2f and 5a removed, note box                7.2.1  Position Report/Observer Coordinates (OBCO)........................ 135
                              under step 7f moved up.                                      7.2.2  SALUTE/ATI Report................................................................... 135
                              Section 5.1.2.1 step 11 changed.                             7.2.3  MEDEVAC Request.................................................................... 138
                              Section 6.4.3 new caution box added.
                                                                                           7.2.4  Rapid Resupply Request ............................................................. 147
                              Section 6.4.6 step 2 modified.                                  7.2.4.1      Rapid Resupply Request (Screen 1)................................................... 148
                              Section 7.2.5 modified to compress.                             7.2.4.2      Rapid Resupply Request (Screen 2)................................................... 152
                              Section 7.2.9.1.2.1 new step 31.                             7.2.5        NBC 1 Report ............................................................................. 155
                              Section 7.2.9.2.3.1 new step 32.                             7.2.6        Unit Status Report ...................................................................... 159
                              Section 8.2 paragraph removed.                               7.2.7        Shelling Report ........................................................................... 163
                              Section 8.2.2 final note box for new button moved to         7.2.8        URN Query ................................................................................. 167
                              under step 2 at beginning of section.
                                                                                           7.2.9        CAS Request/AirCrew Briefing .................................................. 169
                              Section 8.3.1.10 new note box under step 6.
                                                                                              7.2.9.1      CAS Request...................................................................................... 169
     V65        3/14/08       Figure 2-5 updated with full photo of SAA SM unit.              7.2.9.2      CAS (AirCrew) Briefing.................................................................... 173
     V67        4/24/08       Figures 4-15, 4-23, 4-25, 4-26, 4-28 & 4-29 updated
                              waypoint screens.                                       CHAPTER 8 CALL FOR FIRE ................................................................... 181
     V71         5/3/08       Section 5.3.1.3 new note stating that deferred
                              message may still be transmitted.                          8.1 INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................... 181
     V77        7/16/08       Sections 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5 contains new paragraph
                                                                                           8.1.1  Fire Support Message Processing.............................................. 181
                              indicating instructions for separate models.                 8.1.2  Initial Fire Mission Processing .................................................. 181

DRAFT                                  281                          March 16, 2009    DRAFT                                                   iv                                          March 16, 2009
Table Of Contents                                                                                  PFED User Manual                 Appendix G – Document Change History                            PFED User Manual

   8.2 CALL FOR FIRE REQUEST....................................................................... 182                                                           message changed.
     8.2.1   CFF (Screen 1)........................................................................... 183                                                        Section 9.3 last sentence modified.
        8.2.1.1      Location Entry ................................................................................... 185                                       Section 9.3.1 step 2 spelling change.
     8.2.2   CFF - Extended (Screen 2)......................................................... 196                                                               Section 9.3.2 step 3 figure 9-3 caption changed.
     8.2.3   Sending CFF Template Fire Mission ......................................... 203                                                                      Section A.1 Lane changed to Line, FSCL
   8.3 FIRE MISSION MONITOR ........................................................................ 204                                                          Coordination changed to Coordinated, FiST changed
                                                                                                                                                                  to reflect Element.
     8.3.1   Monitoring Active Targets.......................................................... 204
                                                                                                                                                                  Section B.4 step 4 function access changed, last
        8.3.1.1      Message to Observer (MTO) ............................................................. 205                                                  paragraph last 2 lines removed.
        8.3.1.2      Confirming Denied Missions ............................................................. 207
                                                                                                                                                                  Section B.4.2 paragraph added to mention when sing
        8.3.1.3      Report Upon Firing ............................................................................ 208                                          Model 5700 device.
        8.3.1.4      Making Subsequent Corrections ........................................................ 209
                                                                                                                                                                  Section B.5 step 3 selections changed, section for “I
        8.3.1.5      Sending the Fire Command................................................................ 211                                                 started another application…” removed, figure B-3
        8.3.1.6      Canceling an At My Command (AMC) ............................................. 211                                                           changed.
        8.3.1.7      Repeat Fire For Effect and Cease Loading Command ....................... 211                                                                 Appendix C removed and all follwing appendix
        8.3.1.8      Sending EOM .................................................................................... 212                                         moved up.
        8.3.1.9      Set Mission to Inactive....................................................................... 213                                           Section D.3 notation added referencing specific
        8.3.1.10     Check Firing ...................................................................................... 214                                      model of device.
        8.3.1.11     New Call For Fire .............................................................................. 216                                         Section D.4.1 step 9 changed, step 11 text changed,
        8.3.1.12     Log..................................................................................................... 216                                 step 16 removed, step 17 CO XX changed to 00,
     8.3.2        Planned Fire Missions................................................................ 217                                                       steps 18 through 21 removed.
        8.3.2.1      Firing a Pre-Planned Mission............................................................. 217                                                Section D.4.2 steps 6.a table updated to reflect
        8.3.2.2      Deleting a Pre-Planned Mission......................................................... 218                                                  correct “U” positions and tilting process.
     8.3.3        Inactive Fire Missions ................................................................ 218                                                     Section E.1 error message have been updated.
        8.3.3.1      Re-Initiating An Inactive Target ........................................................ 219                                                Section F.1 step 8 twice was removed, steps 4 and 5
        8.3.3.2      Deleting an Inactive Mission ............................................................. 220                                               changed for backlight option.
        8.3.3.3      Log..................................................................................................... 220                                 Adjusted formatting font size for steps, substeps and
     8.3.4        On Call Fire Missions ................................................................ 220                                                      sub substeps to minimize document size.
        8.3.4.1      Re-Initiating A On Call Target .......................................................... 221                                                Section 8.2.1.1.1 new note indicating the FOS
        8.3.4.2      MTO Processing ................................................................................ 222                                          display of attitude in 100 mils.
        8.3.4.3      Deleting an On Call Mission.............................................................. 222                                                Section 8.2.2 new note and warning message
                                                                                                                                                                  indicating that only HC smoke used when sending
     8.3.5        CAS Missions.............................................................................. 222                                                  though FOS as well as when routing edited QS
        8.3.5.1      Processing BDA................................................................................. 223                                          message from a FiST.
CHAPTER 9 SECURITY ............................................................................. 224                                     V29        11/8/07       Section 8.2.2 under step 18 new note identifying the
                                                                                                                                                                  AF Shell/Fuze selection and transmitting to an AVMF
   9.1 INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................... 224                                                    unit.
   9.2 FIST MODE PASSWORD ......................................................................... 224                                  V35        12/4/07       Reviewed entire document and adjusted minor
     9.2.1   Changing the FiST Mode Password ........................................... 224                                                                      formatting and grammatical errors.
   9.3 DURESS MODE ....................................................................................... 225                           V42         1/8/08       Section 4.4.3 completely re-written to include all
                                                                                                                                                                  changes to waypoint/route manipulation.
     9.3.1   Activating Duress Mode ............................................................. 225
                                                                                                                                                                  Section 7.2.9.2.2 Location field information updated.
     9.3.2   Deactivating Duress Mode ......................................................... 226
                                                                                                                                                                  All references to Leica has been changed to Vector.
APPENDIX A ACRONYMS......................................................................... 227                                                                  Sections 8.2.1.1.5 & 8.2.1.1.6 have been updated
                                                                                                                                                                  with new imagery screens and steps.
   A.1 ACRONYM LIST ...................................................................................... 227                                                    Topic Index updated with new sections.
APPENDIX B TROUBLESHOOTING ....................................................... 229                                                                            Section 5.1.1.1 step 8 has been rewritten to separate
                                                                                                                                                                  a bluetooth and serial configuration for a Vector

DRAFT                                                     v                                              March 16, 2009             DRAFT                                  280                          March 16, 2009
Appendix G – Document Change History                              PFED User Manual      Table Of Contents                                                                          PFED User Manual

                              Section 4.4.6 step 5 updated for Fire Support                B.1 INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................... 229
                              Element, note updated as well, step 6 SWB3                   B.2 GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING TECHNIQUES .......................................... 229
                              removed.
                                                                                           B.3 DATA COMMUNICATIONS ...................................................................... 229
                              Section 4.4.13 line 9 FLOT added.
                                                                                           B.4 GPS ....................................................................................................... 230
                              Section 4.4.14 line 6 “direction” added, figures 4-41
                              and 4-42 changed.                                              B.4.1 Configuring GPS Devices on PFED .......................................... 230
                              Section 5.1.1 Imagery Interface bullet added.                  B.4.2 PLGR Verification ...................................................................... 231
                              Section 5.1.1.1 step 2.e.vii 9600N added, step 2.e.x         B.5 LEICA BLUETOOTH CONNECTION FAILURE ............................................ 232
                              FEC+TDC and FEC+TDC+Scrambling added, step                   B.6 PFED COMPUTER .................................................................................. 233
                              2.e.x Srambling changed to Scrambling Only, step 3           B.7 CALIBRATING THE PFED ....................................................................... 235
                              note changed for accuracy, step 5.a step changed             B.8 PFED BLUETOOTH CONNECTION .......................................................... 236
                              for new functionality.
                              Section 5.1.2.1 step 11 changed for new laser info        APPENDIX C PERIPHERAL HARDWARE SETUP & OPERATION.. 237
                              screen, step 12 Target changed to Platform.
                              Section 5.1.2.2 line 16 changed manual to review,            C.1 INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................... 237
                              step 2 updated for fire support element, step 7              C.2 SINCGARS ASIP ................................................................................. 237
                              grammatical change.                                          C.3 PLGR .................................................................................................... 237
                              Section 5.1.2.2 step 13 changed reference..                    C.3.1 Turning on the PLGR ................................................................. 238
                              Section 5.1.2.3 line 3 updated for fire support                C.3.2 Mode Selection ........................................................................... 238
                              element.
                                                                                             C.3.3 How to Obtain Position, Time and Tracking Information.......... 238
                              Section 5.3.1 figure 5-24 moved callout, line 4
                              changed cross reference, table 3 changed blank to              C.3.4 To Obtain Dynamic Information ................................................ 238
                              icon, table 3 removed waiting for buffer row.                  C.3.5 Track / Search Information ........................................................ 239
                              Section 6.4.7 step 3 grammatical change.                       C.3.6 How To Navigate........................................................................ 239
                              Section 7.2.1 step 2 corrected reference.                    C.4 MARK VII .............................................................................................. 240
                              Section 7.2.7 step 1corrected reference.                       C.4.1 Setting the data output to PLGR CON on the MarkVII LRF ...... 240
                              Section 7.2.9.1.1 step 14 removed, step 15 changed             C.4.2 Calibrating the Mark VII............................................................ 241
                              for new laser code button, step 23 removed default.          C.5 LEICA SETUP .......................................................................................... 245
                              Section 7.2.9.2.2 step 17 removed, step 18 updated             C.5.1 Distance Measurements.............................................................. 245
                              for new laser code button, step 26 removed default.
                                                                                             C.5.2 Azimuth & Inclination Measurements ........................................ 246
                              Section 8.1.1 line 3 removed FO.
                                                                                             C.5.3 Settings ....................................................................................... 247
                              Section 8.1.2 line 4 removed three in addition to, line
                              6 change manual to review, figure 8-5 changed.                 C.5.4 4-Point Compass Calibration (Handheld).................................. 249
                              Section 8.2.2 step 23.c grammatical change, step 25          C.6 LLDR SETUP ......................................................................................... 250
                              note box first note changed to default to High.
                                                                                        APPENDIX D PFED ERROR/ALERT MESSAGES................................. 252
                              Section 8.2.3 figure 8-22 changed
                              Section 8.3.1 table 4 changed blank to icon.                 D.1 ERROR/ALERT MESSAGES ..................................................................... 252
                                                th
                              Section 8.3.1.1 4 paragraph changed manual to
                                        th
                              review, 5 paragraph changed manual to review,             APPENDIX E PFED WITH NIGHT VISION GOGGLES ....................... 259
                              fiure 8-23 and 8-24 changed.
                                                                                           E.1 HOW TO OPERATE PFED IN NIGHT MODE ............................................ 259
                              Section 8.3.1.3 changed figures for the same target
                              number.                                                   APPENDIX F TOPIC INDEX ...................................................................... 262
                              Section 8.3.1.8 step 6b corrected selections tence.
                              Section 8.3.1.10 note box changed manual to review.          F.1 TOPIC INDEX .......................................................................................... 262
                              Section 8.3.3.2 note box changed wording for              APPENDIX G DOCUMENT CHANGE HISTORY .................................. 266
                              Inactive tab.
                                             rd
                              Section 9.1 3 sentence modified.                             G.1 CHANGE HISTORY TABLE ...................................................................... 266
                              Section 9.2.1 step 4.b field labels changed, step 4.c

DRAFT                                  279                            March 16, 2009    DRAFT                                                  vi                                        March 16, 2009
Table Of Contents         PFED User Manual    Appendix G – Document Change History                             PFED User Manual

                                                                            button changed.
                                                                            Section 7.2.5 paragraph information changed and
                                                                            first note box modified.
                                                                            Section 7.2.5.2 Location paragraph changed.
                                                                            Section 7.2.7 paragraph information changed, step 6
                                                                            paragraph modified.
                                                                            Section 7.2.8 paragraph information changed.
                                                                            Section 7.2.9.1.2 Location heading changed.
                                                                            Section 7.2.9.2 note box removed.
                                                                            Section 8.1.1 FO mention removed.
                                                                            Section 8.2.1 Danger Close first paragraph
                                                                            information changed.
                                                                            Section 8.2.1.1.4 Laser Range button changed.
                                                                            Section 8.2.1.1.6 steps b and c changed.
                                                                            Section 8.3 paragraph information added to.
                                                                            Section 8.3.1.1 first warning note removed.
                                                                            Section 8.3.1.9 third paragraph information changed
                                                                            and step 4a corrected.
                                                                            Section 9.2 first bullet corrected.
                                                                            Appendix E modified with new error/alert messages.
                                                                            Appendix D updated with new Leica Vector section.
                                                                            Appendix C updated.
                                                                            Section D.5.1 Multiple Object subsection steps
                                                                            changed, subsection heading corrected.
                                                                            Section D.5.3 subsection Measurement Units steps
                                                                            changed, subsection Distance Gate step 6 added.
                                                                            Section D.5.4 title updated.
                                                                            Section D.3.2 step 5 and 7 updated.
                                                                            Sections D.3.6 through D.3.10 removed.
                                                                            Section D.3.11 moved to D.3.6 and text paragraph
                                                                            removed.
                                                                            Section D.4.2 note text modified, step 6 table for
                                                                            calibration tags updated, steps 6b and 6c added.
                                                   V27        11/1/07       Cover page added Version 3.0 in title.
                                                                            Figure B-1, correction made to table of figures for
                                                                            item.
                                                                            Section 3.2.2 new step 8, step 5 changed.
                                                                            Section 3.2.3 entire section changed for updates..
                                                                            Section 3.3.1 step 3 modified for different ok button
                                                                            graphic.
                                                                            Section 3.4.2 step 14 the word twice rmoved, step 6
                                                                            note removed, steps 4 through 7 changed.
                                                                            Section 3.4.3 steps 1 through 7 removed.
                                                                            Section 3.4.4 step 4 word three changed to five.
                                                                            Section 4.2.1 Figure 4-4 title bar changed.
                                                                            Section 4.3.5 reference sections corrected.

DRAFT               vii      March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                  278                           March 16, 2009
Appendix G – Document Change History                              PFED User Manual      Table Of Figures                                                                         PFED User Manual

                              Section 4.4.11 paragraph information modified.
                                                                                                                                     Table of Figures
                              New figure 5-6 has been added.
                              The following changes have been made for the new          FIGURE 2-1 BASIC PFED SYSTEM USING EMBEDDED GPS HANDHELD AN/PSG-
                              Location button entries: Sections 4.4.2 step 3,               10 (V)2 W/PPS.............................................................................................. 3
                              4.4.10.1 step 5, 4.4.12.1 step 5, 5.1.2.1 step 4, 7.2
                              step 4, 7.2.2 step 6, 7.2.3 step 4, 7.2.4.1 step 2 and    FIGURE 2-2 BASIC PFED SYSTEM USING HANDHELD WITHOUT EMBEDDED GPS
                              paragraph text, 7.2.5.1 step 3 and paragraph text,            AN/PSG-10 (V)1.......................................................................................... 3
                              7.2.5.2 step 2 and paragraph text, 7.2.7 step 8 and       FIGURE 2-3 PFED HANDHELD WITH DOME AND EMBEDDED GPS AN/PSG-10
                              paragragh text, 7.2.9.1 steps 9-26-29-33, 7.2.9.2             (V)2 W/PPS .................................................................................................. 4
                              steps 7-9-12-paragraph text-30-34 and 45’s note
                              box, 8.2.1 danger close is no longer a header level,      FIGURE 2-4 PFED HANDHELD WITH DOME AN/PSG-10 (V)1............................. 4
                              new section header 8.2.1.1 location entry, 8.2.1.2        FIGURE 2-5 PFED HANDHELD WITH DOME AN/PSG-10 (V)3 W/SAASM .......... 4
                              through 8.2.1.7 changed to next header level,             FIGURE 2-6 PFED HANDHELD - 5700 MODEL ...................................................... 4
                              8.2.1.1.4 step f, 8.2.1.1.5 and 8.2.1.1.6 updated,        FIGURE 2-7 MARK VII CABLE .............................................................................. 5
                              8.3.1.4 step 3, 8.3.2.1 step 3, 8.3.3.1 step 3, 8.3.4.1
                              step 3, figures 4-19, 4-28, 4-30, 7-3, 7-5, 7-13, 7-24,   FIGURE 2-8 SINCGARS ASIP RADIO CABLE ...................................................... 5
                              7-27, 7-28, 7-32, 7-36, 7-37, 7-39, 7-41, 7-42, 8-11      FIGURE 2-9 AA BATTERY COMPARTMENT .......................................................... 5
                              and 8-26.                                                 FIGURE 2-10 R-PDA BATTERY ADAPTER ............................................................ 5
    1.5.12      8/10/07       Section 5.4.1 new note identifying different alert        FIGURE 2-11 MARK VII ........................................................................................ 5
                              levels.                                                   FIGURE 2-12 SINCGARS ASIP RADIO ................................................................ 5
                              Section 4.4.3.1 steps 2 through 5 modified for            FIGURE 2-13 EMBEDDED PFED HANDHELD (AN/PSG-10 (V)2 W/PPS) AND
                              clarification.
                                                                                            MARK VII ASSEMBLY .................................................................................. 6
 V2 (previous   8/23/07       Converted document to booklet format for V3.0
     CML                      document.
                                                                                        FIGURE 2-14 PFED HANDHELD (AN/PSG-10 (V)1) FRONT-END SUBSYSTEM
   versions                                                                                 ASSEMBLY .................................................................................................... 7
  archived)                                                                             FIGURE 2-15 PFED AND PLGR ASSEMBLY .......................................................... 7
     V13        10/4/07       Section 5.1.1.1 steps 6 through 9 modified for            FIGURE 2-16 PFED SOFTPACK – CASE FIELD OLIVE DRAB .................................. 7
                              changed sensor setup.                                     FIGURE 2-17 PLGR .............................................................................................. 8
                              Section D.3 and D.4 modified for updated                  FIGURE 2-18 LEICA ............................................................................................... 8
                              instructions.
                                                                                        FIGURE 2-19 LEICA/PLGR CABLE ........................................................................ 8
                              Section 6.3.7 new notation added for work around of
                              the non-visible alert messages when working in the        FIGURE 3-1 HANDHELD POPUP KEYPAD ............................................................. 10
                              New PTM window.                                           FIGURE 3-2 DROP-DOWN SELECTION LIST EXAMPLE ......................................... 11
                              Section 4.4.13 new notation of the ZOR being              FIGURE 3-3 BUTTON FIELD EXAMPLES ............................................................... 11
                              outside of the mission area.                              FIGURE 3-4 RADIO BUTTON FIELD EXAMPLE ..................................................... 11
                              Reformatted topic index.                                  FIGURE 3-5 CHECK BOX FIELD EXAMPLE ........................................................... 11
     V21        10/17/07      Section 1.3 new bullet stating FST, CAS request and       FIGURE 3-6 UP/DOWN-ARROW FIELD EXAMPLE ................................................ 11
                              URN query, also bullets indicating PFI and two-wire.      FIGURE 3-7 DEVICE POWER BUTTON .................................................................. 13
                              Section 2.2 changed to 10 batteries.                      FIGURE 3-8 EXPANSION PACK SCREW LOCATIONS ............................................. 13
                              The following figures have been replaced/changed,         FIGURE 3-9 EXTERNAL POWER CABLE LOCATION .............................................. 13
                              3-11, 4-27, 4-29, 4-31, 4-41, 4-42, 6-1, 6-3, 8-1, 8-2,
                              8-14, 8-15, 8-22, 8-26.                                   FIGURE 3-10 STYLUS PEN ................................................................................... 14
                              Section 3.4.4 word may changed to will.                   FIGURE 3-11 RESET BUTTON .............................................................................. 14
                              Section 5.1.1 devices changed to sensors.                 FIGURE 3-12 PERFORMING “HARD REST”........................................................... 14
                              Following figures have been removed, 5-6, 8-12.           FIGURE 3-13 HANDHELD WELCOME SCREEN ..................................................... 14
                              Section 5.1.1.1, step 2-e-xiii note box removed and       FIGURE 3-14 RESET APPLICATION ...................................................................... 16
                              step 3 note box removed.                                  FIGURE 3-15 STYLUS ALIGNMENT SCREEN ........................................................ 16
                              Section 6.4.3 step 3 changed.                             FIGURE 3-16 TODAY SCREEN ............................................................................. 16
                              Section 7.2.3 second note box modified, step 34           FIGURE 3-17 DOD INSTALL WARNING SCREEN .................................................. 17
DRAFT                                  277                            March 16, 2009    DRAFT                                                 viii                                    March 16, 2009
Table Of Figures                                                                           PFED User Manual             Appendix G – Document Change History                             PFED User Manual

FIGURE 3-18 HARD RESET PROMPT .................................................................... 17                                                 Section 8.2.2 new note specifying Copperhead
FIGURE 3-19 DATE/TIME ENTRY SCREEN ........................................................... 18                                                     mission as FFE. Also new note indicating that FFE2
                                                                                                                                                      field not available with Copperhead missions. New
FIGURE 3-20 POINTSEC SECURITY ID SETUP SCREEN ........................................ 19                                                             note specifying projectile/fuze selection required for
FIGURE 3-21 POINTSEC LINE DRAW ................................................................... 19                                                 FPF missions.
FIGURE 3-22 POINTSEC SECURITY PIN SETUP SCREEN ...................................... 19                                                              Section 8.3.1.4 new paragraph discussing Sub
FIGURE 3-23 POINTSEC SPLASH SCREEN ............................................................ 20                                                    Adjust as At My Command.
FIGURE 3-24 POINTSEC PASSWORD SCREEN ...................................................... 20                                                        Section 8.3.1.1 new paragraph stating that target
FIGURE 3-25 POINTSEC CARD ENCRYPTION PROMPT ......................................... 20                                                              position will be updated when receiving a new
                                                                                                                                                      recalculated position from AFATDS.
FIGURE 3-26 TODAY SCREEN VERSION 1.1......................................................... 21
                                                                                                                            1.5.10      3/16/07       Section 4.4.2.6 step 3 changed and note box
FIGURE 3-27 TODAY SCREEN VERSION 2.0......................................................... 21                                                      updated.
FIGURE 3-28 TODAY SCREEN VERSION 3.0......................................................... 21                                                      Section 4.4.2.7 note box modified.
FIGURE 3-29 TODAY SCREEN SETTINGS MENU OPTION ..................................... 23                                                                Figures 4-11 through 4-14 updated.
FIGURE 3-30 SETTINGS SCREEN.......................................................................... 23                                              Figure 4-33 updated.
FIGURE 3-31 SETTINGS - POWER CONFIGURATION SCREEN ................................ 24                                                                 Section 4.4.12 new step 8.
FIGURE 3-32 SETTINGS - BACKLIGHT CONFIGURATION SCREEN – INTERNAL                                                            1.5.10      3/20/07       Updated Error/Alert table
    POWER ........................................................................................................ 24       1.5.10      3/21/07       Section 8.1.1 new paragraph noting the
FIGURE 3-33 SETTINGS - BRIGHTNESS LEVEL CONFIGURATION SCREEN ............ 25                                                                          transmissions as carbon copies.
FIGURE 3-34 SETTINGS - REGIONAL SETTINGS CONFIGURATION SCREEN .......... 26                                                                           Section 8.3.1.8 modified for the transmission to
FIGURE 3-35 SETTINGS - REGIONAL SETTINGS TIME CONFIGURATION SCREEN . 26                                                                               multiple units.
FIGURE 3-36 SETTINGS - REGIONAL SETTINGS DATE CONFIGURATION SCREEN 27                                                                                 All cross refernces have been verified.
FIGURE 3-37 SETTINGS - CLOCK CONFIGURATION SCREEN ................................ 27                                                                 All generated tables have been updated.
FIGURE 3-38 CALENDAR CONFIGURATION SETTING ........................................... 28                                   1.5.11      4/23/07       Section 8.2.2 note for Copperhead mission, default
FIGURE 3-39 BATTERY LOW WARNING MESSAGE .............................................. 29                                                             changed to Low.
FIGURE 3-40 TODAY SCREEN ............................................................................. 30                                             Section 3.4.4 note about clock setting changed.
FIGURE 3-41 BLUETOOTH MANAGER SCREEN .................................................... 30                                                          Section 7.2.2 new note on sending ATI messages.
FIGURE 3-42 SEARCHING FOR DEVICES .............................................................. 30                         1.5.11      5/17/07       Appendix B, new section B.4.1 & B.4.2.
FIGURE 3-43 DEVICES FOUND ............................................................................ 30                                             Updated Topic Index.
FIGURE 3-44 PFED HANDHELD COMPUTER EXTERNAL BUTTONS ..................... 31                                                1.5.11      7/13/07       Section 3.2.4 Warning note removed.
FIGURE 3-45 DEVICE POWER BUTTON ................................................................ 32                                                   Figure 5-26, 8-2, 8-3, 9-1 changed.
FIGURE 3-46 STYLUS PEN ................................................................................... 32                                         Section 8.2.1 Location paragraph and note changed.
                                                                                                                                                      Section 8.2.1.1 steps 4 and 5 modified.
FIGURE 3-47 HARD REST BUTTONS .................................................................... 32
                                                                                                                                                      Section 8.2.1.4 and 8.2.1.5 titles changed.
FIGURE 3-48 HANDHELD WELCOME SCREEN ..................................................... 32
                                                                                                                                                      Section 8.2.1.5 steps and note changed.
FIGURE 3-49 OPERATION BUTTON TEST ............................................................. 34
                                                                                                                                                      New sections 8.2.1.6 and 8.2.1.7 covering new CFF
FIGURE 3-50 STYLUS ALIGNMENT SCREEN ........................................................ 34                                                       location processing.
FIGURE 3-51 TODAY SCREEN ............................................................................. 34                                             Sections 8.2.1.2 through 8.2.1.5 numbering changed.
FIGURE 3-52 DOD INSTALL WARNING SCREEN .................................................. 35                                                          Topic Index updated.
FIGURE 3-53 HARD RESET PROMPT .................................................................... 35                                                 Section 4.4.2.6 changed to parent heading level
FIGURE 3-54 DATE/TIME ENTRY SCREEN ........................................................... 36                                                     4.4.3. This has changed the rest of the sections
FIGURE 3-55 POINTSEC INSTALLATION PROCESS ............................................... 37                                                          heading sequence down by one header level.
FIGURE 3-56 POINTSEC USER ID ........................................................................ 37                                              Figure 4-41 & 8-21 changed.
FIGURE 3-57 POINTSEC SECURITY PIN SETUP.................................................... 37                                                        Section 6.4.7 step 2 edited.
FIGURE 3-58 POINTSEC PASSWORD RULES......................................................... 38                                                       Section 5.1.1.1 step 2exiii and step 3 note boxes
                                                                                                                                                      modified to discuss new summery screen. Steps 6 &
FIGURE 3-59 POINTSEC RESTART MESSAGE ....................................................... 38                                                       7 updated.
DRAFT                                                  ix                                       March 16, 2009          DRAFT                                  276                            March 16, 2009
Appendix G – Document Change History                               PFED User Manual      Table Of Figures                                                                           PFED User Manual

                              processing.                                                FIGURE 3-60 POINTSEC PASSWORD PROMPT ...................................................... 38
    1.5.10       3/1/07       Section 4.4.5 new note indicating messages                 FIGURE 3-61 TODAY SCREEN VERSION 1.1......................................................... 39
                              transmitted with visibility or cloud height information.   FIGURE 3-62 TODAY SCREEN VERSION 2.0......................................................... 39
                              Section 8.3.1.10 new note referring to FiST mode           FIGURE 3-63 TODAY SCREEN VERSION 3.0......................................................... 39
                              check firing processing.
                                                                                         FIGURE 3-64 TODAY SCREEN SETTINGS MENU OPTION ..................................... 40
                              Section 7.2.1.2 new note specifying discrete
                              information transmission.                                  FIGURE 3-65 SETTINGS SCREEN.......................................................................... 40
                              Section 8.2.2 new note specifying default for              FIGURE 3-66 SETTINGS - POWER CONFIGURATION SCREEN ................................ 42
                              Copperhead message.                                        FIGURE 3-67 SETTINGS - BACKLIGHT CONFIGURATION SCREEN – INTERNAL
                              Section 8.3.1.8 new paragraph indicating the BDA               POWER ........................................................................................................ 42
                              information difference.                                    FIGURE 3-68 SETTINGS - BRIGHTNESS LEVEL CONFIGURATION SCREEN ............ 42
                              Figure 6-14 updated.                                       FIGURE 3-69 SETTINGS - REGIONAL SETTINGS CONFIGURATION SCREEN .......... 44
    1.5.10       3/5/07       Figure 6-5 changed.                                        FIGURE 3-70 SETTINGS - REGIONAL SETTINGS TIME CONFIGURATION SCREEN . 44
                              Section 6.4.5 new section for denying messages in          FIGURE 3-71 SETTINGS - REGIONAL SETTINGS DATE CONFIGURATION SCREEN 45
                              the Inbox.
                                                                                         FIGURE 3-72 SETTINGS - CLOCK CONFIGURATION SCREEN ................................ 45
                              Section 6.4.8 new section for editing messages.
                                                                                         FIGURE 3-73 CALENDAR CONFIGURATION SETTING ........................................... 45
                              Section 6.4.6, change to step 1.
                                                                                         FIGURE 3-74 BATTERY LOW WARNING MESSAGE .............................................. 46
                              Topic Index updated.
                                                                                         FIGURE 3-75 LOCK/UNLOCK INDICATOR ............................................................ 48
    1.5.10       3/8/07       Figure 8-3 changed for new button.
                                                                                         FIGURE 3-76 UNLOCK SCREEN ........................................................................... 48
                              Section 8.2.2. step 27 changed.
                                                                                         FIGURE 3-77 STEALTH SETTING SCREEN ............................................................ 49
                              Alphabetized topic index correctly
                                                                                         FIGURE 3-78 WIRELESS MANAGER SCREEN ....................................................... 50
    1.5.10       3/9/07       Figure 6-12 removed, figure 6-11 covers both
                              options.
                                                                                         FIGURE 3-79 SETTINGS BLUETOOTH MODE SCREEN .......................................... 50
                              Topic Index Updated.
                                                                                         FIGURE 3-80 PFED HANDHELD COMPUTER EXTERNAL BUTTONS ..................... 50
                              Alert/Error messages table updated.                        FIGURE 4-1 HANDHELD START MENU SCREEN ................................................... 51
    1.5.10      3/12/07       Section 7.2.4 Resupply report, figure 7-14 changed
                                                                                         FIGURE 4-2 PFED ABOUT SCREEN ..................................................................... 51
                              and step 25 updated to screen change.                      FIGURE 4-3 MAIN PFED SCREEN ....................................................................... 52
                              Figure 8-18 changed for Check Firing icon.                 FIGURE 4-4 APPLICATION TITLE BAR ................................................................. 53
                              Section 8.2.2 step 27 b changed to accomidate              FIGURE 4-5 START MENU ................................................................................... 54
                              subordinate CFF processing.                                FIGURE 4-6 PFED TOOLBAR .............................................................................. 55
                              Section 8.3 note changed for alert pop-up                  FIGURE 4-7 SET TIME FROM GPS SCREEN .......................................................... 57
                              Section 8.3.1.10 note on Check Firing process              FIGURE 4-8 SET TIME MANUALLY SCREEN ........................................................ 57
                              changed with ne icon.                                      FIGURE 4-9 DATE/TIME ENTRY SCREEN ............................................................. 57
    1.5.10      3/13/07       Section 8.3 first note box modified.                       FIGURE 4-10 MAIN PFED (OTF/EPE FLASH INDICATION) SCREEN ................... 58
    1.5.10      3/15/07       Figure 7-3 replaced, figure 7-4 removed.                   FIGURE 4-11 MGRS - GRID LOCATION SCREEN ................................................. 61
                              Section 7.2.2 step 17 modified to reflect the              FIGURE 4-12 DECIMAL DEGREES - GRID LOCATION SCREEN.............................. 61
                              SALUTE/ATI selection.
                                                                                         FIGURE 4-13 DEG:MIN:SEC - GRID LOCATION SCREEN ...................................... 62
                              Figure 7-34 updated
                                                                                         FIGURE 4-14 UTM - GRID LOCATION SCREEN ................................................... 62
                              Figure 7-36, 7-37, 7-38, 7-39 and 7-40 updated.
                                                                                         FIGURE 4-15 NAVIGATION SCREEN .................................................................... 63
                              Figure 8-4 updated
                              Section 8.2.2 note changed for FFE1 field selection
                                                                                         FIGURE 4-16 MARK LOCATION SCREEN ............................................................. 64
                              change, FFE2 selection list changed and final note         FIGURE 4-17 WAYPOINTS SCREEN ...................................................................... 65
                              box changed removing New button.                           FIGURE 4-18 NEW WAYPOINT SCREEN ............................................................... 65
                              New section 8.3.3.3 for log view.                          FIGURE 4-19 ROUTE LIST SCREEN ...................................................................... 67
                              New section 8.3.4.2 for MTO processing. Section            FIGURE 4-20 EDIT ROUTE SCREEN ..................................................................... 67
                              8.4.3.2 for delete is now 8.3.4.3.                         FIGURE 4-21 SELECT WAYPOINT SCREEN .......................................................... 67
DRAFT                                  275                             March 16, 2009    DRAFT                                                  x                                        March 16, 2009
Table Of Figures                                                                    PFED User Manual           Appendix G – Document Change History                            PFED User Manual

FIGURE 4-22 DEFINE ROUTE SCREEN ................................................................. 68                                         has been changed and a new note added. Method
FIGURE 4-23 STOP/PAUSE PROMPT ..................................................................... 68                                       of Fire Control topic text has changed reflecting
                                                                                                                                             FFE1 field modification. Step 25 table has changed.
FIGURE 4-24 CLICK TO NAVIGATE SCREEN ........................................................ 69
                                                                                                                                             Section 4.4.15 Hotkeys section modified or the new
FIGURE 4-25 NAV TO WAYPOINT # SCREEN ....................................................... 69                                              screen.
FIGURE 4-26 STOP/PAUSE PROMPT ..................................................................... 69                                       Section 8.3.1.4 notes removed.
FIGURE 4-27 CLICK TO NAVIGATE SCREEN ........................................................ 70                                             Section 5.1.1.1 section has new step 8 indicating
FIGURE 4-28 NAV TO WAYPOINT # SCREEN ....................................................... 70                                              new operator prompt.
FIGURE 4-29 STOP/PAUSE PROMPT ..................................................................... 71                                       Section 5.1.2.3 paragraph text changed slightly.
FIGURE 4-30 ACTIVE NAVIGATION ..................................................................... 71                                       Note box has been removed.
FIGURE 4-31 INACTIVE NAVIGATION .................................................................. 71                                        Section 3.9 Duress Mode has been added.
FIGURE 4-32 MARK LOCATION SCREEN ............................................................. 72                                            Section 8.3.1.3 new note box.
FIGURE 4-33 PFED EDIT MENU SCREEN ............................................................ 74                                            Section 6.4 new note box specifying the contained
                                                                                                                                             maximum and new paragraph explaining the
FIGURE 4-34 UNIT SCREEN ................................................................................. 74                                 maximum function.
FIGURE 4-35 LASER INFORMATION SCREEN ....................................................... 75                                              Section 6.4 contains new section 6.4.5 for marking
FIGURE 4-36 MAP DATUM SETUP SCREEN.......................................................... 80                                              messages and 6.4.6 for unlocking messages.
FIGURE 4-37 FIELD MAP LEGEND ....................................................................... 81                                      Section 6.4.7 is now for deleting messages.
FIGURE 4-38 AUTO TARGET NUMBERING SCREEN ............................................. 86                          1.5.10      2/28/07       Section 6.5 new note box specifying the contained
FIGURE 4-39 TARGET LIST SCREEN .................................................................... 87                                       maximum.
FIGURE 4-40 CFF - [TARGET #] SCREEN ............................................................. 87                                         Section 6.5.2 moved to section 6.4.4. Following
                                                                                                                                             sections in heading 6.4 have been moved down to
FIGURE 4-41 CFF TEMPLATES SETUP SCREEN 1................................................. 89                                                 accommodate new section.
FIGURE 4-42 CFF TEMPLATES SETUP SCREEN 2................................................. 89                                                 Section 4.4.17 removed (C2CE reference).
FIGURE 4-43 KNOWN POINTS SCREEN ................................................................ 91                                          Section 6.4.1 is new for sorting messages and all
FIGURE 4-44 GRID LOCATION SCREEN ............................................................... 91                                          following section in 6.4. have been increased by one.
FIGURE 4-45 POLAR LOCATION SCREEN ............................................................. 91                                           Section 6.4.7 new note and steps changed to match
FIGURE 4-46 BATTLEFIELD GEOMETRIES SCREEN .............................................. 93                                                  new locking feature.
FIGURE 4-47 VIEW BATTLEFIELD GEOMETRY SCREEN (EXAMPLE...................... 93                                                               Section 8.3.1.10 step 1 changed.
FIGURE 4-48 RESPONSBILE UNIT FIELD .............................................................. 94                                         Section 5.1.2.2 new paragraph information covering
                                                                                                                                             FO and FiST modes.
FIGURE 4-49 SELECTED RESPONSIBLE UNIT ....................................................... 94
                                                                                                                                             Section 6.4.8 new section covering auto routing.
FIGURE 4-50 UNITS OF MEASUREMENT PREFERENCES SCREEN .......................... 95
                                                                                                                                             Section 8.1.1 new section covering the Fire Support
FIGURE 4-51 POSITION REPORTING SETUP SCREEN ............................................ 96                                                  message processing for FO and FiST modes.
FIGURE 4-52 PFED HANDHELD HOTKEY BUTTONS ........................................... 97                                                      Section 8.3 contains a new note showing an alert
FIGURE 4-53 HOTKEYS SETUP SCREEN ............................................................... 97                                          when fire missions are processed.
FIGURE 4-54 MESSAGING PREFERENCES SCREEN ............................................... 98                                                  Section 8.3.4 changed to accomidate the change
FIGURE 4-55 DATABASE MANAGEMENT SCREEN ............................................... 99                                                    from Priority to On Call. Figures 8-15, 8-16, 8-17, 8-
FIGURE 5-1 DEVICE SETUP SCREEN .................................................................. 101                                        22, 8-24, 8-25 and 8-26 as well os the tab markers in
                                                                                                                                             the appropriate steps have been modified.
FIGURE 5-2 188-200A/188-220C SETUP SCREEN ............................................. 101
                                                                                                                                             Section 5.1.2.2 contains new steps for the
FIGURE 5-3 188-220A/188-220C SETTINGS ADVANCED SCREEN..................... 102                                                               Direct/Indirect configuration.
FIGURE 5-4 TACLINK TACFIRE SETUP SCREEN ........................................... 104                                                      Figures 8-15, 8-16, 8-17, 8-18, 8-19, 8-22, 8-24, 8-25
FIGURE 5-5 TACFIRE SETTINGS ADVANCED SCREEN ..................................... 104                                                        and 8-26updated.
FIGURE 5-6 DEVICE SELECT SCREEN ................................................................ 108                                         Sections 8.1.1, 8.1.2, 8.1.3, 8.1.4 & 8.1.5 paragraphs
FIGURE 5-7 CONFIGURE DEVICE SCREEN - SERIAL ........................................... 108                                                  have been moved to section 6 for messaging to the
                                                                                                                                             appropriate sections of discussion.
FIGURE 5-8 CONFIGURE CONNECTION SCREEN - BLUETOOTH .......................... 108
                                                                                                                                             Section 8.2 new step 1 for subordinate selection.
FIGURE 5-9 EDIT BLUETOOTH ADDRESS SCREEN ............................................. 109
                                                                                                                                             Section 8.2.2 new step 27 showing new subordinate
DRAFT                                              xi                                    March 16, 2009        DRAFT                                 274                              March 16, 2009
Appendix G – Document Change History                             PFED User Manual      Table Of Figures                                                                 PFED User Manual

                              and step 29 modified. Note box was modified.             FIGURE 5-10 LAZED DATA RECEIVED .............................................................. 109
                              Section 6.3.2 first note removed.                        FIGURE 5-11 WARNING DECLINATION PROMPT................................................ 110
                              New section 8.3.1.12                                     FIGURE 5-12 UNIT LIST SCREEN ....................................................................... 111
                              Figures 4-17, 4-35, 4-6, 4-34, 4-36, 4-49, 5-14, 5-19,   FIGURE 5-13 UNIT – NEW UNIT SCREEN (WITHOUT MESSAGES TAB) ............... 111
                              6-6, 8-2, 8-18 have been replaced.
                                                                                       FIGURE 5-14 UNIT - NETS SCREEN ................................................................... 113
                              Section 6.5.2 step 2 has been modified.
                                                                                       FIGURE 5-15 188-220A/188-220C NET SETUP SCREEN.................................... 113
                              Section 4.4.3 bullet list for menu options changed.
                                                                                       FIGURE 5-16 TACFIRE NET SETUP SCREEN .................................................... 114
                              Section 4.4.5 step 10 changed for Target Type to
                              read Platform Type. Steps 11-18 removed. Step 3
                                                                                       FIGURE 5-17 TRANSMIT INDIRECT .................................................................... 114
                              changed.                                                 FIGURE 5-18 UNIT – NEW UNIT SCREEN (WITH MESSAGES TAB)...................... 115
                              Section 5.1.2 changed Primary screen and step 14         FIGURE 5-19 UNIT - MESSAGES SCREEN ........................................................... 115
                              modified.                                                FIGURE 5-20 CUSTOM SETUP SCREEN .............................................................. 116
                              Replaced figures 4-22, 4-23, 4-29, 4-31, 4-35, 4-36,     FIGURE 5-21 COMMUNICATIONS STATUS BUTTON ........................................... 117
                              5-8, 5-13, 6-3, 8-1, 8-2, 8-18. Added new figures 8-     FIGURE 5-22 COMMUNICATIONS STATUS SCREEN ............................................ 117
                              22, 8-23.
                                                                                       FIGURE 5-23 COMMUNICATIONS STATUS WITH DATA ...................................... 117
                              Section 4.4.12 removed step 3
                                                                                       FIGURE 5-24 PLGR LEGEND/STATUS INFORMATION........................................ 118
                              Section 4.4.16 step 1 changed.
                              Section 5.1.2.3 note modified and step 14 changed.
                                                                                       FIGURE 5-25 COMMUNICATIONS STATUS DEVICE SELECTION .......................... 118
                              Section 6.3.5 step 1 changed
                                                                                       FIGURE 5-26 TRANSMISSION QUEUE BUTTON .................................................. 119
    1.5.9       2/18/07       Section 8.3.1.12 changed for new information.
                                                                                       FIGURE 5-27 TRANSMISSION QUEUE SCREEN ................................................... 119
                              All cross references to sections and figures have
                                                                                       FIGURE 5-28 ALERTS BUTTON .......................................................................... 122
                              been updated.                                            FIGURE 5-29 ALERTS SCREEN .......................................................................... 122
                              Figures 4-2, 5-14, 5-19, B-2 and B-3 have been           FIGURE 6-1 MESSAGE – NEW PTM SCREEN ..................................................... 123
                              updated.                                                 FIGURE 6-2 UNIT LIST SCREEN ......................................................................... 124
                              Sections 4.3.6 System Alerts and 5.4 Alerts have         FIGURE 6-3 OPEN REPORT/REQUEST SCREEN ................................................... 125
                              been added.                                              FIGURE 6-4 MESSAGE RECEIVED POPUP ........................................................... 127
                              Section 4.4.6.1 note has been modified.                  FIGURE 6-5 VIEW MESSAGE SCREEN ................................................................ 127
                              Section 8.3.1.10 contains a new operator note            FIGURE 6-6 MESSAGE – INBOX SCREEN ............................................................ 127
                              covering the Cancel Check Fire All process.
                                                                                       FIGURE 6-7 MESSAGE – CANNOT PROCESS ALERT ........................................... 128
                              Section 4.4.5 contains new paragraph information
                              covering the FiST mode process and a note for the        FIGURE 6-8 MESSAGE – CANNOT PROCESS MESSAGE IN TRANSMIT QUEUE..... 128
                              Laser Code field requirements.                           FIGURE 6-9 MESSAGE AWAITING ROUTING ...................................................... 129
                              Section 7.2.2 All notations of SALT/SALUTE has           FIGURE 6-10 MESSAGE AWAITING ROUTING AND UPDATING........................... 129
                              been changed to reflect SALUTE/ATI process.              FIGURE 6-11 FORWARDING/REPLYING MESSAGES ........................................... 131
                              Section 7.2.7 New paragraph text covering Shelling       FIGURE 6-12 AUTO MESSAGE ROUTING ........................................................... 132
                              report under FiST mode.
                                                                                       FIGURE 6-13 MESSAGE – OUTBOX SCREEN ...................................................... 133
    1.5.9       2/22/07       Section 5.1.1.1 contains a new step 2e xi.               FIGURE 7-1 REPORTS/REQUESTS SCREEN ......................................................... 134
                              Section 5.1.2.3 new paragraph text covering the FiST
                                                                                       FIGURE 7-2 POSITION ATTENTION MESSAGE .................................................... 134
                              mode.
                              Section 8.2.2 step 20 operator note modified.
                                                                                       FIGURE 7-3 SALT/SALUTE-ATI REPORT SCREEN ......................................... 136
                              Section 8.2.1.5 paragraph text changed.
                                                                                       FIGURE 7-4 MEDEVAC REQUEST SCREEN ...................................................... 140
                              Section 8.3.3.2 contains a new operator note.
                                                                                       FIGURE 7-5 LOCATION SCREEN ......................................................................... 140
                              Figures 7-3 and 7-4 changed.                             FIGURE 7-6 DIRECTION TO ENEMY SCREEN ...................................................... 140
                              List of errors/alerts has been updated to current        FIGURE 7-7 # OF LITTER PATIENTS SCREEN ...................................................... 143
                              messages.                                                FIGURE 7-8 # OF AMBULATORY PATIENTS SCREEN .......................................... 143
                              Section 8.2.2 step 19 changed, the table following       FIGURE 7-9 NUMBER OF INJURIES SCREEN ....................................................... 143
                              the step has been changed, the note within this step     FIGURE 7-10 INJURY TYPE SCREEN .................................................................. 146
DRAFT                                  273                           March 16, 2009    DRAFT                                             xii                                 March 16, 2009
Table Of Figures                                                                 PFED User Manual           Appendix G – Document Change History                            PFED User Manual

FIGURE 7-11 INJURY DESCRIPTION SCREEN ..................................................... 146                                           replaced.
FIGURE 7-12 BATTLE ROSTER NUMBER SCREEN .............................................. 146                                                Chapter 8 all Ctrl buttons replaced with Control.
FIGURE 7-13 RAPID RESUPPLY REQUEST (SCREEN 1)....................................... 147                                                  Section 8.2 step 1 more button replaced.
FIGURE 7-14 RAPID RESUPPLY REQUEST (SCREEN 2)....................................... 147                                                  Section 8.2.1.5 bullet more button replaced.
FIGURE 7-15 MRE'S ENTRY SCREEN ................................................................ 149                                       Section 8.2.2 step 15 more button replaced.
FIGURE 7-16 WATER ENTRY SCREEN ............................................................... 149                                        Section 8.2.2 steps 20 & 21 modified.
FIGURE 7-17 AMMO NOMENCLATURE LIST SCREEN ......................................... 150                                                   Section 8.2.2 last bullet more button replaced and
                                                                                                                                          new button added.
FIGURE 7-18 FUEL NOMENCLATURE LIST SCREEN ........................................... 151
                                                                                                                                          Chapter 9 figures 9-1, 9-2 replaced.
FIGURE 7-19 BATTERIES NOMENCLATURE LIST SCREEN .................................. 151
                                                                                                                                          Overall; all drop down list options have been placed
FIGURE 7-20 MEDICAL NOMENCLATURE LIST SCREEN .................................... 153                                                     in tables to help compress document size.
FIGURE 7-21 MAINTENANCE CONTACT SCREEN ............................................... 153                                                Section 4.4.2.6 inserted for waypoint configuration.
FIGURE 7-22 CLASS IX SUPPLIES SCREEN ........................................................ 154                                         Section 4.4.4 modified for new screens.
FIGURE 7-23 NBC1 REPORT SCREEN ............................................................... 156                                        Section 5.1.2 modified for new screen operation.
FIGURE 7-24 NBC1 - NUCLEAR SCREEN .......................................................... 156                                          Section 5.1.1.1 warning and note messages
FIGURE 7-25 NBC1 – BIOLOGICAL SCREEN ..................................................... 156                                            removed.
FIGURE 7-26 NBC1 – CHEMICAL SCREEN ........................................................ 156                                           Section 6.4.2 and 6.4.3 Forwarding and Replying to
FIGURE 7-27 CLOUD DATA SCREEN ................................................................. 157                                       have been removed.
FIGURE 7-28 FLASH TO BANG TIME SCREEN .................................................... 159                                            Figures 7-1 and 7-2 have been updated.
FIGURE 7-29 UNIT STATUS REPORT SCREEN .................................................... 160                                            New section 7.2.8 inserted for URN Query menu
                                                                                                                                          option.
FIGURE 7-30 PERSONNEL STATUS TABLE SCREEN............................................ 160
                                                                                                                                          Section 7.2.9 modified for new reports selection.
FIGURE 7-31 PLATFORMS STATUS SCREEN ....................................................... 161
                                                                                                                                          Figures 8-10 and 8-11 have been replaced.
FIGURE 7-32 SHELLING REPORT SCREEN .......................................................... 163
                                                                                                                                          New section 4.4.2.7 for creating routes has been
FIGURE 7-33 WEAPON DIRECTION SCREEN ...................................................... 163                                            added.
FIGURE 7-34 URN QUERY SCREEN .................................................................. 168                                       Messaging chapter has been modified to show new
FIGURE 7-35 CAS SELECT SCREEN .................................................................. 169                                      screens, buttons and functions.
FIGURE 7-36 CAS REQUEST - SCREEN 1........................................................... 169                                         Unit List Setup section has changed with new screen
FIGURE 7-37 CAS REQUEST - SCREEN 2........................................................... 170                                         capabilities.
FIGURE 7-38 CAS (LINE 1-2) SCREEN .............................................................. 174                                      Initial password entry and Duress mode sections
                                                                                                                                          have been removed.
FIGURE 7-39 CAS (LINE 3-7) SCREEN .............................................................. 174
                                                                                                                                          Sections that discuss Unit Info – Nets, Unit List –
FIGURE 7-40 CAS (LINE 8-9) SCREEN .............................................................. 174                                      Messages and Messages Inbox indicating the
FIGURE 7-41 MARK LOCATION SCREEN ........................................................... 178                                          differences when in FiST mode.
FIGURE 7-42 MARK FRIENDLY LOCATION LIST SCREEN .................................. 178                                                     Error/Alert Table re-created for all new messages.
FIGURE 7-43 EGRESS SCREEN ........................................................................... 179       1.5.8       2/15/07       Section 4.1 step 2 has been modified.
FIGURE 8-1 LOCAL/NON-LOCAL SELECTION .................................................... 182                                             Section 4.4.3 bulleted list information has been
FIGURE 8-2 SUBORDINATE SELECTION EXAMPLE ............................................. 182                                                modified.
FIGURE 8-3 CALL FOR FIRE (SCREEN 1) ........................................................... 183                                       Section 4.4.5 new Service/Role/Echelon table and
FIGURE 8-4 CALL FOR FIRE - EXTENDED (SCREEN 2) ....................................... 183                                                step 18 has been modified.
FIGURE 8-5 DANGER CLOSE WARNING SCREEN ............................................... 184                                                New Section 4.4.11 describing FSCMs/Geometry
                                                                                                                                          screens and all following sections have been moved
FIGURE 8-6 LOCATION METHOD SELECTION SCREEN ...................................... 185                                                    down by one.
FIGURE 8-7 GRID LOCATION SCREEN ............................................................... 186                                       Section 5 figures 5-6, 5-8, 5-13, 5-14 where
FIGURE 8-8 POLAR LOCATION SCREEN ............................................................. 186                                        changed. Figure 5-12 was removed and all following
FIGURE 8-9 SHIFT FROM KNOWN POINT SCREEN ............................................. 186                                                figure numbers were updated.
FIGURE 8-10 LRF DATA SCREEN...................................................................... 187                                     Section 5.1.2.2 steps 14 modified, step 15 removed

DRAFT                                             xiii                                March 16, 2009        DRAFT                                  272                          March 16, 2009
Appendix G – Document Change History                               PFED User Manual       Table Of Figures                                                                   PFED User Manual

                                                                                          FIGURE 8-11 IMAGERY DATA SCREEN .............................................................. 187
                              Replaced all Del All buttons with            button and
                              the CAS Brief report button with the CAS button.
                                                                                          FIGURE 8-12 INTERFACE VIEWER FOR REFINING POSITION .............................. 187
                              All references to Address book and addresses have
                                                                                          FIGURE 8-13 LRF DATA POP-UP SCREEN ......................................................... 191
                              been changed to Unit List and units.                        FIGURE 8-14 IMAGERY INTERFACE ERROR PROMPT ......................................... 193
                              All PM IE references have been changed to PM BC.            FIGURE 8-15 IMAGERY INTERFACE CONFIRMATION PROMPT ........................... 193
                              Section 1.3 fielded equipment list, bullet inserted for     FIGURE 8-16 TARGET SIZE/SHAPE SCREEN....................................................... 194
                              LLDR and note box added stating when PFED                   FIGURE 8-17 TARGET TYPES SCREEN ............................................................... 195
                              system is used with an LLDR.                                FIGURE 8-18 TARGET TYPES LIST SCREEN ....................................................... 195
                              Section 4.4.2.6 3rd, 4th and 6th bullets have been          FIGURE 8-19 SMOKE MISSION SCREEN ............................................................. 199
                              added/modified.
                                                                                          FIGURE 8-20 COMMENTS SCREEN..................................................................... 201
                              Section 5.1.1.1 Configuring Devices, step 1, 2e, 2e-I,
                              2e-ii, 2f-I have been changed.                              FIGURE 8-21 METHOD OF FIRE AND CONTROL ................................................. 201
                              Section 5.1.2.1, 5.1.2.2 and 5.1.2.3 have been              FIGURE 8-22 UNITS SELECTION ........................................................................ 203
                              modified for the new Unit List functions.                   FIGURE 8-23 PFED HANDHELD HOTKEY BUTTONS ......................................... 203
                              Section 6.3.5 step 2 has a new note box.                    FIGURE 8-24 FIRE MISSION MONITOR - ACTIVE TAB SCREEN .......................... 204
                              Section 7.2.1 step 3 has a new note box.                    FIGURE 8-25 MTO DISPLAY SCREEN ............................................................... 207
                              As a result of the above changes, all cross                 FIGURE 8-26 MTO MISSION DENIED SCREEN................................................... 208
                              references have been updated as well as the figure          FIGURE 8-27 CFF - [TARGET #] SCREEN ........................................................... 210
                              numbering and step numbers.
                                                                                          FIGURE 8-28 TARGET DESCRIPTION SCREEN .................................................... 210
                              Figures have been moved to tighten up formatting:
                              2-1, 2-2, 3-7, 3-8, 3-10, 3-11, 3-12, 3-13, 3-14, 3-15,
                                                                                          FIGURE 8-29 BATTLE DAMAGE ASSESSMENT SCREEN ..................................... 213
                              3-16, 3-17, 3-19, 3-20, 3-22, 3-23, 3-27, 3-28, 3-32,       FIGURE 8-30 CHECK FIRING BUTTON OPTIONS ................................................ 215
                              3-33, 3-34, 3-35, 3-37, 3-38, 3-40, 3-41, 3-42, 3-42,       FIGURE 8-31 CHECK FIRE ICON ........................................................................ 216
                              4-3,4-4, 5-2, 5-3, 5-4, 5-5, 5-9, 5-10, 6-5, 6-6, 6-7, 6-   FIGURE 8-32 LOG INFORMATION SCREEN ......................................................... 216
                              8, 7-1, 7-2, 7-31, 7-32, B-2, B-3, F-1, F-2 and F-3.
                                                                                          FIGURE 8-33 LOG COMMAND INFORMATION SCREEN ...................................... 216
    1.5.7       9/27/06       Section 3.2 Initial Instalation has been modified for
                              all changes to the installation process.
                                                                                          FIGURE 8-34 FIRE MISSION MONITOR - PLANNED TAB SCREEN ....................... 217
                              Chapter 4 figures 4-1, 4-4, 4-6, 4-11, 4-17, 4-18, 4-
                                                                                          FIGURE 8-35 FIRE MISSION MONITOR - INACTIVE TAB SCREEN ....................... 219
                              19, 4-38 replaced.                                          FIGURE 8-36 FIRE MISSION MONITOR – ON CALL TAB SCREEN ....................... 221
                              Section 4.4.5 steps modified for new screen.                FIGURE 8-37 FIRE MISSION MONITOR – CAS TAB SCREEN .............................. 222
                              Section 4.4.16 modified for new screen options.             FIGURE 9-1 FIST MODE PASSWORD SCREEN .................................................... 224
                              Section 4.4.17 Address notations changed to Unit            FIGURE 9-2 DURESS MODE ACTIVATION CONFIRMATION ................................ 225
                              List.                                                       FIGURE 9-3 DURESS MODE DEACTIVATION CONFIRMATION ............................ 226
                              Section 5.1.2.1 step 11 modified, step 12 removed.
                              Section 5.2.2 new step 1.                                   FIGURE B-1 KEYBOARD.................................................................................... 234
                              Section 5.3.1.4 new step 2.                                 FIGURE B-2 DATA ENTRY OPTION MENU BUTTON .......................................... 235
                              Chapter 6 figure 6-1 replaced.                              FIGURE B-3 DATA ENTRY OPTIONS MENU ....................................................... 235
                              Section 6.3.2 new notation box for searching call           FIGURE B-4 ALIGN SCREEN .............................................................................. 236
                              signs, new steps 4, 5 and 6.
                                                                                          FIGURE E-1 BRIGHTNESS SETTING ................................................................... 260
                              Section 6.4.1 through 6.5.2 steps 1 changed.
                                                                                          FIGURE E-2 ALIGN SCREEN .............................................................................. 260
                              Chapter 7 figures 7-6, 7-14, 7-15, 7-26, 7-35, 7-36, 7-
                              37 replaced.                                                FIGURE E-3 PFED NIGHT VISION FILTER ......................................................... 260
                              Section 7.2.9.2.1 steps 5 & 7 modified.
                              Section 7.2.9.2.2 new step 15b, step 10 more button
                              changed.
                              Section 7.2.9.2.3 step 27 more button changed.
                              Chapter 8 figures 8-1, 8-2, 8-3, 8-15, 8-22, 8-23, 8-24

DRAFT                                  271                             March 16, 2009     DRAFT                                              xiv                                  March 16, 2009
Chapter 1- Introduction and System Overview                  PFED User Manual     Appendix G – Document Change History                              PFED User Manual

                                                                                                                option.
                     CHAPTER 1                                                                                  Section 8.2.2 CFF screen 2 step 26 note box
                                                                                                                removed.
          INTRODUCTION AND SYSTEM OVERVIEW                                                                      Screens that contain Grid, Polar LRF and Shift radio
                                                                                                                buttons changed (Figure 4-30, 4-32, 7-3, 7-5, 7-13,
                                                                                                                7-24, 7-27, 7-28, 7-38, 7-39, 7-41, 7-42, 8-3, 8-21).
1.1     INTRODUCTION                                                                                            Section 7.2.3 step 4 updated with new buttons.
                                                                                                                Section 8.2.1.1 step 3 updated with new buttons.
The Pocket-Sized Forward Entry Device (PFED) software was modified for the            1.5.2       8/30/05       Replaced screens in section 3.2.3 PointSec
U.S. Army by Project Manager for Battle and Command (PM BC). The initial                                        installation.
core PFED hardware and software design leverages software and hardware                1.5.3       9/28/05       Changed text in step 1 of section 4.4.6 removing grid
components previously developed for the Defense Information Systems Agency                                      convergence.
(DISA), the Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency (DARPA), and the                                          Removed original section 4.4.6 Application of Grid
                                                                                                                Convergence.
Army Space & Missile Defense Battle Lab (SMDBL).
                                                                                                                Increased the version number from 1.5.2 to 1.5.3.
                                                                                      1.5.3       10/10/05      Inserted note box in section 5.1.1 noting that SLP
1.2     CONCEPT OF OPERATIONS                                                                                   devices are assumed to support location information.
                                                                                                                Last bullet in section 5.1.1 was added to, to state
The concept of operations for the PFED system has been developed around the                                     designed for IP networks.
need to provide Forward Observers (FO) with a capability to shorten the                                         Inserted note box in section 5.1.1.1 step 7 warning
                                                                                                                that when using a MELIOS device, the declination
timeline for the Call For Fire (CFF) generation process to the Advanced Field                                   must be set to 0.
Artillery Tactical Data System (AFATDS) and on to the firing units, while                                       Inserted note box in section 5.1.1.1 step 6 noting
providing improved target location accuracies consistent with the Army’s                                        configuration of SLP device, northing must be set to
requirements for the Objective Force and emerging precision guided artillery                                    magnetic.
and munitions. The PFED system has been designed for ease of use and                  1.5.3       11/1/05       Moved the change history to appendix H and
maintenance. Its system architecture exploits the data capability of Single                                     updated all changes back to 1.5.1 version dated
                                                                                                                5/24/05 for more accurate change history.
Channel Ground Airborne Radio System (SINCGARS) Advanced Systems
                                                                                      1.5.4      12/02/2005     Removed references to MELIOS
Improvement Program (ASIP) radios as well as a new class of RISC-based
                                                                                                                Added verbiage for alerts when Mark VII and Leica
tactical processors made possible by the handheld Microsoft Windows CE ™                                        not set in PLGR CON
operating system.                                                                                               Added verbiage for when an LRF’s northing
                                                                                                                reference is not set into magnetic
Handheld computer platforms offer smaller size, weight and reduced battery                                      Added verbiage for datum checking
consumption while still providing sufficient computing power and active                                         Added section on magnet variance and grid
day/night readable displays to meet mission requirements.                                                       declination display
                                                                                                                Cross Referenced the index to update the page
                                                                                                                numbers
1.3     SYSTEM OVERVIEW                                                               1.5.5      12/28/2005     Added verbiage for LLDR operation. Use of PFED
                                                                                                                data when there is a discrepancy
The PFED software features the following functions:                                   1.5.6       6/29/06       Updated the following figures: Figure 4-3, 4-5, 4-6,
                                                                                                                4-22, 4-25, 4-29, 4-31, 4-33, 4-42, 5-9, 5-18, 5-19, 5-
        Two-way messaging with Forward Observer System (FOS) and                                                20, 5-23, 6-1, 6-3, 6-2, 7-38, 8-4, 8-8, 8-21.
        AFATDS                                                                                                  Removed section 4.2.6 Preferences Setup
        Global Positioning System (GPS) fixing                                                                  Password.
        Automatic position reporting                                                                            Inserted sections 4.4.16, 9.2.1 Changing FiST
                                                                                                                password.
        FiST capability
                                                                                                                Remove table 5-2.

DRAFT                                 1                          March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                  270                            March 16, 2009
Appendix G – Document Change History                            PFED User Manual      Chapter 1- Introduction and System Overview                        PFED User Manual

                              PSG changed to PYG throughout document for                       Automatic target location calculation based on GPS and laser range
                              Model S.                                                         finder feeds
    1.5.2       7/21/05       Appendix section B.7 Calibrating the PFED has been               CFF generation and monitoring
                              added.
                                                                                               Templates for standard reports/requests, including:
                              Topic Index section moved to Appendix G.
                                                                                                   Position Report
                              Section 4.4.2 Operator Position Location section
                              updated with new description and main screen.
                                                                                                   Size Activity Location unit Time Equipment (SALUTE)/Artillery
                              Figure 4-11, 4-12, 4-13, 4-14 updated.
                                                                                                   Target Information (ATI) Report
                              Section 4.4.2 step 4 and note box removed.                           Nuclear Chemical Biological (NBC) 1 Report
                              Section 7.2.7 Shelling Report step 13 Excalibur                      Medical Evacuation (MEDEVAC) Request
                              selection option added.                                              Rapid Resupply Request
                              Section 8.2.1.1 Danger Close Figure 8-5 alert screen                 Unit Status Report
                              added. Step 3 note box information modified.                         Shelling Report
                              Section 8.2.1.5 step 2, new figure added for flashing                Close Air Support (CAS) Request
                              MagVar information. New note box added in step                       Aircrew Brief
                              and step 3 was modified for new process.
                              Increased document version to 1.5.2.
                                                                                               Free Text Messaging
                                                                                               Application lock and zeroizing function
    1.5.2        8/5/05       Sections 3.4.1 and 3.4.2 Lock and Unlock device
                              removed.                                                         URN Querying
                              Section Edit Menu Overview second bullet has been       The PFED system has interfaces to the following communications and
                              updated.
                                                                                      peripheral devices, including currently fielded equipment:
                              Section 4.4.6 Map Datum Info section step 1 updated
                              with new Map Datum info screen (new capture) for                 SINCGARS ASIP radio via a TacLink 3000 Tactical Modem
                              the removal of Grid Magnetic field. Step 4 changed,
                              steps 6 through 8 removed. Section 4.4.6 paragraph
                                                                                               Precision Lightweight GPS Receiver (PLGR) or internal GPS receiver
                              changed for this update.                                         Leica and 2100 laser range and direction finding binoculars
                              Section 7.2.7 step 13 Excalibur selection option                 LLDR –Laser Range Finding binoculars
                              removed.                                                         Mark VII – Laser Range Finding binoculars
                              Section 8.2.2 step 19 Excalibur selection option                 PRC148 – High Frequency (HF) Radio
                              removed.                                                         PSC5 - Satellite Communication (SATCOM)
                              Section 8.2.2 step 20 note box added stating that a              Two-wire configuration
                              Point Detonating message is sent when Excalibur is
                              chosen.                                                          Precision Fires Image (PFI)
                              Appendix F Night Vision section added.                  The PFED user interface has been designed to provide a touch screen method of
    1.5.2       8/11/05       Section 3.2.2 App Installation step 10 has been         controlling the application. For example, if the FO needs to issue a CFF
                              updated.
                                                                                      message, it can be generated and transmitted by tapping on the appropriate icons
                              Section 3.2.3 PointSec Installation steps 2 through 4
                              have been updated for new procedure.
                                                                                      and menu items on the touch screen display.
                              Appendix F – Night Vision steps have been added.
                              Addition of a new Grid Convergence Alert screen
                              stating that the convergence is not setup in the               : When using the PFED system with the LLDR, there may at times be discrepancies
                              system.                                                 between the calculated target location displayed in PFED and the one displayed in the
                              CFF Screen 2 and CFF Template screen 2 replaced         eyepiece of the LLDR. In these circumstances, the user should use the data displayed
                              in sections 4 and 8.                                    within the PFED application for mission threads.
                              Section 8.2.2 step 16 has been updated for new CFF
                              screen.
                              Section 5.1.1.1 steps 2, 7, 8, 10 updated for change
                              in COMMS setup to remove 188-220C and R5

DRAFT                                  269                          March 16, 2009    DRAFT                                    2                             March 16, 2009
Chapter 2- PFED System Assembly                               PFED User Manual    Appendix G – Document Change History                              PFED User Manual



                          CHAPTER 2                                                                      APPENDIX G
                    PFED SYSTEM ASSEMBLY                                                           DOCUMENT CHANGE HISTORY

2.1     INTRODUCTION                                                              G.1       CHANGE HISTORY TABLE
                                                                                   File Version   Date        Description
The PFED system is comprised of the PFED handheld computer, battery                     1.5.1       5/24/05     Sections 4.4.2.1 through 4.4.2.5 added talking about
compartment and adapter as well as the needed cables for communication to the                                   the new GPS, Non existent GPS, disconnected GPS
peripheral components. These components can be comprised of a SINCGARS                                          etc information.
ASIP radio and the Mark VII, SLP LRF (LLDR) or Leica gear.                                                      Section 4.4.6 Map Datum Info, first three paragraphs
                                                                                                                added.
                                                                                                                Sections 4.4.6 first 2 paragraphs added. Subsection
The operator’s primary interface with the system is through the small handheld                                  covering Magnetic Variance added.
unit.                                                                                                           Figures 5-12, 5-13 updated.
                                                                                                                Last 2 icons added.
                                                                                                                Section 7.2.7 step 2, new step added for new
                                                                                                                Weapon button.
                                                                                                                Section 8.2.1.1 Danger Close paragraph information
                                                                                                                added.
                                                                                                                Table 8-1 last 2 icons added.
                                                                                        1.5.1       5/26/05     Section 2.2 first bullet modified to include Model C, G
                                                                                                                and S information. Step 4 and 5 also modified to
                                                                                                                include other models.
                                                                                                                Section 4.4.2.1 paragraph modified to include Model
                                                                                                                C, G and S information.
                                                                                                                Cover page changed to include Model C, G and S
  Figure 2-1 Basic PFED System using       Figure 2-2 Basic PFED System using                                   information.
       Embedded GPS Handheld                Handheld without Embedded GPS                                       New Figures 2-3, 2-4 have been added top show
         AN/PSG-10 (V)2 w/PPS                         AN/PSG-10 (V)1                                            models C, G and S.
                                                                                                                New Figure 2-7 added to show coil cable for the
                                                                                                                SINCGARS.
2.2     BASIC PFED COMPONENTS                                                                                   Figures 2-12 and 2-13 captions changed to include
                                                                                                                new models.
The basic PFED system is comprised of the following components. Ensure that                                     Figure 2-15 changed and caption modified to show
the following components are present before assembly:                                                           new soft pack.
                                                                                        1.5.1       6/7/05       Topic Index added in front of document.
        The PFED handheld with assembly Dome and embedded GPS -                                                  Section 5.1.1.1 step 5d modified to note Table 5-1.
        AN/PSG-10 (V)2 w/PPS (Figure 2-3)/AN/PSG-10 (V)3 w/SAASM                                                 Table 5-1 added for embedded GPS information.
        (Figure 2-5), or with Dome without embedded GPS - AN/PSG-10 (V)1                                         Section 8.2.1.1 step 3 note box added stating
        (Figure 2-4), and the PFED 5700 handheld (Figure 2-6)                                                    warning added to hit toe correct ok button.
        Cable for connection to the Mark VII (Figure 2-7) – used for serial                                      Section 4.4.12 step 5 note box added stating what
                                                                                                                 happens when the option mils magnetic is selected.
        communication
                                                                                                                 Section 7.2.8 note box added stating CAS briefs ca
        Single Cable for connection to the SINCGARS ASIP Radio (Figure                                           not be sent to FOS 7.01.
        2-8)                                                                                                     Section 8.2.2 step 26 note box added stating when
                                                                                                                 sending to a VMF R5 system.

DRAFT                                  3                         March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                  268                            March 16, 2009
Appendix F – Topic Index                                                                      PFED User Manual              Chapter 2- PFED System Assembly                                   PFED User Manual

   Position Report/Observer Coordinates (OBCO) .......................................... 135                                        Dual Cable for connection to the Mark VII/Leica and PGLR when
                                                                                                                                     using a handheld without the embedded GPS (Figure 2-7 and Figure
   Rapid Resupply Request .............................................................................. 147
                                                                                                                                     2-8).
   SALUTE/ATI Report ................................................................................... 135                         AA Battery Compartment that holds eight (8) or ten (10) AA batteries
                                                                                                                                     (Figure 2-9)
   Shelling Report............................................................................................. 163                  Rugged-Personal Digital Assistant (R-PDA) Battery Adapter (Figure
   Unit Status Report ........................................................................................ 159                   2-10)
                                                                                                                                     Eight (8) or Ten (10) AA type alkaline batteries
   URN Query .................................................................................................. 167                  Mark VII (Figure 2-11)
Security ........................................................................................................... 224             SINCGARS ASIP radio (Figure 2-12)

   FiST Passwords ............................................................................................ 224
                                                                                                                                  : When assembling the PFED system, any plugs not in use should be covered with
   Duress Mode ................................................................................................ 225         the appropriate cap to prevent dirt and water from leaking into the assembly.

System Assembly................................................................................................ 3

Troubleshooting ............................................................................................. 229
   Calibrating PFED ......................................................................................... 235
   Data Communications .................................................................................. 229
   General Troubleshooting Techniques........................................................... 229
   GPS .............................................................................................................. 230
   PFED Computer ........................................................................................... 232
                                                                                                                             Figure 2-3 PFED Handheld with Dome
                                                                                                                                                                        Figure 2-4 PFED Handheld with Dome
                                                                                                                                      and Embedded GPS
                                                                                                                                                                                   AN/PSG-10 (V)1
                                                                                                                                    AN/PSG-10 (V)2 w/PPS




                                                                                                                             Figure 2-5 PFED Handheld with Dome         Figure 2-6 PFED Handheld - 5700 Model
                                                                                                                                  AN/PSG-10 (V)3 w/SAASM


DRAFT                                                    267                                       March 16, 2009           DRAFT                                   4                             March 16, 2009
Chapter 2- PFED System Assembly                                    PFED User Manual     Appendix F – Topic Index                                                                      PFED User Manual

                                                                                           Leica............................................................................................................. 245

                                                                                        PFED Handheld Setup .................................................................................... 56
                                                                                           Address/Unit List Setup ................................................................................. 73
                                                                                           Comms Devices Setup............................................................................ 85, 100
                                                      or
  Figure 2-7 Mark VII Cable
                                                                                           Database Maintenance.................................................................................... 98
                                      Figure 2-8 SINCGARS ASIP Radio Cable
                                                                                           Field Types..................................................................................................... 10
                                                                                           Fire Support Setup.......................................................................................... 85
                                                                                             CFF Templates............................................................................................ 88
                                                                                             FSCMs/Geometries..................................................................................... 92
                                                                                             Known Points ............................................................................................. 90
                                                                                             Planned Target List..................................................................................... 86
                                        Figure 2-11 Mark          Figure 2-12                Target Numbering....................................................................................... 85
                                               VII              SINCGARS ASIP
                                                                     Radio                 GPS/Manual Time Sync ................................................................................ 56

                        Figure 2-10                                                        Initial Setup .................................................................................................... 11
     Figure 2-9           R-PDA                                                              Handheld Device Settings........................................................................... 22
     AA Battery           Battery
    Compartment           Adapter
                                                                                             Handheld External Buttons......................................................................... 29
                                                                                             Initial System Installation ........................................................................... 11
    1.   Locate the AA battery compartment. Insert AA batteries into the battery             Resetting the Device ................................................................................... 21
         compartment.
                                                                                           Keypad Operation .......................................................................................... 10
    2.   Locate the PFED battery adapter. Insert the AA battery compartment into
         the handheld battery adapter.                                                     Map Info......................................................................................................... 79
    3.   Locate the PFED handheld device. Slide the battery adapter onto the left          Operator (Positional) Location ....................................................................... 57
         side of the handheld. Tighten the screw located on the bottom of the
         adapter.                                                                          Own Unit Information/Setup.......................................................................... 73
    4.   When using a handheld with Embedded GPS (AN/PSG-10 (V)2 w/PPS,
                                                                                           Preferences Setup ........................................................................................... 94
         AN/PSG-10 (V)3 w/SAASM):
                                                                                             Automatic Position Reporting .................................................................... 95
         a.   Attach the Mark VII cable to the plug located on bottom of the handheld
              device.                                                                        Hotkeys....................................................................................................... 97
                                                                                             Measurement Units..................................................................................... 94
         b.   Attach the other end of this same cable to the plug located on the back        SALUTE/ATI ............................................................................................. 98
              underside of the Mark VII device.
                                                                                           Waypoint/Route Configuration and Navigation............................................. 63
         c.   Assembly of the handheld and Mark VII should look similar to the image
              in Figure 2-13.                                                           Reports............................................................................................................ 134
                                                                                           CAS Request ................................................................................................ 169
                                                                                           CAS Aircrew Briefing.................................................................................. 173
                                                                                           MEDEVAC Request .................................................................................... 138
                                                                                           NBC 1 Report............................................................................................... 155
DRAFT                                   5                             March 16, 2009    DRAFT                                                    266                                       March 16, 2009
Appendix F – Topic Index                                                                    PFED User Manual              Chapter 2- PFED System Assembly                                     PFED User Manual

   Activating the Application ............................................................................. 51
   PFED Navigation ........................................................................................... 53
   Toolbar Options.............................................................................................. 54

Messaging ....................................................................................................... 123
   Address/Unit List ......................................................................................... 110
   Accessing the Message Screen..................................................................... 123
                                                                                                                                                 Figure 2-13 Embedded PFED Handheld
   Receiving a Message (Inbox) ....................................................................... 126                                              (AN/PSG-10 (V)2 w/PPS)
     Auto Routing ............................................................................................ 132                                       and Mark VII Assembly
     Deleting .................................................................................................... 132             d.   Attach the ASIP SINCGARS cable to the plug located at the top of the
     Denying .................................................................................................... 130                   handheld device dome.
     Editing ...................................................................................................... 131
     Forwarding/Replying................................................................................ 130                       e.   Attach the other end of this cable to the SINCGARS radio plug located
                                                                                                                                        on the front of the device.
     Locking/Unlocking ................................................................................... 131
     Routing ..................................................................................................... 129
     Sorting ...................................................................................................... 128           : When setting the Data Rates/Modes for the SINCGARS Radio, keep in mind that
     Updating ................................................................................................... 130     all settings must be the same on one network.
     Viewing .................................................................................................... 128
   Sending a Message (New PTM)................................................................... 123
     Composing a Message .............................................................................. 124                     : For the Tactical Fire (TACFIRE), it is recommended that the SINCGARS ASIP
     Deleting a Saved Message ........................................................................ 126                Radio Data Rate be set to TF.
     Opening a Saved Message ........................................................................ 125
                                                                                                                              5.   When using a handheld without Embedded GPS (AN/PSG-10 (V)1):
     Saving Messages....................................................................................... 124
     Selecting Priority ...................................................................................... 125                 a.   Attach the dual Mark VII/PLGR or Leica/PLGR cable, based on which
                                                                                                                                        Laser Range Finder (LRF) unit you will be using, to the plug located on
     Selecting Recipients.................................................................................. 124                         top left-hand side of the handheld device.
     Transmitting a Message ............................................................................ 126
                                                                                                                                   b.   Attach the single radio cable to the plug located on the top right-hand
   Sent Messages (Outbox)............................................................................... 132                            side of the handheld device.
     Deleting .................................................................................................... 133
                                                                                                                                   c.   Assembly of the handheld should look similar to the image in Figure
     Viewing .................................................................................................... 133                   2-14.
Night Vision .................................................................................................... 259              d.   Locate the PLGR device. Locate the rectangular pin connector on the
                                                                                                                                        dual Mark VII/PLGR or the Leica/PLGR cable. Plug this into the
Peripheral Hardware Setup and Operation ................................................ 237                                            connector located on the bake-side of the PLGR (Figure 2-15).
   LLDR Setup ................................................................................................. 250                e.   The PLGR is powered by one BA5800 or compatible battery. See the
                                                                                                                                        PLGR User’s Guide for more information on assembly and operation of
   Mark VII....................................................................................................... 240                  the PLGR.
   PLGR............................................................................................................ 237            f.   Locate either the Leica or Mark VII device. Locate the round connector
                                                                                                                                        on the dual Mark VII/PLGR or the Leica/PLGR cable. Plug this into the
   SINCGARS ASIP ........................................................................................ 237                           connector located on the bottom right side of the Leica or the top right
                                                                                                                                        side of the Mark VII.
DRAFT                                                   265                                       March 16, 2009          DRAFT                                    6                              March 16, 2009
Chapter 2- PFED System Assembly                                     PFED User Manual    Appendix F – Topic Index                                                                   PFED User Manual

         g.   Locate the SINCGARS ASIP Radio device. Locate the round
              connector on the SINCGARS ASIP Radio cable. Plug this into the                                                        APPENDIX F
              connector located on the front-side of the SINCGARS ASIP Radio.
                                                                                                                                    TOPIC INDEX
         h.   The SINCGARS ASIP is powered by type BB590. See the SINCGARS
              ASIP Operator’s Manual for more information on configuring and
              operating the SINCGARS ASIP Radio.                                        F.1         TOPIC INDEX

                                                                                        Acronym List.................................................................................................. 227
        : When setting the Data Rates/Modes for the SINCGARS Radio, keep in mind that
all settings must be the same on one network.                                           Call For Fire ................................................................................................... 181
                                                                                           Call For Fire Request ................................................................................... 182
                                                                                             CFF (Screen 1).......................................................................................... 183
       : For the TACFIRE, it is recommended that the SINCGARS ASIP Radio Data Rate
be set to TF.                                                                                CFF - Extended (Screen 2) ....................................................................... 196
                                                                                             Sending CFF Template Fire Mission........................................................ 203
    6.   Complete the assembly by packing the PFED into the softpack (Figure
         2-16).
                                                                                           Fire Mission Monitor ................................................................................... 204
                                                                                             Monitoring Active Targets........................................................................ 204
                                                                                                Canceling an At My Command (AMC) ................................................ 211
                                                                                                Check Firing.......................................................................................... 214
                                                                                                Confirming Denied Missions ................................................................ 207
                                                                                                Log Information .................................................................................... 216
                                                                                                Making Subsequent Corrections ........................................................... 209
                                                                                                Message to Observer (MTO)................................................................. 205
                                                                Figure 2-16 PFED
                                                                                                New Call For Fire.................................................................................. 216
    Figure 2-14 PFED            Figure 2-15 PFED and
  Handheld (AN/PSG-10              PLGR Assembly              Softpack – Case Field             Repeat Fire For Effect and Cease Loading Command .......................... 211
     (V)1) Front-end                                               Olive Drab                   Report Upon Firing ............................................................................... 208
  Subsystem Assembly                                                                            Sending the Fire Command................................................................... 211
                                                                                                Sending End of Mission (EOM)............................................................ 212
2.2.1    Uniform Integration                                                                    Set Mission to Inactive.......................................................................... 213
                                                                                             Inactive Fire Missions............................................................................... 218
The following recommendations outline the ideal configuration and rationale for              Planned Fire Missions......................................................................... 86, 217
integrating the PFED system with your uniform. The handheld unit can be                      On Call Fire Missions............................................................................... 220
stored in any available space that provides easy access to the system, although
certain positions have been found to be better than others.                             Change History .............................................................................................. 266
         The PFED computer should be carried at or above the waist; placing             Communications Status................................................................................. 116
         the device in a pants pocket drastically increases the likelihood of
                                                                                           Status Information ........................................................................................ 117
         damaging the system in the course of routine infantry combat tasks.
         The best places to carry the PFED device are in an upper pocket on the            Testing & Resetting a Device....................................................................... 118
         Battle Dress Uniform (BDU) blouse or in an ammunition pouch on the
         load bearing gear.                                                                Transmission Queue..................................................................................... 118

                                                                                        Error/Alert Messages........................................................................56, 122, 252

                                                                                        Main Screen...................................................................................................... 51
DRAFT                                    7                             March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                                  264                                      March 16, 2009
Appendix E – PFED With Night Vision Goggles                           PFED User Manual       Chapter 2- PFED System Assembly                             PFED User Manual

        g.   To remove the filter, pull back the material at the center of either the left   2.2.2   Additional Devices
             or right side of the screen and peel it away gently.
                                                                                             The above assembly pertains to the basic PFED system. The following are other
    11. On the Align screen tap                      to start the process.                   peripheral devices that can be used with this system.
    12. Perform a screen alignment process by tapping the stylus in the center of
        the five (5) crosshairs that appear on the screen. If the alignment does not
        work the first time, the Align screen will reappear asking you to repeat the
        process. Make sure you tap in the very center of the crosshairs.
    13. The system will return you to the initial Align screen when the process is
        complete. To exit this screen, tap      in the top right corner.
    14. Then tap     in the top right corner to return to the Today screen.                                              Figure 2-18 Leica




                                                                                                Figure 2-17 PLGR                                  Figure 2-19 Leica/PLGR
                                                                                                                                                           Cable




DRAFT                                    263                              March 16, 2009     DRAFT                               8                          March 16, 2009
Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup                                              PFED User Manual      Appendix E – PFED With Night Vision Goggles                          PFED User Manual



                                CHAPTER 3
                              HANDHELD SETUP

3.1     INTRODUCTION

3.1.1     Handheld/Desktop Device Application Differences
Each handheld device is a mobile computer much like any desktop computer but
more compact in design. It operates software applications with the same look                       Figure E-1 Brightness Setting
and feel as any other Microsoft Windows ™ desktop computer, such as clicking
on a Save button with a mouse is the same as tapping on a Save button with a
handheld stylus pen. However, there are a few differences between these
devices that you will need to be aware.
          When accessing a screen, application, selecting an option, or hitting an                                                                  Figure E-2 Align Screen

          action button (i.e.,       ,        ), you only need to tap the screen
          once with the stylus pen. You do not need to tap twice as you would
          do when double-clicking a mouse button.
          In a Microsoft Windows CE ™ operating system, there is no taskbar at
          the bottom of the handheld screen. To change from one application to
          another, the Title Bar across the top of the screen found in all
          applications will allow the operator to temporarily minimize an
          application and access another.

      : Be aware, the following two (2) bullets are referring to the handheld system
applications only.                                                                                                    Figure E-3 PFED Night Vision Filter
                                                                                                      a.   Remove any protective skins that might still be affixed to either side of
          On most of the system application windows you will see an in the                                 the filter.
          top right-hand corner. This button functions like an Ok or Save
          operation. It will save and exit the current window.                                        b.   Slightly “bow” the filter lengthwise and insert the two lower corners first.
          The found on most of the system application windows functions like                          c.   Repeat this process with the upper two corners.
          a Cancel operation. Tapping this button will close the current window
                                                                                                      d.   Carefully tuck the perimeter of the filter into the edge of the screen all
          and not save any entered information.                                                            along the perimeter starting with the two long sides.
                                                                                                      e.   After installation, there might be a small gap of light bleed. To remove
      : Be aware, the following two (2) bullets are referring to the PFED application only.                this bleed, start at the center of the filter and glide your thumb along it
                                                                                                           to move the material towards the crack (or light bleed area). This idea
          In most PFED windwos you will see or         in the top right-hand                               is much like removing the bumps or bulges you might have when
          corner. These buttons function like a Cancel operation. Tapping or                               installing carpet. This process may also take a few times with a newer
             will exit the current window and drop any changes made on that                                filter that is stiff or tight.
          screen unless you had previously saved your entries where it applies.                       f.   When the surface of a filter builds up too much surface debris, it may
                                                                                                           not cling properly. This can be cleaned with water and air dried.

DRAFT                                       9                               March 16, 2009    DRAFT                                    262                             March 16, 2009
Appendix E – PFED With Night Vision Goggles                                PFED User Manual      Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup                                             PFED User Manual

                                                                                                           The found on the Main PFED screen functions like a Minimize
                           APPENDIX E                                                                      operation. It will minimize the application, much like the on a
                 PFED WITH NIGHT VISION GOGGLES                                                            desktop computer (refer to section 4.2.2 Minimizing PFED for
                                                                                                           complete instructions on minimizing the PFED application).
E.1        HOW TO OPERATE PFED IN NIGHT MODE                                                     3.1.2     Keypad Operation

      1.   On the devices main Today screen, tap             found at the top of the screen
                                                                                                           : There are times when the keypad will be obstructing access to either needed
           in the Title bar.
                                                                                                 fields or operational buttons. To avoid this problem, the operator should keep the keypad
      2.   Tap the Settings menu option.
                                                                                                 minimized by tapping      at the bottom of the screen as frequently as possible.

      3.   From the main Settings screen, tap the                  tab at the bottom to access
           the handheld system setting options.
                                                                                                        : You may also tap      at the bottom of the screen to access the keypad at any
                                                                                                 time (refer to section B.6 PFED Computer for troubleshooting information on keypad
      4.   In the list of available icons, there is an option for backlight (    ). If you       problems).
           do not see it right away, you may need to scroll through the list using the
           stylus and the scroll bar to the right of the screen.
      5.   When you have found this picture icon, tap it once. This will access the
           Settings – Backlight configuration screen.

      6.   Tap the                tab at the bottom to access settings for the screen
           brightness level.
                                                                                                                           Figure 3-1 Handheld Popup Keypad
      7.   In the On Battery option, tap and hold the stylus on the slider and adjust the
           slider up to the second tick (Figure E-1).
      8.   Tap     at the top right.                                                                   : The Pop-up Keypad functions much like a typical computer keyboard with certain
                                                                                                 exceptions:
                                                                                                           123 – shows keys found on the right side of a computer keyboard & all symbols
      9.   In the list of available icons, tap the Screen icon (         ) to access the Align             CAP – shows upper case letters and number keys as their associated symbols
           screen (Figure E-2).                                                                            Shift – shows upper case letters and number keys as their associated symbols
      10. Place the PFED handheld night vision filter over the handheld screen and                                        - moves the cursor left or right and up or down
          snap it in place (Figure E-3).
                                                                                                 3.1.3     Field Types
                                                                                                 While using the PFED application, you will find several types of fields to
                                                                                                 complete. Most fields will be of the text type where the operator will need to
                                                                                                 use a keypad to enter the needed information.

                                                                                                 Another field type is a drop-down selection list (Figure 3-2). These can be
                                                                                                 recognized by the down-arrow ( ) symbol usually to the right of a field label.
                                                                                                 By tapping on this symbol, a selection list will appear. Some lists will be too
                                                                                                 long to display all options, so a scroll bar will be available to scroll through the
                                                                                                 list. The chosen option is then displayed in the field.

DRAFT                                        261                               March 16, 2009    DRAFT                                      10                              March 16, 2009
Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup                                       PFED User Manual    Appendix D – PFED Error Messages                                 PFED User Manual

There are also button style fields (Figure 3-3). In most cases these fields will      User Info            Please select a PLATFORM TYPE.
display a secondary screen when tapped. These secondary screens are used for                               You must enter a Unit Name or URN.
completing these types of fields. These fields may also be completed using the        WayPoint             WayPoint already exists with this name, update the existing
                                                                                                           WayPoint's location?
available keypad ( ) rather than going to the secondary screen.
                                                                                                           Select Waypoint to delete
                                                                                                           Select Waypoint to edit.
Others are radio buttons (Figure 3-4) that allow only one choice and in some
                                                                                                           Select Waypoint to navigate to
limited cases will display a secondary screen for more information. However,
typically they may be selected by simply tapping one option.

One other type you may find will be check boxes (Figure 3-5). These fields
allow more than one selection under a specific category, and at times will
automatically check other options when one item is selected.

Some fields that require only a number value, there may be an up/down-arrow
shown ( ). These fields may be displayed in conjunction with a button field
(Figure 3-6). These types of fields may be completed one of two ways. The
associated button may be tapped to access the secondary screen to allow entry.
Or, the up/down-arrow may be tapped to scroll to the correct numeric value.
Tapping the up-arrow will begin the values at “1” and the down-arrow will
begin at the largest value allowed for the field (e.g., 100, 999, etc).




                                                           Figure 3-4 Radio Button
                                                                Field Example
                              Figure 3-3 Button Field
                                    Examples

 Figure 3-2 Drop-down
 Selection List Example




                                                        Figure 3-6 Up/Down-Arrow
        Figure 3-5 Check Box Field Example                    Field Example


3.2     INITIAL SYSTEM INSTALLATION (3900 MODEL)

The following section shows the Initial Installation for the AN/PSG-10 (V)2
w/PPS, AN/PSG-10 (V)3 w/SAASM, or the AN/PSG-10 (V)1 handheld devices.
Refer to section 3.7 for instructions for the 5700 models.


DRAFT                                  11                           March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                 260                            March 16, 2009
Appendix D – PFED Error Messages                                PFED User Manual     Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup                                             PFED User Manual

                      Please enter WIDTH.                                            The following procedures are performed when installing the PFED application
 System Alerts        Select alert to delete.                                        on either a new handheld device that does not yet contain any software or
 TACFIRE              Please select Baud Rate                                        configuration settings, or, when an existing device needs to be completely
                      Please Select EDC Mode                                         reconfigured due to a memory loss or damage.
                      Please Select High Subsequent NAD
                      Please Select Low Initial NAD
                      Please select Modulation
                      Please Select NAD
                                                                                                   : The instructions in section 3.2 are only used by System Administrators for
 TacLink              Network name already used, please choose a different net       initial PFED installation and setup. They are not recommended for use by field operators.
                      name.                                                          Unless an operator is directly instructed by an Administrator to perform such a function,
                      Network Name must be defined                                   there should be no need to perform a Hard Reset and a Re-Installation of the system while
                      Station Rank MUST be less than Number of Stations!             in the field.
 Target Block         Please enter the END target number.
                      Please enter the START target number.                          3.2.1     Hard Reset Using External Buttons on the 3900
                      START target number must begin with two letters.
                      The End number must be greater than the Start number.
 Track Edit           Please enter a LOCATION.
                      Please enter a STRENGTH/SIZE between 0 and 1000.                           : The following procedure should only be used as a “Last Resort.” The
 Track Overlay        Please enter your allocated Target Block.                      operator should access the Hard Reset application from the Start menu (refer to section
                                                                                     3.2.1).
 TwoWire              Failed to create/open output file
 TxActivity           Could not Abort message - send is in progress.                      1.   If not already off, power off the handheld device by pressing the small round
                      Could not Defer message - send is in progress.                           button at the top right-hand corner of the device (Figure 3-7). Next, you will
                      Please select a message.                                                 need to remove any external power sources the device may have.
                      Send is in progress.
 Unit Info            You must enter a Observer ID.
                                                                                               : This next step (step 2 below) instructs you to remove the Expansion Power
                      You must enter a Unit Name and URN.
                                                                                     Pack on the back of the device. This WILL void any warranty associated with the device
 Unit List            Delete selected address?                                       and the power pack. ONLY perform this process for emergency reasons or if directly
                      Please check-mark unit(s) to delete.                           instructed to do so by an Administrator.
                      Please select a Unit(s).
                                                                                          2.   You will need a small Phillips screwdriver for this step. Remove the
                      Please select an address to edit                                         Expansion power pack on the back of the device by removing the four (4)
                      The address could not be retrieved.                                      screws found along the left and right side of the pack (Figure 3-8).
                      The radio subscriber list must be reset. This process may           3.   Also, remove any external power cable that may be attached to the bottom
                      take up to 15 seconds.
                                                                                               of the device (Figure 3-9).
 Unit Select          Please select a Unit(s).
 Unit Status          Please enter LENGTH.
                      Please enter WIDTH.
 UnitConnect          The maximum number of stations on this network has been
                      reached, please delete one from the net.
 URN Query            Cannot Query on your own URN!
                      Please enter a URN to add
                      Please select URN to add to Query.
                      Please select URNs to query on.
                      URN must be between 0 and 6499999

DRAFT                                259                            March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                      12                              March 16, 2009
Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup                                          PFED User Manual      Appendix D – PFED Error Messages                               PFED User Manual

                                                                                                                Please select Modulation
                                                                                           Outbox               Delete Selected Messages?
                                                                                           Password             Blank passwords are not allowed.
         Power                                                       Expansion                                  Incorrect Password
         Button                                                     Pack Screws                                 New and confirm passwords do not match.
                                                                                                                New Password and Confirm New Password differ.
                                                                                                                The old password is incorrect.
     Figure 3-7 Device Power Button                                                                             Your password has been changed.
                                                                                           Planned Target       No more Target Numbers available, Please set Target Block
                                                                                                                Please enter full Target Number
                                                 Figure 3-8 Expansion Pack Screw                                Please enter SIZE/STRENGTH.
                                                             Locations
                                                                                                                Please enter the target LOCATION.
                                                                                                                Please select the TARGET TYPE.
                                                                                                                Target already exists, edit existing target?
                                                                  External Power           Platform Status      Corrupt UnitStatus Database!
                                                                      Cable
                                                                                           Reports              Report/request is not available.
                                                                                           Resupply             No data has been entered
                                                                                                                Please enter a LOCATION.
                                                                                                                You cannot have more than 25 items in a resupply report.
                                                                                           Review Message       Editing of messages can result in databases being out of
                                                                                                                sync!!
                     Figure 3-9 External Power Cable Location
                                                                                                                Message could not be accessed.
    4.   Power the handheld “on” by pressing the small round button at the top right-      Route                Please enter Route's Name!
         hand corner of the device.                                                                             Please select at least one Waypoint!
    5.   Perform a hard reset on the device. Do this by first locating the stylus                               Select a row.
         (Figure 3-10).                                                                                         Select Route to navigate to
    6.   Next, locate the reset button (a recessed button) found on the underside of                            Select Waypoint to edit.
         the device (Figure 3-12) and the device operation buttons.                        Salute               Please enter a LOCATION.
    7.   Now perform a “hard reset” by using two (2) fingers of one hand to press                               Please enter a STRENGTH/SIZE between 0 and 9999.
         and hold the two (2) outside buttons found at the bottom of the device while                           Please select a PLATFORM TYPE.
         simultaneously pressing the stylus tip into the reset button (Figure 3-12).                            Please select THREAT TYPE.
         Hold this position for about 10 seconds until the screen goes completely
         blank.                                                                            Saved Messages       Select a message to delete.
                                                                                                                Select a row.
    8.   Once the screen has gone blank, you may release all of the buttons.
                                                                                           Set Time             Error Setting Time.
    9.   Lastly, use the stylus and press the reset button once more very lightly until    Shelling             Please enter a LOCATION.
         the Compaq splash screen appears. The system will then display a
                                                                                                                Please select a Caliber.
         Welcome screen (Figure 3-13).
                                                                                                                Please select a Detection Method.
                                                                                                                Please select a Weapon Subtype.
                                                                                                                Please select a Weapon Type.
                                                                                                                The END time must be later than the start time.
                                                                                           Size                 Please enter ATTITUDE.
                                                                                                                Please enter LENGTH.
                                                                                                                Please enter RADIUS.
DRAFT                                    13                             March 16, 2009    DRAFT                                258                           March 16, 2009
Appendix D – PFED Error Messages                                   PFED User Manual     Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup                                          PFED User Manual

                       Please enter ALTITUDE.
                       Please enter hemisphere for longitude                                                                              Reset
                       Please select hemisphere for latitude                                                                              Button
                       Please select hemisphere for longitude.
                                                                                                                        Stylus
                       Please select the hemisphere for the latitude
 Location Name         Please enter a position name                                                                                         Figure 3-11 Reset Button
                       Please enter a valid position
 Location Polar        Are you sure you want to cancel (data will be discarded)?
 Main                  Please enter a primary destination address.                                Figure 3-10 Stylus Pen
                       Please enter your allocated Target Block.
                       Please enter your altitude.                                                                   Right Button
                       Please enter your location.
                       The Voice Activation module is not loaded on this system.
 Map Datum             Invalid Datum Selected
                       Invalid Datum, Ellipsoid, Area combination                          Left Button
                       Invalid Ellipsoid
 Mark Location         Location already exists, edit existing location?
                                                                                                                      Reset Button
                       Please enter a LOCATION.
                       Please select a COLOR.                                              Figure 3-12 Performing “Hard Rest”
 Medevac               Either Location or Pick Up Zone Name allowed, not both
                       Enemy Data Must be entered
                       Please enter a Pick Up Location or a Pick Up Zone Name
                       Please enter a REQUEST NUMBER.
                       Please enter the Battle Roster (BR) NUMBER.
                       Please select a direction to delete.                                                                              Figure 3-13 Handheld Welcome
                       Please select CONTAMINATION.                                                                                                  Screen
                       Please select MARKINGS.
                                                                                            10. Once the handheld Welcome screen appears, you may reassemble the
                       Please select PZ SECURITY.
                                                                                                handheld. With your small Phillips screwdriver, replace the Expansion
                       Please select the DIRECTION to ENEMY.                                    power pack on the back of the device by re-attaching the four (4) screws
                       REQUEST NUMBER must be 5 characters long.                                found along the left and right side of the pack (Figure 3-8).
                       You may not enter 'Branches, Stones' or 'Fabric Strips' for an       11. Then, replace any external power cables that may have been removed
                       Air mission.                                                             previously (Figure 3-9). Then follow the instructions in section 3.2.3.
 Message To Observer   Laser Alert Time: <intiger> sec’s.
 Messaging Manager     <string> routed from <string> to <string>                        3.2.2    Hard Reset Using Reset Application on the 3900
                       Position Report received older than stored position for unit.
                       Database not updated                                                 1.   On the devices main Today screen, tap         in the Title bar and select
 NBC1                  Please enter NBC1 Location.                                               Reset (Figure 3-14).
                       Please select Burst Type                                             2.   Tap                to begin the hard reset process. Then follow the
                       Please select Delivery Means.                                             instructions in section 3.2.3.
                       The END attack time must be later than the start time.
 Net 188220a           Please select Baud Rate
                       Please select ComSec mode
                       Please select Frequency Hopping mode
DRAFT                                  257                             March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                       14                          March 16, 2009
Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup                                          PFED User Manual      Appendix D – PFED Error Messages                                   PFED User Manual

3.2.3    Reset Process on the 3900                                                                                EOM received for <string>
                                                                                                                  Fire CMD received for <string>
    1.   The Welcome screen for Windows will display and ask that you tap the
         screen to continue. Go ahead and tap the screen once to display the Align                                Fire Mission received
         screen (Figure 3-15).                                                                                    MTO received for <string>
    2.   Perform a screen alignment process by tapping the stylus in the center of                                MTO received for mission not in buffers!
         the five (5) crosshairs that appear on the screen (Figure 3-15). If the                                  Subs Adjust received for <string>
         alignment does not work the first time, the Alignment screen will reappear                               Subsequent Adjust received for mission not in mission buffers
         asking you to repeat the process. Make sure you tap in the very center of         Fire Mission Monitor   FPF missions must have LINEAR target data. Please verify
         the crosshairs.                                                                                          the size information.
    3.   When the alignment process is complete, a Stylus screen will appear giving                               No changes have been made.
         you some general information about using the stylus pen. To pass this                                    Please enter ADJUST data!
         screen, tap             .                                                                                Please enter the ATTITUDE for the FPF line.
    4.   The next few screens ask you to tap and hold the stylus pen on a few items                               Please select a TARGET#.
         shown to give you a little practice using the instrument. On the first screen,    Formatted Edit         Invalid Length
         tap and hold the stylus on the name Dr. Johnson’s Office until a pop-up                                  Invalid Range
         menu appears.                                                                     Free Text              Enter text to send.
    5.   In the pop-up menu tap the Cut option.                                                                   Please Specify at Least One Recipient
    6.   Next tap and hold the stylus on the item number 11 that is being indicated        Geometry               <string> deleted from FSCM/Geometry database
         on the screen until another pop-up menu appears.                                                         <string> updated in FSCM/Geometry database
    7.   In the pop-up menu tap the Paste option.                                                                 A Line requires at least 2 points.
                                                                                                                  EFFECTIVE TIME must be before the EXPIRATION TIME.
    8.   On the last screen, tap         to pass the Congratulation’s screen and                                  FSCM/Geometry database purged
         move on to the Location screen.
                                                                                                                  GEOMETRY (shape/points) data is incomplete.
    9.   In the Location screen, tap the to the right of the Time Zone field and                                  The following geometries have expired and will be purged
         select the appropriate time zone you are located (i.e., GMT-5 Eastern US for                             immediately. They will be deleted upon application exit or
         the US East Coast, etc.).                                                                                system power-up.
    10. Then tap             .                                                             Inbox                  You are limited to protecting 10 files!
                                                                                           Known Points           Known Point already exists. Overwrite existing data?
    11. Tap once anywhere on the next two (2) final screens to take you to the
        devices’ Today screen (Figure 3-16).                                                                      Known Point Number already exists, overwrite existing?
                                                                                                                  Please enter a location
                                                                                                                  Please enter the point LOCATION.
                                                                                                                  Please enter the POINT NUMBER.
                                                                                           Laser Info             INVALID LASER/PRF CODE: One or more blank digit field
                                                                                           Local-Non-Local        Please select a Unit to receive this message.
                                                                                           Addressing
                                                                                           Location Grid          Are you sure you want to cancel (data will be discarded)?
                                                                                                                  Error Setting Time.
                                                                                                                  Invalid 100,000 METER ZONE (2nd box).
                                                                                                                  Invalid GRID ZONE (1st box).
                                                                                                                  Invalid LAT/LON.
                                                                                                                  Invalid MGRS coordinate.
                                                                                                                  Invalid UTM coordinate.
                                                                                                                  Please enter a 6, 8, or 10 digit grid.

DRAFT                                    15                             March 16, 2009    DRAFT                                   256                            March 16, 2009
Appendix D – PFED Error Messages                                    PFED User Manual      Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup                                         PFED User Manual

 Call For Fire More     Please enter QUICK SMOKE data.
                        Please select a Smoke FFE Projectile.
 Call For Fire Smoke    Please select a DURATION.
                        Please select a SHEAF LENGTH.
                        Please select the CLOUD COVERAGE.
                        Please select the WIND DIRECTION.
 CAS Request            Please enter a CAS Mission Number that is 5 characters long.
                        Please enter a FIRE PLAN NAME.
                        Please enter a LOCATION.
                        Please enter a MISSION PRIORITY.
                        Please enter the CAS Mission Number.
                        Please select a TARGET TYPE.
                        Please select the MISSION TYPE.
                        Please specify the Initial Point Location.
                        Please specify the Initial Point Name.
 Check Fire             Cancel check firing on ALL targets?                                    Figure 3-14 Reset Application            Figure 3-15 Stylus Alignment Screen
                        Check firing on ALL targets?
 Close Air Support      Please specify the egress Cardinal Direction or Offset.
 Egress
 Cloud Data             Please select cloud Top or Bottom.
 Comms                  Do you want to delete all member network data associated
                        with this device?
                        Please select Network connections to delete
                        Unable to add device.
 Database               <string> database is <intiger> percent full, please delete some
                        records
 Database Manager       Are you sure you want to delete all unit addresses?
                        Are you sure you want to delete PFED settings?
                        Cannot delete
                        Could not delete registry.
                        Delete selected databases?
 End Of Mission         WARNING!!!! Deleting Mission without a Target Number can
                        corrupt Data, Continue?                                                                        Figure 3-16 Today Screen
                        WARNING!!!! PFED may become out of sync with fire support
                        systems processing this mission. Proper procedure to              3.2.4    Application Installation on the 3900
                        inactivate missions is sending EOM. Continue?
 Fire Mission Manager   <string> received for <string>                                        1.   Insert the small SD memory card into the top of the handheld device. Make
                                                                                                   sure the SD memory card is seated all the way into the slot.
                        <string> routed from <string> to <string>
                        Cancel Check Firing received for <string>                             2.   On the devices main Today screen, tap         found at the top of the screen
                        Cancel Check Firing received for mission not in buffers.                   in the Title bar and select the Programs item. Then tap the File Explorer
                        Cease Loading received for mission not in buffers.                         program icon. This will display the File Explorer screen.
                        Check Firing received for <string>                                    3.   Tap found at the right of the My Documents title. Then select My Device
                        Check Firing received for mission not in buffers.                          from the drop-down.
                        Delete message received for <string>                                  4.   From the displayed list, tap the Storage Card option.
DRAFT                                   255                             March 16, 2009    DRAFT                                    16                            March 16, 2009
Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup                                           PFED User Manual     Appendix D – PFED Error Messages                                  PFED User Manual

    5.   To begin the installtion process, tap the file name Install. This will display
         the DoD Install Warning screen (Figure 3-17).                                                              APPENDIX D
    6.   Tap             . The system will then display a hard reset prompt (Figure                         PFED ERROR/ALERT MESSAGES
         3-18).
    7.   Tap      at the top right of the window.                                         D.1       ERROR/ALERT MESSAGES
         a.    If the system requests a hard reset, perform steps 3 through 12 in
               section 3.2.1 to hard reset the device.                                        Appears in …                                    Message
                                                                                           Address                Call Sign cannot be blank!
         b.    You may need to repeat the steps in this section to begin the
                                                                                                                  Delete selected address?
               installation process again.
                                                                                                                  Please check-mark address(es) to delete.
         c.    Once the reset has completed, continue to step 8 below to complete                                 Please select a recipient(s).
               the process.
                                                                                                                  Please select an address to edit
    8.   The system will then install the application and all needed tools. If you                                The address could not be retrieved.
         watch the title bar area, it will display the items it is installing.                                    The maximum number of stations on this network has been
    9.   When the system has installed all of the tools and software, the Date/Time                               The radio subscriber list must be reset. This process may
         Entry screen will display (Figure 3-19). Enter the current date and time here                            take up to 15 seconds.
         and tap            when finished.                                                                        URN cannot be blank!
                                                                                                                  URN must be unique!
                                                                                           Air Crew Briefing      Please enter a CAS Mission Number that is 5 characters long.
                                                                                                                  Please enter EGRESS Information.
                                                                                                                  Please enter required data in Lines 3-7.
                                                                                                                  Please enter required data in Lines 8-9.
                                                                                                                  Please enter the CAS Mission Number.
                                                                                                                  Please enter the TARGET LOCATION.
                                                                                                                  Please select a MARKING TYPE.
                                                                                                                  Please select a Target Number
                                                                                                                  Please select a TARGET TYPE.
                                                                                                                  Please specify the Contact Point Location.
                                                                                                                  Please specify the Initial Point Location.
                                                                                                                  Please specify the Initial Point Name.
                                                                                           App Lock               Continue unlocking system?
                                                                                                                  Incorrect Password
                                                                                           Call For Fire          ALERT!: This Mission is specified as a moving target
Figure 3-17 DoD Install Warning Screen              Figure 3-18 Hard Reset Prompt                                 FPF missions must have LINEAR target data. Please verify
                                                                                                                  the size information.
                                                                                                                  No More Target Numbers, please set up Target Block
                                                                                                                  Please enter a LOCATION.
                                                                                                                  Please enter the ATTITUDE for the FPF line.
                                                                                                                  Please select a TARGET TYPE.
                                                                                                                  Please select the MISSION TYPE.
                                                                                           Call For Fire Adjust   Please enter a value for DIRECTION.
                                                                                                                  Please enter SHIFT data.
                                                                                                                  There are no known locations.
DRAFT                                      17                            March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                  254                            March 16, 2009
Appendix C – Peripheral Hardware Setup and Operation    PFED User Manual     Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup                                        PFED User Manual

                      Select AVAM MODE
                      Select INTERNAL NORMAL for MODE
                      Select MILS for ANGULAR UNITS
                      Select EXIT
        e.   Select AVAM MAGVAR
                      Select MAGNETIC for NORTH REFERENCE
                      Select EXIT
                      Select QUIT
        f.   Select SYSTEM INFO
                      Select SAVE SETTINGS
                      Select EXIT
                      Select QUIT




                                                                                                     Figure 3-19 Date/Time Entry Screen

                                                                                 10. The system will then process through the PointSec Security installation
                                                                                     process. From here, follow the instructions found in section 3.2.5.

                                                                             3.2.5    PointSec Installation or System Recovery on the 3900
                                                                                 1.   When date/time entry is complete the system will display the PointSec
                                                                                      Security ID screen (Figure 3-20). On this screen enter a system ID for
                                                                                      configuring the PointSec security software. When ready, tap     in the top
                                                                                      right hand corner.
                                                                                 2.   Draw any straight line across the blank PointSec Line Draw screen (Figure
                                                                                      3-21) to set the new encryption algorithm. Once complete, the PIN and
                                                                                      Confirmation screen will appear (Figure 3-22).




DRAFT                                253                    March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                   18                            March 16, 2009
Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup                                        PFED User Manual      Appendix C – Peripheral Hardware Setup and Operation                        PFED User Manual

                                                                                                 f.    rot -60°                   rotate by -60°
                                                                                                 g.    tilt LEFt                  tilt the left side of the LEICA downwards
                                                                                                 h.    undo tilt                  return to horizontal
                                                                                                 i.    too FAr                    reverse direction
                                                                                                 j.    PrES butn                  press button


                                                                                              : Always turn in the same direction for all ”rot 90°” instructions.




                                                                                                : Perform each movement slowly and steadily, until the next instruction appears.
                                                                                        When you see the ”StOP” instruction, immediately hold the LEICA still and on no
                                                                                        account move it while ”StOP” is displayed.

   Figure 3-20 PointSec Security ID Setup         Figure 3-21 PointSec Line Draw        C.6      LLDR SETUP
                   Screen

                                                                                        LLDR: Setup for communication with PFED

                                                                                            1.   Select SETUP.
                                                                                            2.   Select GPS SETUP
                                                                                                 a.    Select COMMUNICATIONS.
                                                                                                                   Select SLP for Port Protocol
                                                                                                                   Select RS-232 for SLP Mode
                                                                                                                   Select EXIT
                                                                                                 b.    Select GRID SYSTEM
                                                                                                                   Select MGRS-NEW
                                                                                                                   Select EXIT
                                                                                                                   Select DATUM
                                                                                                                   Select WGD
                                                                                                                   Select EXIT
                                                                                                 c.    Select Mode/Elevation Settings
                  Figure 3-22 PointSec Security PIN Setup Screen
                                                                                                               Select CONTINUOUS for Mode (This must be set each time
    3.   In the PIN and Confirm fields, enter the same password in both to confirm                          LLDR is turned on)
         the entry. It is recommended that the operator use their AKO password so it                           Select MIXED for the SATELLITE TYPE
         is easily remembered. Once entered tap       .                                                        Select MEAN SEA LEVEL for the ELEVATION REFERENCE
    4.   The device will perform a soft reboot on its own and the PointSec splash                              Select METERS for the ELEVATION UNITS
         screen will display (Figure 3-23). Tap this screen once. After a few seconds                          Select AUTOMATIC for the ELEVATION HOLD
         the system will continue to the PointSec Password screen (Figure 3-24).                               Select FOM for the GPS ERROR
                                                                                                               Select EXIT
    5.   Using the available keypad, enter the same password as in step 3. When                                Select QUIT
         ready, tap    . If the system clock was not configured correctly, the system
         may display a warning screen informing the operator that the PIN has                    d.    Select AVAM SETUP

DRAFT                                   19                            March 16, 2009    DRAFT                                        252                               March 16, 2009
Appendix C – Peripheral Hardware Setup and Operation                   PFED User Manual     Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup                                         PFED User Manual

                                                                                                     expired. This is just a warning message. If this screen does appear, tap
                                                                                                     in the top right hand corner.
      : Use the azimuth key to change between increment and decrement!
                                                                                                6.   As a final step, the system will perform another soft reset and display a
     2.   Click the azimuth key three times in rapid succession to store the new                     prompt for the operator to encrypt the SD Card that was used during the
          declination value.                                                                         installation (Figure 3-25).
     3.   If the azimuth key is not correctly clicked three times, the previous settings
          remain unchanged and ”Old dECL” is displayed.

Reset to Factory Settings
     1.   Click the azimuth key eight times in rapid succession.
     2.   "rSt to dEFAULt" is displayed followed by "no YES".


      : Yes: Click on distance key (allows to change back to factory settings)
No: Click on azimuth key (keeps current settings)

     3.   Click the azimuth key eight times in rapid succession to set LEICA to factory
          settings. "Stor dEFAULt" is displayed.
     4.   If not done correctly, the settings remain unchanged and ”no CHAnGE” is
          displayed.
C.5.4     4-Point Compass Calibration (Handheld)
                                                                                              Figure 3-23 PointSec Splash Screen         Figure 3-24 PointSec Password Screen
Perform compass calibration:
          After every battery change
          After the LEICA has been exposed to strong magnetic fields
          When metallic parts have been attached to the LEICA (e.g. night vision
          device)
          After movement greater than 20 km and/or to a different terrain type
     1.   Point the LEICA roughly northwards.
     2.   Click the azimuth key four times in rapid succession. ”FIEL Co” appears
          briefly, followed by ”4 Pt Co” for the regular 4 point calibration.
     3.   Click the distance key when ”4 Pt Co” is displayed until the desired option is
          displayed. The selected procedure starts automatically in a few moments.
     4.   The LEICA needs to be swivelled in various directions during calibration.
          Instructions for the required direction of movement appear successively in
          the display:
          a.   turn UP                  tilt upwards
                                                                                                               Figure 3-25 PointSec Card Encryption Prompt
          b.   rtrn hori                return to horizontal
          c.   turn dn                  tilt downwards                                          7.   This process is NOT to be completed. Please tap           to pass. The
                                                                                                     installation is now complete and the Today screen will appear. Based on
          d.   rot 90°                  rotate by 90°                                                the version you have installed, a different background photo or theme
                                                                                                     (Figure 3-26, Figure 3-27 and Figure 3-28) will be shown.
          e.   rot 60°                  rotate by 60°

DRAFT                                      251                             March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                   20                             March 16, 2009
Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup                                         PFED User Manual    Appendix C – Peripheral Hardware Setup and Operation                      PFED User Manual

                                                                                                   a.   At the left: angular unit in mils, gon or degrees.
                                                                                                   b.   At the right: distance unit in metres (SI-Unit), yards, or feet.
                                                                                              4.   Click the azimuth key five times in rapid succession to save your preferred
                                                                                                   units.
                                                                                              5.   If the azimuth key is not correctly clicked five times, the previous settings
                                                                                                   remain unchanged and ”Old Unit” is displayed.
                                                                                              6.   If the azimuth key is correctly clicked five times, the previous settings
                                                                                                   change to “Stor”.

                                                                                       Distance Gate
                                                                                              1.   Click the distance key three times in rapid succession. ”diSt GAtE“ appears
                                                                                                   followed by the current setting.
                                                                                              2.   Click the azimuth key until the desired minimum distance appears (e.g. 500
                                                                                                   m).
      Figure 3-26 Today Screen Version        Figure 3-27 Today Screen Version                3.   Depending on LEICA model the distance gate limits will be different.
                     1.1                                     2.0

                                                                                               : Setting the minimum distance to "5 SI-U" disables the distance gate (default gate =
                                                                                       5m).

                                                                                              4.   Click the distance key three times in rapid succession to save the setting.
                                                                                              5.   If you do not press the distance key, the previous setting remains
                                                                                                   unchanged and "Old Gate" is displayed.
                                                                                              6.   If you do press the distance key, the previous settings change to “Stor”.


                                                                                               : "GAtE on" is displayed when closer ranges are measured.


                                                                                       Declination Setting/Correction
                                                                                              1.   Click the azimuth key three times in rapid succession. The stored
                                                                                                   declination value is displayed.

                      Figure 3-28 Today Screen Version 3.0


3.3     RESETTING THE DEVICE (3900 MODEL)                                                          : When used with PLGR (or other device determining declination (MAGVAR))
                                                                                       declination must be set at "0.”

The following section shows the Resetting The Device for the AN/PSG-10 (V)2
w/PPS, AN/PSG-10 (V)3 w/SAASM, or the AN/PSG-10 (V)1 handheld devices.
Refer to section 3.8 for instructions for the 5700 models.                                     : Distance key:
                                                                                                  Short click: the declination value changes by one unit per click.
                                                                                                  Long click (> 0.5 s): the declination value changes continuously.



DRAFT                                    21                           March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                         250                              March 16, 2009
Appendix C – Peripheral Hardware Setup and Operation                  PFED User Manual     Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup                                              PFED User Manual

    2.   The following items appear in the field of view:                                  Resetting the handheld is very much like re-booting a desktop computer. This is
         a.   The current azimuth at the left.                                             done using the stylus and the external Reset button found at the bottom
                                                                                           underside of the device.
         b.   The current angle of inclination at the right.
    3.   Azimuth and Inclination will update twice per second as long as the operator      3.3.1       Soft Reset on the 3900
         continues to hold down the azimuth key.
                                                                                                 1.    Using the reset button on the underside of the device (Figure 3-11), press
    4.   Sight the object with the pointing circle, then release the azimuth key while
                                                                                                       the tip of the stylus very lightly until the Pocket PC splash screen appears.
         holding the LEICA steady.
                                                                                                 2.    This will re-boot the device and process a new login using the PointSec
    5.   The azimuth and angle of inclination to the object are displayed.
                                                                                                       login screen.
Azimuth & Horizontal Distance Between Two Objects                                                3.    In the space provided, enter the password created when the system was
                                                                                                       first installed. When finished, tap  .
    1.   Press and hold the azimuth key.
    2.   The current azimuth appears.                                                      3.4        HANDHELD DEVICE SETTINGS (3900 MODEL)
    3.   Sight the first object with the pointing circle.
    4.   Click the distance key (> 0.5 s) while holding the LEICA steady.                  The following section shows the Handheld Device Settings for the AN/PSG-10
    5.   The first object measurement is confirmed (1-P = first point).                    (V)2 w/PPS, AN/PSG-10 (V)3 w/SAASM, or the AN/PSG-10 (V)1 handheld
                                                                                           devices. Refer to section 3.9 for instructions for the 5700 models.
    6.   Sight the second object with the pointing circle.
    7.   Release the azimuth key while holding the LEICA steady.
                                                                                           3.4.1       Access System Setting Options on the 3900
    8.   The azimuth appears at the left and the horizontal distance at the right of the
         field of view.                                                                          1.    Using the stylus, tap     .
                                                                                                 2.    To access the handheld power and backlight options, tap the Settings
Relative Horizontal/Vertical Angle                                                                     menu option (Figure 3-29).
    1.   Click the azimuth key once, then immediately press and hold it down.                    3.    This will display the main Settings screen that contains three (3) tab options
    2.   The following items appear in the field of view:                                              at the bottom (Figure 3-30): Personal, System, and Connections.

         a.   The current azimuth at the left.
         b.   The current angle of inclination at the right.
    3.   Sight the first object with the pointing circle.
    4.   Click the distance key while holding the LEICA steady.
    5.   Both angles are set to zero.
    6.   Sight the second object and release the azimuth key.
    7.   The relative angles appear in the field of view.
C.5.3    Settings

Measurement Units
    1.   Click the azimuth key five times in rapid succession.
    2.   ”Unit SEtt” appears briefly, followed by the measurement units currently in
         use by the LEICA.
    3.   Click the distance key until the desired units appear in the field of view:

DRAFT                                      249                            March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                       22                             March 16, 2009
Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup                                          PFED User Manual     Appendix C – Peripheral Hardware Setup and Operation                PFED User Manual

                                                                                         Horizontal Distance and Height Difference
                                                                                             1.   Click the distance key once, then immediately press and hold it down.
                                                                                             2.   Sight the object with the pointing circle.
                                                                                             3.   Release the distance key while holding the LEICA steady.
                                                                                             4.   The horizontal distance appears at the left and the height difference at the
                                                                                                  right of the field of view.

                                                                                         Slope Distance Between Two Objects
                                                                                             1.   Press and hold the distance key.
                                                                                             2.   Sight the first object with the pointing circle.
                                                                                             3.   Click the azimuth key (> 0.5 s) while holding the LEICA steady.
                                                                                             4.   The first object measurement is confirmed (1-P = first point).
                                                                                             5.   Sight the second object with the pointing circle.
Figure 3-29 Today Screen Settings Menu             Figure 3-30 Settings Screen
                Option
                                                                                             6.   Release the distance key while holding the LEICA steady.
                                                                                             7.   The slope distance between the two objects is displayed.
3.4.2    Power Configuration on the 3900
                                                                                         Horizontal/Vertical Distance Between Two Objects
All handheld computers contain an internal power source that allows the device               1.   Click the distance key once, then immediately press and hold it down.
to operate without any external assistance. However, most often the device will
                                                                                             2.   Sight the first object with the pointing circle.
be connected to an external battery power supply when in the field for added
support. For this situation, you will be instructed to disable the devices                   3.   Click the azimuth key (> 0.5 s) while holding the LEICA steady.
automatic “shut off when not in use” feature so as not to experience any                     4.   The first object measurement is confirmed (1-P = first point).
communication disconnect. If the PFED device “goes to sleep” the device will                 5.   Sight the second object with the pointing circle.
experience a communications loss. This can be avoided by setting the device to               6.   Release the distance key while holding the LEICA steady.
continual on.
                                                                                             7.   The horizontal distance appears at the left and the vertical distance at the
                                                                                                  right of the field of view.
To prolong the external battery power, you will also be instructed to set the
                                                                                         C.5.2    Azimuth & Inclination Measurements
backlight display to an “off” state when not in use and to set the light level as
low as possible so as not to drain the battery unnecessarily. This “off” state is        Azimuth
not the same as the “shut off when not in use” feature mentioned above. It is a
separate control for the light display only.                                                 1.   Press and hold the azimuth key.
                                                                                             2.   The current azimuth appears.
    1.   From the main Settings screen, tap the           tab at the bottom to access        3.   The display updates twice per second.
         the handheld system setting options.
                                                                                             4.   Sight the object with the pointing circle, then release the azimuth key while
                                                                                                  holding the LEICA steady.

    2.   In the list of available icons, there is an option for battery power ( ). If        5.   The most recently measured azimuth is displayed.
         you do not see it right away, you may need to scroll down through the list
         using the stylus and the scroll bar to the right of the screen.                 Combined Azimuth & Inclination Angle
    3.   When you have found this picture icon, tap it once. This will access the            1.   Click the azimuth key once, then immediately press and hold it down.
         Settings – Power configuration screen (Figure 3-31).
DRAFT                                    23                             March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                      248                            March 16, 2009
Appendix C – Peripheral Hardware Setup and Operation                   PFED User Manual     Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup                                           PFED User Manual

              Button momentarily will cause transfer from the calibration process               4.   Make sure the option “On battery power: - Turn off device if not used for” is
              back to the original DMC mode.                                                         unchecked. To uncheck the option, tap it once. This power option refers to
                                                                                                     the internal battery that is part of the R-PDA device.
C.5      LEICA SETUP                                                                            5.   Make sure the option “On external power: - Turn off device if not used for” is
                                                                                                     also unchecked. To uncheck the option, tap it once. This power option
User Manual, Leica Mod B & Leica 23, Operating & Operator Maintenance                                refers to any external battery power source plugged into the R-PDA device
Instructions, Vectronix, Version 1.5, 2006.                                                          (i.e., power plug to wall or external battery pack). When ready tap   to exit
                                                                                                     this screen.
C.5.1    Distance Measurements

Slope Distance                                                                                  6.   In the list of available icons, there is an option for backlight (    ). If you
                                                                                                     do not see it right away, you may need to scroll through the list using the
    1.   Press and hold the distance key.                                                            stylus and the scroll bar to the right of the screen.
    2.   Sight the pointing circle on the object.                                               7.   When you have found this picture icon, tap it once. This will access the
    3.   Hold the LEICA steady as you release the distance key.                                      Settings – Backlight configuration screen (Figure 3-32).

    4.   Read off the distance.
                                                                                                8.   If not already shown, tap the                tab at the bottom.
    5.   If "----" appears in the display, the object lies outside the measuring range,
                                                                                                9.   Make sure the option “On battery power: - Turn off backlight if device is not
         or measuring conditions are poor.
                                                                                                     used for” has been checked. To check the option, tap it once.
Multiple Object                                                                                 10. Then tap to the right of this and select the time option 10 sec. This
                                                                                                    selection is recommended for the best power usage, however it is not
    1.   Click the distance key five times in rapid succession. “Con FIG” appears for               required. You may select any time option needed.
         a short instant.                                                                       11. Next, make sure the option “Turn on backlight when a button is pressed or
    2.   Click the azimuth key until the “3 dIS” function appears.                                  the screen is tapped” has been checked. To check the option, tap it once.
    3.   Click the distance key five times in rapid succession to save your settings.
                                                                                                12. Now tap the              tab at the bottom to access settings for the screen
    4.   If the distance key is not correctly clicked five times, the previous settings             brightness level (Figure 3-33).
         remain unchanged and “Old Conf” is displayed.
    5.   Sight on the most visible portion of the object.
    6.   Operate the LEICA as described under ”Slope Distance”.
    7.   The distance display blinks for a few seconds after a multiple distance
         measurement.
    8.   Click the distance key repeatedly to obtain all the measured distances in
         succession.

Combined
    1.   Hold down both keys simultaneously (or the remote fire button); the current
         azimuth appears and updates twice per second.
    2.   Sight the object with the pointing circle.
    3.   Release both keys (or the remote fire button) while holding the LEICA
         steady.
    4.   The azimuth appears at the left and the slope distance at the right of the
         field of view.                                                                          Figure 3-31 Settings - Power                Figure 3-32 Settings - Backlight
    5.   The inclination angle is not displayed, but it is sent via the data interface.             Configuration Screen                   Configuration Screen – Internal Power

DRAFT                                     247                              March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                     24                               March 16, 2009
Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup                                             PFED User Manual     Appendix C – Peripheral Hardware Setup and Operation                     PFED User Manual

                                                                                                                          Tilt down
                                                                                              S2       - (not flashing)   Hold in this position
                                                                                                                          Press and release Fire Button
                                                                                                                          Hold Mark VII steady until reticle turns back on
                                                                                                                          Turn 90 degrees to right
                                                                                              S3 - - (flashing)           Hold level (do not bank – do not tilt)
                                                                                              S3 - - (not flashing)       Hold in this position
                                                                                                                          Press and release Fire Button
                                                                                                                          Hold Mark VII steady until reticle turns back on
                                                                                              S3       - (flashing)       Bank right
                                                                                                                          Tilt up
                                                                                              S3       - (not flashing)   Hold in this position
                                                                                                                          Press and release Fire Button
                                                                                                                          Hold Mark VII steady until reticle turns back on
                                                                                                                          Turn 90 degrees to right
           Figure 3-33 Settings - Brightness Level Configuration Screen                       S3       - (flashing)       Bank left
                                                                                                                          Tilt down
    13. Here, you have two (2) options. The left side control, On Battery, is used            S3       - (not flashing)   Hold in this position
        when the system is being run by any battery power source be it the internal                                       Press and release Fire Button
        power or external battery pack. The right side control, On Power, is used
                                                                                                                          Hold Mark VII steady until reticle turns back on
        when the device is attached to a constant electrical source such as power
        cord.                                                                                 S4 - - (flashing)           Hold level (do not bank – do not tilt)
                                                                                              S4 - - (not flashing)       Hold in this position
    14. It is recommended that the On Battery option be set to the lowest possible
        level. To set the backlight, tap and hold down on the slide bar (   ) in the                                      Press and release Fire Button
        On Battery level control. Slide this bar down as far as you can while still                                       Hold Mark VII steady until reticle turns back on
        being able to read the screen.                                                        S4       - (flashing)       Bank right
    15. To exit the Settings screen tap        at the top right.                                                          Tilt up
                                                                                              S4       - (not flashing)   Hold in this position
3.4.3    System Clock on the 3900                                                                                         Press and release Fire Button
                                                                                                                          Hold Mark VII steady until reticle turns back on
The system clock will need to be set to military time so PFED will date/time                                              Turn 90 degrees to right
stamp messages correctly. If the system experiences a power failure or “hard                  S4       - (flashing)       Bank left
reset,” the system date defaults to May 2002 that will need to be corrected to the                                        Tilt down
current date.                                                                                 S4       - (not flashing)   Hold in this position
                                                                                                                          Press and release Fire Button
    1.   From the main Settings screen, tap the               tab at the bottom to access                                 Hold Mark VII steady until reticle turns back on
         the handheld system features.
                                                                                                      b.   If the accuracy figure of merit is > or = 3.1, the display will flash to
                                                                                                           indicate an unacceptable compass calibration. If this occurs, the Mark
                                                                                                           VII will be disabled from providing compass azimuth data until an
    2.   In the list of available icons, there is an option for regional settings (  ).                    acceptable compass calibration is performed. Pushing the Fire Button
         If you do not see it right away, you may need to scroll down through the list                     momentarily will cause a return back to begin the “soft” calibration
         using the stylus and the scroll bar to the right of the screen.                                   process again.
    3.   When you have found this picture icon, tap it once. This will access the
         Settings – Regional Settings configuration screen (Figure 3-34).                             c.   If the accuracy figure of merit is < or = 3.0, the display will be constant
                                                                                                           to indicate an acceptable compass calibration. Pushing the Fire

DRAFT                                     25                               March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                       246                              March 16, 2009
Appendix C – Peripheral Hardware Setup and Operation                     PFED User Manual     Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup                                           PFED User Manual

          d.   If the value is > or = 4, the display will flash to indicate an unacceptable       4.   At the bottom of this screen there are five (5) tab options: Region, Number,
               compass calibration. If this occurs, the Mark VII will not provide                      Currency, Time and Date.
               azimuth data until an acceptable compass calibration is performed.
               Clicking the Fire Button will cause the “hard” calibration process to              5.   Tap the       tab to access the Settings – Time configuration screen (Figure
               begin again.                                                                            3-35).
          e.   If the accuracy value is < or = 3, the display will be constant to indicate
               a valid calibration.
          f.   If you wish to continue with a “soft” calibration, press the Fire Button
               momentarily, then continue on to step 6.
          g.   If a valid calibration was attained and you do not wish to perform a
               “soft” calibration, press and hold the Fire Button for more than two
               seconds (reticle turns off to indicate two seconds), then release (reticle
               will turn back on).
    6.    Soft Calibration:
          a.   Face the Mark VII device in any convenient horizontally level direction
               [S1 - - (flashing)].

   Displayed on screen                               What to do
  S1 - - (flashing)           Hold level (do not bank – do not tilt)
  S1 - - (not flashing)       Hold in this position
                              Press and release Fire Button                                   Figure 3-34 Settings - Regional Settings        Figure 3-35 Settings - Regional Settings
                              Hold Mark VII steady until reticle turns back on                         Configuration Screen                         Time Configuration Screen
  S1       - (flashing)       Bank left
                                                                                                  6.   In the Time Style field, tap and scroll down through the options until you
                              Tilt up
                                                                                                       have located the HH:mm:ss selection. Tap on this option to select it. This
  S1       - (not flashing)   Hold in this position                                                    will allow you to set your system time to the military 24-clock. You will see
                              Press and release Fire Button                                            an example at the top of the screen.
                              Hold Mark VII steady until reticle turns back on
                                                                                                  7.   The Time Separator field should have the “:” symbol for separation. As well
  S1       - (flashing)       Bank right                                                               as the AM and PM symbol fields should be set to AM and PM.
                              Tilt down
  S1       - (not flashing)   Hold in this position                                               8.   Tap the        tab at the bottom of the screen to access the Settings – Date
                              Press and release Fire Button                                            configuration screen (Figure 3-36).
                              Hold Mark VII steady until reticle turns back on                    9.   In the Short Date field, tap and scroll through the options until you have
                              Turn 90 degrees to right                                                 located an appropriate format to set the date. The option typically used is
  S2 - - (flashing)           Hold level (do not bank – do not tilt)                                   dd-MMM-yy, however this is optional. You will see an example at the top of
  S2 - - (not flashing)       Hold in this position                                                    the screen.
                              Press and release Fire Button                                       10. The Date Separator field should be displaying the “-” symbol and the Long
                              Hold Mark VII steady until reticle turns back on                        Date field should have the option of ddd, dd MMMM, yyyy displayed.
  S2       - (flashing)       Bank left                                                           11. When these settings are complete, tap         to exit and save your selections.
                              Tilt up                                                             12. From the available icons on the main Settings screen, tap once on the
  S2       - (not flashing)   Hold in this position
                              Press and release Fire Button
                              Hold Mark VII steady until reticle turns back on                         Clock (       ) icon (you may need to scroll up to find the picture icon). This
  S2       - (flashing)       Bank right                                                               will access the Settings – Clock screen (Figure 3-37).

DRAFT                                       245                              March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                      26                            March 16, 2009
Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup                                         PFED User Manual     Appendix C – Peripheral Hardware Setup and Operation                      PFED User Manual

                                                                                                  next character is a number 1, 2, 3, 4 which corresponds to four orthogonal
    13. Make sure the Time tab at the bottom is selected. If not, tap the                         directions where the calibration is to be performed (it is not necessary for the
        tab.                                                                                      four directions to be North, East, South, and West, but only that they be at
    14. The system clock feature allows the configuration of two (2) separate clocks              right angles to each other). To the right of these characters are two symbols
        that run simultaneously. A local (Home) clock and an alternate (Visiting)                 that appear as “ ” shapes, or unused staples (e.g., , , , ). The last
        clock.                                                                                    symbol you may see in the display as a dash (-).


     : It is recommended that the Home time be set to the option GMT Casablanca so             : Either “hard” or “soft” calibration may be performed. The “soft” calibration
PFED will accurately date and time stamp all transmissions.                             procedure includes the “hard” calibration that will result in the most accurate compass
                                                                                        calibration. To skip “hard” calibration and proceed directly to “soft” calibration, first enter
    15. To set the local clock, make sure the Home clock is active by tapping the       “hard” calibration mode as noted above, then press and hold the Fire Button for more than
        Home button.                                                                    two seconds (reticle turns off to indicate two seconds), then release (reticle will turn back
    16. The first field on the right allows the selection of the Greenwich Mean Time    on). Then skip to step 6.
        location. Tap to the right and scroll through the available options and
                                                                                             5.   Hard Calibration:
        select GMT Casablanca.
    17. Tap on the Hours in the displayed time, located under the GMT selection, to               a.   Face the Mark VII device in any convenient horizontally level direction
        highlight it. Use and     to set the current hours.                                            [H1 - (flashing)].

    18. Repeat step 17 to set the Minutes and Seconds to compete the local time                   b.   Then complete the steps in the table below.
        setting.
                                                                                             Displayed on screen                               What to do
    19. In the Date field, tap   to open a small calendar (Figure 3-38).
                                                                                            H1 - (flashing)              Tilt up (do not bank)
                                                                                            H1 - (not flashing)          Hold in this position
                                                                                                                         Press and release Fire Button
                                                                                                                         Hold Mark VII steady until reticle turns back on
                                                                                                                         Turn 90 degrees to right
                                                                                            H2    – (flashing)           Tilt down (do not bank)
                                                                                            H2    – (not flashing)       Hold in this position
                                                                                                                         Press and release Fire Button
                                                                                                                         Hold Mark VII steady until reticle turns back on
                                                                                                                         Turn 90 degrees to right
                                                                                            H3    - (flashing)           Tilt up (do not bank)
                                                                                            H3    - (not flashing)       Hold in this position
                                                                                                                         Press and release Fire Button
                                                                                                                         Hold Mark VII steady until reticle turns back on
                                                                                                                         Turn 90 degrees to right
                                                                                            H4    – (flashing)           Tilt down (do not bank)
Figure 3-36 Settings - Regional Settings           Figure 3-37 Settings - Clock             H4    – (not flashing)       Hold in this position
      Date Configuration Screen                       Configuration Screen                                               Press and release Fire Button
                                                                                                                         Hold Mark VII steady until reticle turns back on

                                                                                                  c.   The display will read H---- with the dashes flashing in sequence
                                                                                                       indicating that the DMC is calculating the new calibration values. The
                                                                                                       display will then show the value calculated on the screen. If the value
                                                                                                       is greater than 9 degrees, the compass will automatically start the
                                                                                                       “hard” calibration sequence again.

DRAFT                                      27                          March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                        244                              March 16, 2009
Appendix C – Peripheral Hardware Setup and Operation                  PFED User Manual       Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup                                                PFED User Manual

     2.   Look through the viewfinder.
     3.   The system settings will be displayed in sequence on the bottom of the
          screen.
     4.   Eventually, the screen will display CO XX where XX is two numbers.
     5.   If those numbers are 00, then the Mark VII is set to output data in PLGR
          CON format.
     6.   If those numbers are anything but 00, then continue to the next step.
     7.   Turn the Mode Select Switch to the OFF position.                                                          Figure 3-38 Calendar Configuration Setting

     8.   Open the battery compartment.                                                           20. Tap        and       to select the current month.
     9.   Above and to the left of the battery, there is a plastic microswitch with two
          switches on it.                                                                         21. Tap on the displayed year (        ) and use available up and down scroll
                                                                                                      buttons that appear to select the current year.
     10. The leftmost one is for setting the output data type for the Mark VII.
                                                                                                  22. Tap the day of the week to select the current weekday.
     11. Slide the leftmost switch down towards the letter N printed on the switch.
         The rightmost switch is used to select output readings in Degrees or Mils.               23. If you wish to set an alternate time zone, make sure the Visiting clock is
         Move the switch to 1 for Degrees or 0 for Mils.                                              active by tapping the Visiting button and continue to the next step. If not,
                                                                                                      skip to step 25.
     12. Close the battery compartment.
                                                                                                  24. To set the alternate clock, repeat steps 16 through 22 choosing the
     13. Turn the Mode Select Switch to the SYS position.                                             appropriate time, month and day for the location of the alternate settings.
     14. Look through the viewfinder.
                                                                                                  25. When all settings are complete, tap        . Tap            to save these settings.
     15. The system settings will be displayed in sequence on the bottom of the
         screen.                                                                             3.4.4     Power Low Warning on the 3900
     16. The screen will display CO 00. This is the protocol used by the Mark VII for
         data output for PLGR CON.                                                           If the battery power gets critically low, a warning message (Figure 3-39) will
C.4.2     Calibrating the Mark VII                                                           notify the operator that the external batteries need to be replaced or the internal
                                                                                             battery may need to be recharged.

          : The magnetic field around the Mark VII Laser is affected by the battery. The
battery must be stabilized by firing the laser prior to performing compass calibration.
Therefore, before performing a compass calibration, switch the Mark VII Laser to LST or
FST and fire the laser by ranging three times on any convenient target or into the air (do               : Do not allow the battery power to be completely extinguished or all stored
not fire the laser with the lens cover on, damage to the laser receiver may result). After   data and settings will be lost. If the power low message does appear, battery power should
ranging, switch back to the DMC mode and proceed with compass calibration as described       be replaced immediately.
below. The above stabilization of the battery must be performed whenever the battery is
replaced, or if the battery compartment is opened for any reason, since the battery may
rotate when opening or closing the battery compartment door. It is recommended that the
ranging before calibration process be performed whenever compass calibration is done.
                                                                                                    : If power is completely lost, a re-initialization process will be needed to rebuild the
     1.   Remove the lens cover.                                                             handheld. This will include the installation of the PFED application software, the
                                                                                             configuration of all time, volume and battery power usage settings as well as all PFED
     2.   Make sure the Mode Select Switch is set to DMC. The display should show
                                                                                             database stored information such as unit list, user and device settings, etc (refer to sections
          the azimuth or elevation data.                                                     3.2, 3.3, and 3.4.1 through 3.4.3).
     3.   Press and hold the Fire Button for more than two seconds (reticle turns off
          to indicate two seconds), then release (reticle will turn back on).
     4.   The 5 digit display will now show two characters and two symbols. The left
          most symbol will be either an “H” (hard) or “S” (soft) to indicate the
          calibration mode (Should be “H” when first entering calibration mode). The
DRAFT                                      243                            March 16, 2009     DRAFT                                        28                               March 16, 2009
Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup                                                PFED User Manual      Appendix C – Peripheral Hardware Setup and Operation                    PFED User Manual



                                                                                                      : There are no selective fields on this page. The information displayed is used for
                                                                                                navigation only.

                                                                                                     7.   Line 1 (left corner) is the waypoint number you are currently navigating
                                                                                                          to.Line 1 (right corner) is the position accuracy.
                                                                                                     8.   Line 2 is your current heading in degrees (TRK 020.5 deg magnetic).
                                                                                                     9.   Line 3 is the direct azimuth from your current position to the waypoint. Line
                       Figure 3-39 Battery Low warning Message
                                                                                                          3 (right corner) is your ground speed.
      1.   When you receive this power low message, the batteries located in the                     10. Line 4 is your left/right steering angle. The steering angle lets you know
           PFED battery pack compartment (Figure 2-9) will need to be replaced.                          how much your heading is off from the azimuth (The difference between
      2.   If the external batteries cannot be immediately replaced, that may cause the                  Line 2 and Line 3).
           PFED unit to shut down, the unit may require re-initialization.
      3.   To re-initialize the device, perform a screen alignment process by tapping
                                                                                                      : If your TRK (line 2) is within 10 degrees or less from the azimuth this means you
           and holding the stylus down in the center of the five (5) crosshairs that            are on course. However, one must be outside and moving for this to be accurate.
           appear on the screen.
      4.   When prompted, choose a time zone for setting the devices system clock.                   11. Press the down arrow key to access page3of navigation.
           For further information on setting the system time, refer to section 3.4.3.
      5.   Also, complete a full installation of the PFED application software and
                                                                                                       : The third page includes: range, time to go, elevation difference and minimum miss
           reconfigure all system and application settings as noted in the warning
                                                                                                difference. No data is available (n/a) for time to go and minimum miss distance if you’re not
           stated above.                                                                        moving.

                                                                                                     12. Line 1 is the range to the waypoint. As you move toward the waypoint the
      : The re-initialization process may also need to be performed if the handheld device               range should decrease. If not you’re going the wrong way.
experiences a “hard reset” operation (i.e., using the reset button found at the bottom of the
                                                                                                     13. Line 2 represents the total time it will take you to reach the waypoint (hours,
device).
                                                                                                         minutes: and seconds).
                                                                                                     14. Line 3 is the difference in elevation (current position minus waypoint
3.5        BLUETOOTH MODE (3900 MODEL)                                                                   altitude).
                                                                                                     15. Line 4 is the minimum miss difference (MMD). Normally it is identical to
The following section shows the Bluetooth Mode for the 3900 model. Refer to                              your range providing you’re on course.
section 3.12 for instructions for the 5700 model.
                                                                                                C.4       MARK VII
      1.   To access the Bluetooth feature, tap the black wireless symbol (        ) located
           at the bottom right of the main Today screen (Figure 3-40).                          Reference for section C.4: Operation and Maintenance Manual Mark VII
      2.   From the menu select the Turn Radio On option. This will make Bluetooth              Eyesafe Miniature Laser Target Locator (MFT60000-17), Litton Laser Systems,
           active and is indicated by a white wireless symbol (      ).                         August 2002.
      3.   To connect to other wireless devices, tap the white wireless symbol and              C.4.1     Setting the data output to PLGR CON on the MarkVII LRF
           select the Bluetooth Manager option from the menu. This will display the
           Manager screen (Figure 3-41).                                                        To enable communications between a Mark VII laser range finder and the PFED
      4.   To find other active devices, tap Search at the bottom of the screen. This           application, the Mark VII must be setup to output data in the PLGR CON
           will display a message requesting if you would like to search now. Tap               format. The following steps describe how to verify that the Mark VII is setup
                    to start the process (Figure 3-43).                                         for PLGR CON output.
                                                                                                     1.   Turn the Mode Select Switch to the SYS position.
DRAFT                                       29                               March 16, 2009     DRAFT                                       242                             March 16, 2009
Appendix C – Peripheral Hardware Setup and Operation                         PFED User Manual       Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup                                             PFED User Manual

          Line 1 - Time and Time Error                                                                    5.    When the search is complete, the screen will display all devices that it has
          Line 2 - Date, Day of the Week                                                                        found (Figure 3-43), if any.
          Line 3 - Track Heading
          Line 4 - Ground Speed                                                                           6.    When processing is complete, tap       then     to exit the Manager screen.

C.3.5     Track / Search Information
     1.   Press the POS key to obtain information on the satellite vehicle that the
          PLGR is tracking and searching.


       : This display page contains the satellite tracking data and almanac age.

            Line 1 - Satellite Track/Search Table Heading
            Line 2 - Satellite identifier for each satellite tracked or searched for. IDs to the
left of the slash / are satellites tracked. IDs to the right of the slash are satellites searched
for.
            Example; Line 2 -- 07 17 24 31 / 01 Tracking 4 satellites and Searching for 1.
            Example; Line 2 -- 07 17 24 / 31 01 Tracking 3 satellites and searching for 2.

           Line 3 - Shows the number of visible satellites, the number of visible satellites
that are in good health.
           Line 4 - Shows the age of the almanac. The age can be from 1 to 99.

                                                                                                               Figure 3-40 Today Screen              Figure 3-41 Bluetooth Manager Screen

     : The almanac provides the PLGR with the location of the satellites. A 1 day
almanac is the most current.

C.3.6     How To Navigate
     1.   There are four navigating modes that may be accessed and selected.
          However, we will only discuss one which is 2D FAST. This mode maybe
          used for land or sea navigation.
     2.   Press the NAV key once to display the Nav menu page.
     3.   Press the right arrow key to highlight the Nav mode of operation. Now use
          the down arrow key to select the various mode of operation (Slow, 2D Fast,
          3D Fast and Custom). Please select 2D Fast.
     4.   Press the right arrow key to highlight the Navigation method field of
          operation. Now use the down arrow key to see the various methods of
          navigation (Direct, CRS to, CRS FROM). Please select Direct.


       : Direct is used to navigate from your current position directly to the waypoint. Not           Figure 3-42 Searching For Devices                   Figure 3-43 Devices Found
taking obstacles into consideration.

     5.   Now press the right arrow key to highlight the waypoint number field. Use
                                                                                                    3.6        EXTERNAL BUTTONS (3900 MODEL)
          the up or down arrow key to select waypoint number 2. Now press the right
          arrow key twice.                                                                          The following section shows the External Buttons for the AN/PSG-10 (V)2
     6.   Press the down arrow key to change the Waypoint page.                                     w/PPS, AN/PSG-10 (V)3 w/SAASM, or the AN/PSG-10 (V)1 handheld devices.
                                                                                                    Refer to section 3.12 for instructions for the 5700 models.
DRAFT                                          241                               March 16, 2009     DRAFT                                       30                             March 16, 2009
Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup                                             PFED User Manual      Appendix C – Peripheral Hardware Setup and Operation                       PFED User Manual

When the PFED application is active on the handheld, the four (4) external                   C.3.1     Turning on the PLGR
buttons found on the device (Figure 3-44), will be programmed for a specific                      1.   Press the ON BRT key to turn the receiver on. A self test begins
use. They become access buttons for CFF mission templates and Check Firing                             immediately and upon completion, the results are displayed. The “No
(refer to section 4.4.11 Fire Support Setup – CFF Templates).                                          Faults” message indicates the unit is functioning properly.


                                                              Application                           : FIX and OLD will be displayed on the first line every time the set is turned on and
                                                               Buttons                       is not connected to external or vehicle power. If connected to external or vehicle power the
                                                                                             default will be CONT OLD.




                 Figure 3-44 PFED Handheld Computer External Buttons                                  : The position initially displayed is “OLD” information until the receiver collects and
                                                                                             calculates satellite data and displays the current position known as the “First Fix”.

3.7        INITIAL SYSTEM INSTALLATION (5700 MODEL)                                          C.3.2     Mode Selection
                                                                                                  1.   Press the MENU key once.
The following section shows the Initial System Installation for the 5700 models.                  2.   Use the right arrow key to move the flashing cursor to the SETUP field.
                                                                                                  3.   Press the down arrow key to activate the SETUP function.
The following procedures are performed when installing the PFED application
on either a new handheld device that does not yet contain any software or
configuration settings, or, when an existing device needs to be completely                         : Line 1 will display SETUP MODE: FIX. Line 2 and 3 provides a brief explanation
reconfigured due to a memory loss or damage.                                                 of each Mode selected. Line 4 displays the Satellite Vehicle (SV) type.

                                                                                                  4.   Press the right arrow key once to highlight the FIX mode of operation.


                                                                                                      : Fix mode means the PLGR acquires satellites and determines the present
              : The instructions in section 3.7 are only used by System Administrators for   position. Then automatically changes to standby (STBY) mode, after the position is
initial PFED installation and setup. They are not recommended for use by field operators.    determined.
Unless an operator is directly instructed by an Administrator to perform such a function,
there should be no need to perform a Hard Reset and a Re-Installation of the system while         5.   Press the up arrow key to change the mode of operation to CONT.
in the field.
                                                                                                  6.   Press the right arrow key once to highlight SV-TYPE: all-Y

3.7.1       Hard Reset Using External Buttons                                                     7.   Press the right arrow key once to obtain the change page symbol next to the
                                                                                                       P.


                                                                                                   : All-Y tells the PLGR to track only Y-code signals when crypto keys are loaded.
            : The following procedure should only be used as a “Last Resort.” The            Mixed allows the PLGR to track any type of satellite signal.
operator should access the Hard Reset application from the Start menu (refer to section
3.7.1).
                                                                                             C.3.3     How to Obtain Position, Time and Tracking Information
                                                                                                  1.   Press the POS key to display the position page.
      1.    If not already on, power the handheld on by pressing the small round button
            at the top right-hand corner of the device (Figure 3-45).                        C.3.4     To Obtain Dynamic Information
      2.    Locate the stylus (Figure 3-46).                                                      1.   Press the POS key to select page # 2.


                                                                                                   : This display contains dynamic information fields:
DRAFT                                          31                           March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                         240                               March 16, 2009
Appendix C – Peripheral Hardware Setup and Operation                PFED User Manual       Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup                                            PFED User Manual

                                                                                               3.     Then locate the reset button (a recessed button) found on the front of the
                    APPENDIX C                                                                        device at the bottom left, and the two round operation buttons to the right
                                                                                                      (Figure 3-47).
      PERIPHERAL HARDWARE SETUP & OPERATION

C.1      INTRODUCTION
                                                                                                    Power
This appendix describes setup procedures for peripheral devices that connect to                     Button
                                                                                                                                                                          Stylus
the PFED system, including GPS, LRF and Communications devices.

C.2      SINCGARS ASIP                                                                        Figure 3-45 Device Power Button

                                                                                                                                                   Figure 3-46 Stylus Pen
The SINCGARS ASIP radio connected to your PFED and the destination radio
must be configured with the same frequencies, security mode, and data rate
                                                                                                             Reset
(4800).                                                                                                      Button
                                                                                                                                                                 Top Right
                                                                                                                                                              Operation Button
    1.   If the radios have been filled with a frequency set and crypto, simply turn the
         SINCGARS position switch from Standby to RXMT and proceed to step 7.
         If the radio has not been previously programmed, continue with step 2.
                                                                                                                                                                  Bottom Right
                                                                                                                                                                 Operation Button
      : Steps 2-6 provide example settings. Your actual radio parameters are dependent
upon the rest of your communications net.                                                                               Figure 3-47 Hard Rest Buttons

    2.   Turn the SINCGARS position switch to REM.                                             4.     Now perform a “hard reset” by first pressing the stylus into the reset button
    3.   With the radio handset, set the radio to Single Channel (SC), power level to                 with your left hand. While holding down the stylus with the left hand, use
         Medium (M), and the channel to 1.                                                            two (2) fingers of your right hand to press and hold the two round operation
                                                                                                      buttons on the right. Then immediately release the stylus from the reset
    4.   Turn the SINCGARS position switch to LD.                                                     button, and continue to hold the two operation buttons for up to 30 seconds.
    5.   Press the FREQ button followed by the CLR button. Enter the 3-digit                   5.     After 30 seconds release both operation buttons and the system will perform
         frequency provided by the signal officer.                                                    the reset. Wait a few seconds until you see the Welcome screen (Figure
    6.   Press the STO button to store this new frequency for channel 1.                              3-48).
    7.   On your SINCGARS keypad, press the Data button. If 4800 appears on the
         front display of the radio, continue to the next step. Otherwise, press the
         CHG button repeatedly until 4800 appears.
    8.   Turn the SINCGARS position switch from LD to SQ ON.

C.3      PLGR

Reference for section C.3: 46 EN BN Smart Book (v1)[1]-PLGR Fundamentals
dated July 1, 2004. The following section applies when operating a device other
than the AN/PSG-10 (V)2 w/PPS or AN/PSG-10 (V)3 w/SAASM.




DRAFT                                    239                            March 16, 2009     DRAFT                                      32                             March 16, 2009
Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup                                          PFED User Manual       Appendix B – Troubleshooting                                        PFED User Manual




                       Figure 3-48 Handheld Welcome Screen                                                                Figure B-4 Align Screen
    6.   Once the handheld Welcome screen appears, follow the instructions on the              5.   On the Align screen tap                    to start the process.
         screen to complete the reset process (refer to section 3.7.3).
                                                                                               6.   Perform a screen alignment process by tapping the stylus in the center of
3.7.2    Hard Reset Using Reset Application on the 5700                                             the five (5) crosshairs that appear on the screen. If the alignment does not
                                                                                                    work the first time, the Align screen will reappear asking you to repeat the
                                                                                                    process. Make sure you tap in the very center of the crosshairs.
    1.   On the devices main Today screen, tap           in the Title bar and select
         Reset.                                                                                7.   The system will return you to the initial Align screen when the process is
                                                                                                    complete. To exit this screen, tap      in the top right corner.
    2.   Tap            to begin the hard reset process. Then follow the instructions
         in section 3.7.3.                                                                     8.   Then tap    in the top right corner to return to the Today screen.

3.7.3    Reset Process on the 5700                                                         B.8      PFED BLUETOOTH CONNECTION
    1.   The Welcome screen for Mobile 6 will display and ask that you tap the                 1.
         screen to continue. Go ahead and tap the screen once to display the Align
         screen (Figure 3-50).
    2.   Perform a screen alignment process by tapping the stylus in the center of
         the five (5) crosshairs that appear on the screen. If the alignment does not
         work the first time, the Alignment screen will reappear asking you to repeat
         the process. Make sure you tap in the very center of the crosshairs.
    3.   When the alignment process is complete, an informational screen will
         appear stating “This device includes the Worldwide English language
         version of Microsoft Windows Mobile.” To pass this screen tap                 .
    4.   Next you will see a series of color patterns flash, blink and rotate on the
         screen. When it’s complete it will ask “Did you see the screen colors and
         patterns change?” Tap the appropriate button to exit this screen.
    5.   Next you will see another crosshair screen. The system wil ask you to tap in
         the center of each crosshair in each corner of the screen. Each time you tap
         a crosshair, the crosshair will change and colorize.

DRAFT                                    33                             March 16, 2009     DRAFT                                    238                            March 16, 2009
Appendix B – Troubleshooting                                          PFED User Manual      Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup                                          PFED User Manual

                                                                                                6.   The next screen will state a question, “Did you hear the device beep?” Wait
                                                                                                     a few seconds to hear a sound from the device. After a few seconds tap the
                                                                                                     appropriate button for the result.
                                                                                                7.   The next test will show three statements with a color bar. For each of the
                                                                                                     three statements, tap the appropriate button indicating what the color bar is
                                                                                                     doing at that time (i.e., flashing, always one, etc).
                                                                                                8.   Lastly, the final test screen will process through a series of operation button
                                                                                                     presses (Figure 3-49). If you wish to pass this screen, you may tap the Skip
                                                 Figure B-3 Data Entry Options Menu                  Button Test button. Otherwise tap the appropriate buttons as instructed.

                                      Data Entry                                                                           Button Keys; Right,
                                     Menu Button                                                                           Down, Left and Up            Application
                                                                                                                                                         Button 3
                                                                                                         Application
                                                                                                          Button 2                                                    Enter Button
                                                                                                                                                                          Key


  Figure B-2 Data Entry Option Menu                                                                   Application                                             Application
                Button                                                                                 Button 1                                                Button 4
                                                                                                                       Figure 3-49 Operation Button Test
B.7      CALIBRATING THE PFED
                                                                                                9.   Once you have completed this last testing screen, the system will display
                                                                                                     the Today screen (Figure 3-51).
    1.   On the devices main Today screen, tap             found at the top of the screen
         in the Title bar.
    2.   Tap the Settings menu option.

    3.   From the Settings screen, tap the            tab at the bottom.



    4.   In the list of available icons, tap the Screen icon (       ) to access the
         Align screen (Figure B-4).




                                                                                              Figure 3-50 Stylus Alignment Screen                Figure 3-51 Today Screen


                                                                                            3.7.4    Application Installation on the 5700
                                                                                                1.   Insert the small SD memory card into the top of the handheld device. Make
                                                                                                     sure the SD memory card is seated all the way into the slot.



DRAFT                                      237                             March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                    34                               March 16, 2009
Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup                                          PFED User Manual      Appendix B – Troubleshooting                                        PFED User Manual

    2.   To begin the installation process, first copy the needed files to the handheld   The settings you have set in your PFED do not seem to be saved
         device. On the devices main Today screen, tap          found at the top of       when you exit Setup.
         the screen in the Title bar and select the Programs item. Then tap the File
         Explorer program icon. This will display the File Explorer screen.
                                                                                          Did you tap        located at the bottom of the PFED setup screen to save your
    3.   Tap found at the right of the My Documents title. Then select My Device          changes? Tapping or located in the upper right-hand corner will cancel
         from the drop-down.
                                                                                          any changes you have made.
    4.   From the displayed list, tap the Storage Card option.
    5.   Tap the file name InstallDLL.cab. This will display a screen asking where        The application keypad is not displaying the basic keyboard or is
         you would like to copy the files.                                                not functioning properly.
    6.   Make sure the Device radio button is selected. Then click Install at the
         bottom of the screen.                                                            If your system keypad is not displaying the basic keyboard keys, you may have
    7.   Once the copy process has been completed, install the application on the         accessed an alternate data entry form.
         device. Return to the devices Today screen and tap           , select the
         Programs, tap File Explorer icon.
    8.   Then tap at the top and select My Device>Program Files>InstallCab.
         Then tap the file name Install. The installation process will then begin by
         displaying the DoD Install Warning screen (Figure 3-52).
    9.   Tap             . The system will then display a hard reset prompt (Figure
         3-53).                                                                                                           Figure B-1 Keyboard
    10. Tap        at the top right of the window.                                        Due to the critical nature of the information contained and transmitted through
         a.   If the system requests a hard reset, perform steps 3 through 12 in          the PFED application, it is required that the Keypad (Figure B-1) feature be used
              section 3.7.1 to hard reset the device.                                     at all times.
         b.   You may need to repeat the steps in this section to begin the                   1.   If you find yourself in an entry form other than the Keyboard feature, as
              installation process again.
                                                                                                   displayed above, tap    shown in the very bottom right of the screen (Figure
         c.   Once the reset has completed, continue to step 8 below to complete                   B-2).
              the process.
                                                                                              2.   This will display an option menu (Figure B-3). To return to the Keyboard
    11. The system will then install the application and all needed tools. If you                  function, tap the menu option Keyboard.
        watch the title bar area, it will display the items it is installing.
    12. When the system has installed all of the tools and software, the Date/Time
        Entry screen will display (Figure 3-54). Enter the current date and time here
         and tap            when finished.




DRAFT                                      35                           March 16, 2009    DRAFT                                    236                            March 16, 2009
Appendix B – Troubleshooting                                              PFED User Manual    Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup                                          PFED User Manual

    6.   Replace the battery in the Leica.
    7.   Replace the battery compartment cover and screw back on.
    8.   On the PFED, delete the Leica device from the Device Setup screen.
    9.   Exit PFED.
    10. Soft reset the handheld.
    11. Follow the steps for setting up a Leica with Bluetooth (refer to section
        5.1.1.1 Configuring Devices step 8).
    12. If you initially get “bt fail” on the first laze, relaze again.
    13. If you see “bt fail” again:
         a.   Exit PFED
         b.   Soft reset the device
         c.   Laze again.
    14. If you still get “bt fail”, start from step 3 above and be sure to wait for 15
        seconds (step c) after removing the battery.                                            Figure 3-52 DoD Install Warning Screen           Figure 3-53 Hard Reset Prompt

B.6      PFED COMPUTER

This section lists possible solutions for problems encountered with the PFED
handheld computer.

Tapping the screen doesn’t seem to work or produces unexpected
results.
    1.   Restart the PFED application, if possible.
    2.   Reset the handheld using your stylus. The reset button is located on the
         bottom (or sometimes the side) of the computer.
    3.   If the screen responds, but the pen alignment seems to be off, you may
         need to recalibrate the handheld. Pen calibration is accessible through the
         Start/Settings/System Tab/Screen menu option.

I cannot access the PFED application. It does not appear in the                                                       Figure 3-54 Date/Time Entry Screen
Start menu.
                                                                                                  13. The system will then process through the PointSec Security installation
                                                                                                      process. From here, follow the instructions found in section 3.7.5.
If the handheld computer loses power abnormally, it sometimes erases all stored
information (including applications) from memory. If this occurs, the PFED                    3.7.5    PointSec Installation or System Recovery on the 5700
software must be reloaded (refer to section 3.2 Initial System Installation for the
                                                                                                  1.   When date/time entry is complete the system will start the PointSec
reload process).
                                                                                                       installation process (Figure 3-55). Tap     in the top right hand corner to
                                                                                                       start the process.
                                                                                                  2.   The next screen to appear will be the PointSec User ID screen (Figure
                                                                                                       3-56). On this screen enter an ID for configuring the PointSec security
                                                                                                       software. When ready, tap      in the top right hand corner.
DRAFT                                       235                              March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                   36                              March 16, 2009
Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup                                              PFED User Manual    Appendix B – Troubleshooting                                          PFED User Manual

    3.   On the next security screen (Figure 3-57), enter the same password in both                  a.   On the PLGR, press the Menu button. Select the Setup menu by
         the PIN and Confirm fields. It is recommended that the operator use their                        pressing the left and right directional arrows until Setup begins
         AKO password so it is easily remembered. When complete, tap              in the                  blinking.
         top right hand corner.                                                                      b.   Press the up and down directional arrows to scroll through the various
                                                                                                          setup screens. Stop at the Setup I/O screen.
                                                                                                     c.   Press the right directional arrow until the word following SERIAL
                                                                                                          begins to blink. This word will either be Standard, Instrum or Custom.
                                                                                                          Push the down arrow button until Standard is selected.
                                                                                                     d.   Setting the serial connection to Standard allows the PFED software to
                                                                                                          program the PLGR automatically. This is done on startup when the
                                                                                                          PLGR is connected and a COM port is enabled for the PLGR.
                                                                                                     e.   Press the POS button to go back the main position display.
                                                                                                     f.   Restart the PFED software to make sure the PLGR is initialized.

                                                                                            The PLGR indicates an old position and never initializes to my
                                                                                            actual location.
                                                                                                1.   Has it been longer than 30 minutes? The first time you turn your GPS on in
                                                                                                     a new area, it can take up to 30 minutes to acquire satellites. After this first
                                                                                                     initialization, it should not take longer than two (2) minutes to locate you.
  Figure 3-55 PointSec Installation Process               Figure 3-56 PointSec User ID
                                                                                                2.   Check that the cable between the external GPS antenna and the PLGR is
                                                                                                     intact and connected.
                                                                                                3.   Is the GPS antenna properly mounted? It should be flat (horizontal) with a
                                                                                                     clear view of the horizon.
                                                                                                4.   Does the antenna have a clear view of the horizon? If you are under a
                                                                                                     shelter, in a hide, or underneath trees (especially pine trees), you may not
                                                                                                     be able to receive a GPS signal. Try to move, or extend your antenna, to a
                                                                                                     location where your GPS antenna can receive signals from the GPS
                                                                                                     satellites.

                                                                                            B.5      LEICA BLUETOOTH CONNECTION FAILURE

                                                                                            If PFED is not receiving any data when using a Bluetooth connection:
                                                                                                1.   Verify that you have a Bluetooth enabled build of PFED:
                                                                                                     a.   Check the About screen and verify that the build does not have “No
                                                                                                          BT” after it.
                         Figure 3-57 PointSec Security PIN Setup                                2.   Verify that you have set up the Leica within PFED correctly with the correct
                                                                                                     Bluetooth address.
                                                                                                3.   Using a coin or a screwdriver, remove the battery compartment cover on the
                                                                                                     Leica.
     : To display the Rules for a password (Figure 3-58), tap the           button. Tap
                                                                                                4.   Remove the battery from the Leica.
   in the top right hand corner of this screen to exit the rules.
                                                                                                5.   Wait at least 15 seconds.

DRAFT                                        37                            March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                     234                             March 16, 2009
Appendix B – Troubleshooting                                                 PFED User Manual    Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup                                           PFED User Manual

                       Parity = None                                                                 4.   The device will then display a message stating that it will perform a soft
                                                                                                          reboot (Figure 3-59). Tap      in the top right hand corner once more to
         e.   Change information as necessary then tap                   .                                begin the reboot process.
                                                                                                     5.   Once the handheld has completed the soft boot, the Password entry screen
         f.   Tap on the PLGR item in the list then tap    . This will initiate the
                                                                                                          will display (Figure 3-60). Using the available keypad, enter the same
              PLGR device and turn the indicator “green” ( ).
                                                                                                          password as in step 3. When complete, tap          in the top right hand
    2.   Add a Mark VII LRF to your device list.                                                          corner.
         a.   At the top, above Sensors tap             .
         b.   Tap on the Mark VII option. This will be added to the Sensors list.


         c.   Tap on the Mark VII item in the list then tap          .
         d.   When using the serial communication:
                       Port Num = COM1
                       Baud Rate = 4800
                       Stop Bits = 1
                       Flow Control = None
                       Data Bits = 8
                       Parity = None
         e.   Tap the first grey box in the Range Gate field and using the available
              keypad, enter the beginning range limitation for the LRF device. When
              entered, tap           .
         f.   Tap the second grey box in the Range Gate field and using the                       Figure 3-58 PointSec Password Rules           Figure 3-59 PointSec Restart Message
              available keypad, enter the ending range limitation for the LRF device.
              When entered, tap              .

         g.   Change information as necessary then tap                   .

         h.   Tap on the Mark VII item in the Sensors list then tap             .

    3.   Save all settings by tapping                until you have returned to the Main
         PFED screen.

    4.   Exit PFED by tapping            and Exit.
    5.   If the system prompted you to reboot the handheld to enable the
         communications network, perform a Soft Reset and restart PFED.
B.4.2    PLGR Verification

The following section applies when operating a device other than the AN/PSG-
10 (V)2 w/PPS or AN/PSG-10 (V)3 w/SAASM.
                                                                                                                        Figure 3-60 PointSec Password Prompt
    1.   Verify the PLGR settings:
                                                                                                     6.   The installation is now complete and the Today screen will appear. Based
                                                                                                          on the version you have installed, a different background photo or theme
                                                                                                          (Figure 3-61, Figure 3-62, Figure 3-63) will be shown.
DRAFT                                        233                                March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                    38                              March 16, 2009
Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup                                         PFED User Manual    Appendix B – Troubleshooting                                          PFED User Manual

                                                                                       The AFATDS box displays a communications error that says
                                                                                       “Unknown Recipient.”

                                                                                       On the PFED User Info screen make sure that your Unit and URN entries
                                                                                       correspond to what AFATDS expects on your Handheld.

                                                                                       B.4      GPS

                                                                                       This section lists possible solutions for problems encountered with GPS location
                                                                                       or connectivity.

                                                                                       The position display on the Main PFED screen is not updating.
                                                                                           1.   Check that the PLGR batteries are good and that it is powered on.
                                                                                           2.   Check to see if the cable leading from the GPS is intact and connected. If it
                                                                                                is not connected, re-attach.
      Figure 3-61 Today Screen Version        Figure 3-62 Today Screen Version
                     1.1                                     2.0                           3.   Does the PLGR display indicate an old position? If so, it is possible that the
                                                                                                PFED display is being updated, but the position is old and has not changed.
                                                                                           4.   Check the PFED Communications Setup. You can access this screen by
                                                                                                tapping      from the Main PFED screen then tap Devices.

                                                                                                a.   Is PLGR in your list of sensors? If no, then add PLGR and tap          .


                                                                                                b.   Select PLGR from the sensors list and tap          . Verify that all
                                                                                                     configuration settings are accurate. Tap             to return to the setup
                                                                                                     screen.

                                                                                           5.   If any of the above settings are incorrect, correct them and tap
                                                                                                located at the bottom of the setup screen.
                                                                                       B.4.1    Configuring GPS Devices on PFED
                                                                                           1.   Add a PLGR to your device list.

                      Figure 3-63 Today Screen Version 3.0                                      a.   Above the Sensors section, tap         .
                                                                                                b.   Tap on the PLGR option. This will be added to the Sensors list.
3.8     RESETTING THE DEVICE (5700 MODEL)
                                                                                                c.   Tap on the PLGR item in the list then tap      .
The following section shows the Initial System Installation for the 5700 models.                d.   Check to make sure all connection information is set correctly:
                                                                                                              Port Num = COM1
Resetting the handheld is very much like re-booting a desktop computer. This is                               Baud Rate = 9600
done using the stylus and the external Reset button found at the bottom                                       Stop Bits = 1
underside of the device.                                                                                      Flow Control = None
                                                                                                              Data Bits = 8
DRAFT                                    39                           March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                    232                               March 16, 2009
Appendix B – Troubleshooting                                       PFED User Manual     Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup                                              PFED User Manual

                                                                                        3.8.1       Soft Reset on the 5700
                             APPENDIX B                                                       1.    Using the reset button on the front of the device (Figure 3-47), press the tip
                          TROUBLESHOOTING                                                           of the stylus very lightly until the Welcome screen appears.
                                                                                              2.    This will re-boot the device and process a new login using the PointSec
B.1      INTRODUCTION                                                                               login screen.
                                                                                              3.    Using the available keypad, enter the same password created when the
The troubleshooting guide that follows is just that, a guide. It covers the most                    system was first installed. When complete, tap       in the top right hand
common system problems and their solutions. Problems or solutions not                               corner.
covered in this manual should be addressed by technical personnel only.
                                                                                        3.9        HANDHELD DEVICE SETTINGS (5700 MODEL)
B.2      GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING TECHNIQUES
                                                                                        The following section shows the Initial System Installation for the 5700 models.
Troubleshooting should be done using a process of elimination. In general,
troubleshooting involves following, in order, the steps below.                          3.9.1       Access System Setting Options on the 5700
    1.   Check your hardware.                                                                 1.    Using the stylus, tap       .
         a.   Check the power source. Are your batteries good? Is the power                   2.    To access the handheld power and backlight options, tap the Settings
              connected?                                                                            menu option (Figure 3-64).
         b.   Check all cable connections. Are the connectors fitted tightly?                 3.    This will display the main Settings screen that contains three (3) tab options
                                                                                                    at the bottom (Figure 3-65): Personal, System, and Connections.
    2.   Check your equipment settings. Is the function you are trying to use
         enabled? Refer to the appropriate PFED component outline for proper
         configuration instructions.
    3.   Restart effected components. If everything is set up properly, restarting
         hardware and/or software is sometimes the quickest way to restore proper
         operation.

When experiencing problems with data communications, you may need to
coordinate your troubleshooting efforts with FDC personnel because the
problem may not be yours. However, you should first eliminate possible
problems with your equipment.

The following sections list possible solutions for a number of problems that you
may encounter while using the PFED system in the field. Proceed through the
list of possible solutions. If after completing the list you still are having system
trouble, please contact technical support.

B.3      DATA COMMUNICATIONS                                                            Figure 3-64 Today Screen Settings Menu                 Figure 3-65 Settings Screen
                                                                                                        Option

This section lists possible solutions for problems encountered with sending or
                                                                                        3.9.2       Power Configuration on the 5700
receiving messages using the PFED system.
                                                                                        All handheld computers contain an internal power source that allows the device
                                                                                        to operate without any external assistance. However, most often the device will
DRAFT                                    231                           March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                       40                              March 16, 2009
Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup                                           PFED User Manual        Appendix A - Acronyms                                          PFED User Manual

be connected to an external battery power supply when in the field for added                    OBCO                 Observer Coordinates
support. For this situation, you will be instructed to disable the devices                      PFED                 Pocket-sized Forward Entry Device
automatic “shut off when not in use” feature so as not to experience any                        PLGR                 Precision Lightweight GPS Receiver
communication disconnect. If the PFED device “goes to sleep” the device will                    PM BC                Project Manager, Battle and Command
experience a communications loss. This can be avoided by setting the device to                  PTM                  Plain Text Message
continual on.                                                                                   RFA                  Restrictive Fire Area
                                                                                                RFL                  Restrictive Fire Line
To prolong the external battery power, you will also be instructed to set the                   R-PDA                Rugged - Personal Digital Assistant
backlight display to an “off” state when not in use and to set the light level as               SALUTE               Size Activity Location Unit Time Equipment
low as possible so as not to drain the battery unnecessarily. This “off” state is               SATCOM               Satellite Communication
not the same as the “shut off when not in use” feature mentioned above. It is a                 SINCGARS ASIP        Single Channel Ground Airborne Radio System Advanced
separate control for the light display only.                                                                         Systems Improvement Program
                                                                                                SLP                  Sensor Link Protocol
    1.   From the main Settings screen, tap the            tab at the bottom to access          SMDBL                Space & Missile Defense Battle Lab
         the handheld system setting options.                                                   TACFIRE              Tactical Fire
                                                                                                TACSOP               Tactical Standard Operating Procedures
                                                                                                TOF                  Time Of Flight
    2.   In the list of available icons, there is an option for battery power ( ). If           TOT                  Time On Target
         you do not see it right away, you may need to scroll down through the list             URN                  Unit Reference Number
         using the stylus and the scroll bar to the right of the screen.                        UTM                  Universal Transverse Mercator
    3.   When you have found this picture icon, tap it once. This will access the               ZOR                  Zone Of Responsibility
         Settings – Power configuration screen (Figure 3-66).

    4.   Next tap the              at the bottom. Under this tab make sure the option
         “On battery power: - Turn off device if not used for” is unchecked. To
         uncheck the option, tap it once. This power option refers to the internal
         battery that is part of the R-PDA device.
    5.   Make sure the option “On external power: - Turn off device if not used for” is
         also unchecked. To uncheck the option, tap it once. This power option
         refers to any external battery power source plugged into the R-PDA device
         (i.e., power plug to wall or external battery pack). When ready tap       to exit
         this screen.


    6.   In the list of available icons, there is an option for backlight (    ). If you
         do not see it right away, you may need to scroll through the list using the
         stylus and the scroll bar to the right of the screen.
    7.   When you have found this picture icon, tap it once. This will access the
         Settings – Backlight configuration screen (Figure 3-67).

    8.   If not already shown, tap the                tab at the bottom.
    9.   Make sure the option “Turn off backlight if device is not used for” has been
         checked. To check the option, tap it once.



DRAFT                                    41                                March 16, 2009    DRAFT                                 230                          March 16, 2009
Appendix A - Acronyms                                           PFED User Manual     Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup                                         PFED User Manual

                                                                                         10. Then tap to the right of this and select the time option 10 sec. This
                               APPENDIX A                                                    selection is recommended for the best power usage, however it is not
                                                                                             required. You may select any time option needed.
                               ACRONYMS                                                  11. Next, make sure the option “Turn on backlight when a button is pressed or
                                                                                             the screen is tapped” has been checked. To check the option, tap it once.
A.1     ACRONYM LIST
                                                                                         12. Now tap the              tab at the bottom to access settings for the screen
   AF                   Adjust Fire                                                          brightness level (Figure 3-68).
   AFATDS               Advanced Field Artillery Tactical Data System
   ATI                  Artillery Target Information
   BDA                  Battle Damage Assessment
   CAS                  Close Air Support
   CFF                  Call for Fire
   CFL                  Coordinated Fire Line
   DARPA                Department of the Army Research Project Agency
   DISA                 Defense Information System Agency
   DNL                  Do Not Load
   EOM                  End Of Mission
   FA                   Field Artillery
   FDC                  Fire Direction Center
   FED                  Forward Entry Device
   FFE                  Fire for Effect
   FO                   Forward Observer
   FOM                  Figure Of Merit
                                                                                          Figure 3-66 Settings - Power              Figure 3-67 Settings - Backlight
   FOS                  Forward Observer System
                                                                                             Configuration Screen                 Configuration Screen – Internal Power
   FPF                  Final Protective Fire
   FSCL                 Fire Support Coordination Line
   FSCM                 Fire Support Coordination Measures
   FiST                 Fire Support Officer/Element/Team
   GPS                  Global Positioning System
   HF                   High Frequency
   HOB                  Height of Burst
   HST                  Helicopter Support Team
   IP                   Initial Point
   LFED                 Lightweight Forward Entry Device
   LRF                  Laser Range Finder
   MEDEVAC              Medical Evacuation
   MGRS                 Military Grid Reference System
   MOI                  Messages Of Interest
   MTO                  Message to Observer
   NAD                  Network Access Delay
   NBC                  Nuclear Biological Chemical                                             Figure 3-68 Settings - Brightness Level Configuration Screen
   NFA                  No Fire Area

DRAFT                                  229                          March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                   42                             March 16, 2009
Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup                                            PFED User Manual     Chapter 9 - Security                                                  PFED User Manual

    13. Here, you have two (2) options. The top control, Battery Power, is used
                                                                                               3.   If you wish to cancel this activation, tap    at the top right hand corner of
        when the system is being run by any battery power source be it the internal
                                                                                                    this message window.
        power or external battery pack. The bottom control, External Power, is used
        when the device is attached to a constant electrical source such as power
        cord.
                                                                                           9.3.2    Deactivating Duress Mode
    14. It is recommended that the Battery Power option be set to the lowest                   1.   If the PFED unit has been placed in duress mode, you will need to access
                                                                                                    the About screen to deactivate it. To quickly access the PFED About
         possible level. To set the backlight, tap and hold down on the slider ( ) in               screen, turn the device’s power off then on again.
         the Battery Power level control. Slide this bar to the left as far as you can
         while still being able to read the screen.                                            2.   Or, tap       on the Main PFED screen then tap About.
    15. To exit the Settings screen tap        at the top right.                               3.   Tap    in the top right hand corner once. A message window will display
                                                                                                    (Figure 9-3) for confirmation of deactivating duress mode.
3.9.3    System Clock on the 5700
The system clock will need to be set to military time so PFED will date/time
stamp messages correctly. If the system experiences a power failure or “hard
reset,” the system date defaults to May 2002 that will need to be corrected to the
current date.

    1.   From the main Settings screen, tap the              tab at the bottom to access                      Figure 9-3 Duress Mode Deactivation Confirmation
         the handheld system setting options.
                                                                                               4.   Tap     in the top right hand corner of this message box to confirm the
                                                                                                    deactivation request. The system will now exit duress mode and function
    2.   In the list of available icons, there is an option for regional settings (  ).             normally.
         If you do not see it right away, you may need to scroll down through the list
         using the stylus and the scroll bar to the right of the screen.
                                                                                                   : Be aware that address information was removed at the time duress mode was
    3.   When you have found this picture icon, tap it once. This will access the          initiated. This information must be re-entered before any message processing takes place.
         Settings – Regional Settings configuration screen (Figure 3-69).
    4.   At the bottom of this screen there are five (5) tab options: Region, Number,          5.   If you wish to continue the duress mode, tap               in the center of this
         Currency, Time and Date.                                                                   message window.

    5.   Tap the        tab to access the Settings – Time configuration screen
         (Figure 3-70).




DRAFT                                     43                              March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                     228                            March 16, 2009
Chapter 9 - Security                                                  PFED User Manual    Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup                                            PFED User Manual

      2.   Using the available keypad, enter your existing password in the Old
           Password field.
      3.   Enter your new password in both the New Password and Confirm New
           Password fields.

      4.   When complete, tap           . You will receive one of three messages.
           a.   If you receive a message stating “Old password is incorrect,” tap
                          and try entering your Old Password again.
           b.   If you receive a message stating “New Password and Confirm New
                Password differ,” tap            and try entering your New Password
                again in both fields.
           c.   If you receive a message stating “Your password has been changed,”
                tap          and return to the Main PFED screen.

9.3        DURESS MODE                                                                    Figure 3-69 Settings - Regional Settings        Figure 3-70 Settings - Regional Settings
                                                                                                   Configuration Screen                         Time Configuration Screen
Each time the PFED application is started, the About screen will automatically                6.   In the Time Style field, tap and scroll down through the options until you
appear. This will allow the operator to quickly activate and/or deactivate the                     have located the HH:mm:ss selection. Tap on this option to select it. This
duress mode, if needed. When duress mode is initiated, all databases will be                       will allow you to set your system time to the military 24-clock. You will see
purged except for the primary address and the operator’s address. These                            an example at the top of the screen.
addresses will be used to send out a plain text message. This message will alert              7.   The Time Separator field should have the “:” symbol for separation. As well
the primary on the network that the PFED operator is in duress mode. This                          as the AM and PM symbol fields should be set to AM and PM.
message will include the operator’s current location, and will be transmitted at 5
minute intervals or the time that has been set in the Auto Positioning Report.                8.   Tap the        tab at the bottom of the screen to access the Settings – Date
                                                                                                   configuration screen (Figure 3-71).

9.3.1      Activating Duress Mode                                                             9.   In the Short Date field, tap and scroll through the options until you have
                                                                                                   located an appropriate format to set the date. The option typically used is
      1.   Once the PFED application has been accessed the About screen will                       dd-MMM-yy, however this is optional. You will see an example at the top of
           appear. Tap      in the top right hand corner once. A message window will               the screen.
           display (Figure 9-2) for confirmation of the duress mode.                          10. The Date Separator field should be displaying the “-” symbol and the Long
                                                                                                  Date field should have the option of ddd, dd MMMM, yyyy displayed.

                                                                                              11. When these settings are complete, tap          to exit and save your selections.
                                                                                              12. From the available icons on the main Settings screen, tap once on the



                                                                                                   Clock & Alarms (         ) icon (you may need to scroll up to find the picture
                      Figure 9-2 Duress Mode Activation Confirmation                               icon). This will access the Settings – Clock & Alarms screen (Figure 3-72).

      2.   Tap              in this message box to activate duress mode. The system           13. Make sure the Time tab at the bottom is selected. If not, tap the          tab.
           will then appear as if it is functioning properly. However, it will be
                                                                                              14. The system clock feature allows the configuration of two (2) separate clocks
           transmitting the alert message and will not process any incoming or
                                                                                                  that run simultaneously. A local (Home) clock and an alternate (Visiting)
           outgoing messages.
                                                                                                  clock.

DRAFT                                      227                           March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                      44                            March 16, 2009
Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup                                         PFED User Manual     Chapter 9 - Security                                            PFED User Manual



     : It is recommended that the Home time be set to the option GMT Casablanca so                                       CHAPTER 9
PFED will accurately date and time stamp all transmissions.                                                               SECURITY
    15. To set the local clock, make sure the Home clock radio button is active by
        tapping Home.                                                                   9.1        INTRODUCTION
    16. The first field on the right allows the selection of the Greenwich Mean Time
        location. Tap to the right and scroll through the available options and
        select GMT Casablanca.                                                          When the PFED handheld is being used in FiST mode, security consists of two
                                                                                        components. The first component is at the handheld level where the operator
    17. Tap on the Hours in the displayed time, located under the GMT selection, to
        highlight it. Use and     to set the current hours.
                                                                                        will access all handheld processes with the PointSec password. The second
                                                                                        component is at the application level that provides access control by requiring
    18. Repeat step 17 to set the Minutes and Seconds to compete the local time
                                                                                        the user to enter a system FiST Mode Password. When the PFED handheld is
        setting.
                                                                                        “not” set to FiST mode, security consists of the one PointSec access component.
    19. In the Date field, tap   to open a small calendar (Figure 3-73).

                                                                                        9.2        FIST MODE PASSWORD

                                                                                        Passwords for the application shall consist of the following:
                                                                                                   Passwords must be between one (1) and eight (8) alpha-characters
                                                                                                   Passwords shall not be blank
                                                                                        9.2.1      Changing the FiST Mode Password

                                                                                              1.   Tap       on the Main PFED screen. Then tap the Passwords option
                                                                                                   followed by the Set FiST Mode Password option to access the Change
                                                                                                   FiST Password screen (Figure 9-1).




Figure 3-71 Settings - Regional Settings           Figure 3-72 Settings - Clock
      Date Configuration Screen                       Configuration Screen




                     Figure 3-73 Calendar Configuration Setting

    20. Tap       and      to select the current month.                                                        Figure 9-1 FiST Mode Password Screen


DRAFT                                      45                          March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                  226                         March 16, 2009
Chapter 8 – Call For Fire                                              PFED User Manual           Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup                                                PFED User Manual

                                                                                                       21. Tap on the displayed year (        ) and use available up and down scroll
                                                                                                           buttons that appear to select the current year.
                                                                                                       22. Tap the day of the week to select the current weekday.
                                                                                                       23. If you wish to set an alternate time zone, make sure the Visiting clock is
                                                                                                           active by tapping Visiting and continue to the next step. If not, skip to step
                                                                                                           25.
                                                                                                       24. To set the alternate clock, repeat steps 16 through 22 choosing the
                                                                                                           appropriate time, month and day for the location of the alternate settings.

                                                                                                       25. When all settings are complete, tap         . Tap              to save these
                                                                                                           settings.

                                                                                                  3.9.4     Power Low Warning on the 5700
                                                                                                  If the battery power gets critically low, a warning message (Figure 3-74) will
                                                                                                  notify the operator that the external batteries need to be replaced or the internal
                                                                                                  battery may need to be recharged.
              Figure 8-37 Fire Mission Monitor – CAS Tab (5700 Screen)




    2.   To access the CAS Request and create a new message tap                    .                          : Do not allow the battery power to be completely extinguished or all stored
                                                                                                  data and settings will be lost. If the power low message does appear, battery power should
                                                                                                  be replaced immediately.
    3.   To access the Check Fire functions, tap the             button.


      : To access the different sections of a CAS message, tap any of the          ,          ,
                                                                                                         : If power is completely lost, a re-initialization process will be needed to rebuild the
         or       tabs.                                                                           handheld. This will include the installation of the PFED application software, the
                                                                                                  configuration of all time, volume and battery power usage settings as well as all PFED
                                                                                                  database stored information such as unit list, user and device settings, etc (refer to sections
8.3.5.1 Processing BDA                                                                            3.7, 3.7.1, and 3.9.1 through 3.9.3).

    1.   If needed, tap the         tab.
    2.   To send a CAS BDA message, tap the Send CAS BDA radio button.
    3.   If you wish to specify the results for this transmission, tap the     to the right
         of the Results field and select an option.
    4.   To add a percentage of damage, tap in the % Damage field and enter a
         value.
    5.   To specify if this is to be a reattack, tap the checkbox to the left of the
         Reattack field.                                                                                                  Figure 3-74 Battery Low warning Message
    6.   And finally, to specify if this is a secondary explosion, tap the checkbox to
         the left of the Secondary Explosion field.                                                    1.   When you receive this power low message, the batteries located in the
                                                                                                            PFED battery pack compartment (Figure 2-9) will need to be replaced.
    7.   Once this information if entered, tap the           .                                         2.   If the external batteries cannot be immediately replaced, that may cause the
                                                                                                            PFED unit to shut down, the unit may require re-initialization.

DRAFT                                      225                               March 16, 2009       DRAFT                                        46                               March 16, 2009
Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup                                               PFED User Manual       Chapter 8 – Call For Fire                                                 PFED User Manual

     3.   To re-initialize the device, perform a screen alignment process by tapping            original on call target information is held in the On Call tab for accessing
          and holding the stylus down in the center of the five (5) crosshairs that             multiple times if needed.
          appear on the screen.
     4.   When prompted, choose a time zone for setting the devices system clock.                   1.   If needed, tap the         tab in the center of the screen to make changes to
          For further information on setting the system time, refer to section 3.9.3.                    the Target Location and Description information. Make sure you have the
     5.   Also, complete a full installation of the PFED application software and                        target selected in the list.
          reconfigure all system and application settings as noted in the warning
          stated above.                                                                             2.   Tap            to access the Target Description screen.
                                                                                                    3.   Refer to section 8.2.1.1 – Location Entry for instructions on completing the
                                                                                                         Location information.
      : The re-initialization process may also need to be performed if the handheld device
                                                                                                    4.   Refer to section 8.2.1 CFF (Screen 1) – Target Description for instructions
experiences a “hard reset” operation (i.e., using the reset button found at the bottom of the
                                                                                                         on completing the Size information.
device).
                                                                                                    5.   Refer to section 8.2.1 CFF (Screen 1) – Target Description for instructions
                                                                                                         on changing the Activity or Protection options.
3.10 LOCK/UNLOCK DEVICE (5700 MODEL)
                                                                                                    6.   If needed, tap the       tab in the center of the screen to make changes
The following section shows the Lock/Unlock Device feature for the 5700                                  to the Method of Engagement information.
models.
                                                                                                    7.   Tap            to access the CFF – [Target #] screen.
The 5700 R-PDA models contain a locking feature that will completely lock the                       8.   Refer to section 8.2.2 CFF - Extended (Screen 2) for instructions on
                                                                                                         completing the Method of Fire information.
device and prevent any tapping or processing of any kind. This feature can very
easily be engaged by mistake. However, it can just as easily be disengaged                          9.   To send the mission, tap             .
when this occurs.
                                                                                                8.3.4.2 MTO Processing
     1.   On the devices Today screen (Figure 3-75) there is an item that shows
          when the device is locked or unlocked.
                                                                                                You may also process an MTO from the On Call tab of the Fire Mission
     2.   If the device becomes locked, the indicators padlock will be closed ( ) and           Monitor.
          the word Unlock will appear in the bottom left coner of the screen.
                                                                                                    1.   Refer to section 8.3.1.1 for information on the MTO process.
     3.   To unlock the device, tap the word Unlock at the bottom left to access the
          Unlock screen (Figure 3-76).
                                                                                                8.3.4.3 Deleting an On Call Mission
     4.   Tap the             button. The device will then return you to the Today
                                                                                                You may delete an on call mission from the On Call tab of the Fire Mission
          screen and the indicators padlock will now be opened (         ).                     Monitor.
                                                                                                    1.   Make sure you have the target selected in the list. Tap it once if it is not
                                                                                                         highlighted.

                                                                                                    2.   Tap the        tab in the center of the screen.

                                                                                                8.3.5    CAS Missions
                                                                                                All CAS Request target missions are placed in the Fire Missions Monitor CAS
                                                                                                tab when transmitted.

                                                                                                    1.   Tap the            tab at the top of the screen (Figure 8-37).
DRAFT                                       47                                March 16, 2009    DRAFT                                       224                              March 16, 2009
Chapter 8 – Call For Fire                                           PFED User Manual       Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup                                            PFED User Manual

8.3.3.3 Log
Viewing the observer notifications may also be performed from the Inactive tab.
    1.   Refer to section 8.3.1.12 for more information on viewing log entries.                                        Lock/Unlock
                                                                                                                        Indicator
8.3.4    On Call Fire Missions
FPF or any On Call target missions are placed in the Fire Missions Monitor On
Call tab when:
              A CFF FFE mission is sent with the FPF or Priority option selected
              (for FPF and Priority Copperhead missions, this will send an
              Assign FPF or Assign Priority Copperhead message), or
              Cease Loading is sent for an FPF mission, or
              EOM is sent for priority targets, or
              Local Make Inactive option is selected for the mission.
                                                                                              Figure 3-75 Lock/Unlock Indicator                  Figure 3-76 Unlock Screen

The On Call tab on the Fire Mission Monitor screen allows you to delete or re-
initiate completed priority missions.                                                      3.11 STEALTH MODE (5700 MODEL)

    1.   Tap the            tab at the top of the screen (Figure 8-36).                    The following section shows the Stealth Mode feature for the 5700 models.

                                                                                           The 5700 R-PDA models contain a stealth feature that will place the device in a
                                                                                           “camouflage” configuration where the display becomes very dark to avoid
                                                                                           detection. This mode will engage automatically when the device has been left
                                                                                           on for a fairly long length of time, but has not been operated.

                                                                                               1.   From the devices Today screen tap            .
                                                                                               2.   To access the Stealth feature, tap the Settings menu option, then tap the
                                                                                                             tab at the bottom.
                                                                                               3.   In the list of available icons, there is an option for the stealth program


                                                                                                    (      ). If you do not see it right away, you may need to scroll down
                                                                                                    through the list using the stylus and the scroll bar to the right of the screen
                                                                                                    (Figure 3-77).

                Figure 8-36 Fire Mission Monitor – On Call Tab Screen


8.3.4.1 Re-Initiating A On Call Target
On Call targets may be fired from the Fire Mission Monitor On Call tab. Any
missions fired from this area are placed in the Active tab for monitoring. The

DRAFT                                    223                              March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                     48                              March 16, 2009
Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup                                          PFED User Manual       Chapter 8 – Call For Fire                                              PFED User Manual

                                                                                           8.3.3.1 Re-Initiating An Inactive Target
                                                                                           Inactive targets may be fired from the Fire Mission Monitor Inactive tab. Any
                                                                                           missions fired from this area are placed in the Active tab for monitoring.

                                                                                                1.   If needed, tap the         tab in the center of the screen to make changes to
                                                                                                     the Target Location and Description information. Make sure you have the
                                                                                                     target selected in the list.

                                                                                                2.   Tap            to access the Target Description screen.
                                                                                                3.   Refer to section 8.2.1.1 – Location Entry for instructions on completing the
                                                                                                     Location information.
                                                                                                4.   Refer to section 8.2.1 CFF (Screen 1) – Target Description for instructions
                                                                                                     on completing the Size information.
                                                                                                5.   Refer to section 8.2.1 CFF (Screen 1) – Target Description for instructions
                         Figure 3-77 Stealth Setting Screen                                          on changing the Activity or Protection options.

    4.   If the device has been placed in Stealth mode, the Backlight and Volume                6.   If needed, tap the          tab in the center of the screen to make changes
         levels will be set to “0”, and the Disable button will be available.                        to the Method of Fire, Control and Engagement information.

    5.   To disengage the Stealth mode, tap                    then tap        to exit.         7.   Tap            to access the CFF – [Target #] screen.
                                                                                                8.   Refer to section 8.2.2 CFF - Extended (Screen 2) for instructions on
3.12 BLUETOOTH MODE (5700 MODEL)                                                                     completing the Method of Fire information.

The following section shows the Bluetooth Mode feature for the 5700 model.                      9.   To send the mission, tap          .

    1.   The Bluetooth feature can be accessed one of two ways. From the devices           8.3.3.2 Deleting an Inactive Mission
         Today screen tap                . This will display the Wireless Manager          You may delete an inactive mission from the Inactive tab of the Fire Mission
         screen (Figure 3-78).
                                                                                           Monitor.
    2.   To either turn Bluetooth on or off, tap the                           button.
                                                                                                1.   Make sure you have the target selected in the list. Tap it once if it is not
         This will change the toggle display to either                    or                         highlighted.
                           .
    3.   When the appropriate setting has been selected, tap             at the bottom          2.   Tap the        tab in the center of the screen.
         left to exit the screen.

    4.   You may also access the Bluetooth feature by tapping             and selecting         : Tapping the     tab for an on call target will immediately send a Delete Target
         Settings.                                                                         message to FOS or AFATDS.



    5.   Tap the             tab, then tap the           program.                                 : The Inactive tab contains a maximum of 50 fire missions that may be held within
                                                                                           this tab. This is an external number that can not be changed by the operator. When this
    6.   At the bottom of the screen tap the        tab (Figure 3-79).                     maximum has been reached, the oldest mission will be automatically removed and
                                                                                           replaced with the most recent. The system will not notify the operator of this action.



DRAFT                                    49                               March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                      222                             March 16, 2009
Chapter 8 – Call For Fire                                             PFED User Manual      Chapter 3 – Handheld Setup                                       PFED User Manual

8.3.2.2 Deleting a Pre-Planned Mission
You may delete a preplanned mission from either the Planned tab of the Fire
Mission Monitor or from the Planned Targets List option off of the Main PFED
Edit menu. A preplanned target may not be deleted from the Planned tab if the
mission is still active. You must complete the mission first before removing it.


      : When PFED deletes targets from the Planned or On Call target lists, PFED will
generate a Cancel Target (delete the On Call target) message to FOS/AFATDS.

    1.   Make sure you have the target selected in the list. Tap it once if it is not
         highlighted.

    2.   Tap the         tab in the center of the screen.

8.3.3    Inactive Fire Missions                                                              Figure 3-78 Wireless Manager Screen         Figure 3-79 Settings Bluetooth Mode
                                                                                                                                                        Screen
An inactive target is any non-priority target for which an EOM message is sent
or the local Make Inactive option is selected for the mission, or a Mission                     7.   Here you can toggle the Bluetooth mode on or off by checking or
Denied message was received. The Inactive tab on the Fire Mission Monitor                            unchecking the Turn on Bluetooth option.
screen allows you to delete or re-initiate completed missions.                                  8.   Tap     to exit the screen.

    1.   Tap the             tab at the top of the screen (Figure 8-35).                    3.13 EXTERNAL BUTTONS (5700 MODEL)

                                                                                            The following section shows the Initial System Installation for the 5700 models.

                                                                                            When the PFED application is active on the handheld, the four (4) external
                                                                                            buttons found on the device (Figure 3-80), will be programmed for a specific
                                                                                            use. They become access buttons for CFF mission templates and Check Firing
                                                                                            (refer to section 4.4.11 Fire Support Setup – CFF Templates).


                                                                                                                                                           Application
                                                                                                                                                            Buttons




                                                                                                           Figure 3-80 PFED Handheld Computer External Buttons

                Figure 8-35 Fire Mission Monitor - Inactive Tab Screen




DRAFT                                     221                              March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                  50                           March 16, 2009
Chapter 4 – Main Screen                                                PFED User Manual     Chapter 8 – Call For Fire                                           PFED User Manual



                                    CHAPTER 4
                                   MAIN SCREEN

4.1        ACTIVATING THE PFED APPLICATION

This section provides instructions on how to access and activate the PFED
application on the handheld device.




           : When entering data of any kind, verify the values are correct before tapping
any Ok, Send, Save or any other process button.
                                                                                                           Figure 8-34 Fire Mission Monitor - Planned Tab Screen
      1.     Using the stylus, tap    at the top of the main Today screen, then tap the
             PFED option (Figure 4-1). The About screen will display (Figure 4-2).
                                                                                            8.3.2.1 Firing a Pre-Planned Mission
                                                                                            Pre-Planned targets may be fired from the Fire Mission Monitor Planned tab.
                                                                                            Any missions fired from this area are placed in the Active tab for monitoring.
                                                                                            The original planned target information is held in the Planned tab for accessing
                                                                                            multiple times if needed.

                                                                                                1.   If needed, tap the       tab in the center of the screen to make changes to
                                                                                                     the Target Location and Description information. Again, make sure you
                                                                                                     have the target selected in the list.

                                                                                                2.   Tap            to access the Target Description screen.
                                                                                                3.   Refer to section 8.2.1.1 – Location Entry for instructions on completing the
                                                                                                     Location information.
                                                                                                4.   Refer to section 8.2.1 CFF (Screen 1) – Target Description for instructions
                                                                                                     on completing the Size information.
                                                                                                5.   Refer to section 8.2.1 CFF (Screen 1) – Target Description for instructions
           Figure 4-1 Handheld Start Menu         Figure 4-2 PFED About Screen                       on changing the Activity or Protection options.
                       Screen
                                                                                                6.   If needed, tap the          tab in the center of the screen to make changes
                                                                                                     to the Method of Fire, Control and Engagement information.

                                                                                                7.   Tap            to access the CFF – [Target #] screen.
                                                                                                8.   Refer to section 8.2.2 CFF - Extended (Screen 2) for instructions on
                                                                                                     completing the Method of Fire information.

                                                                                                9.   To send the mission, tap         .


DRAFT                                       51                             March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                    220                            March 16, 2009
Chapter 8 – Call For Fire                                           PFED User Manual      Chapter 4 – Main Screen                                               PFED User Manual




                                                                                                             GPS
                                                                                                         Information

                                                                                                                                                              Access to
                                                                                                                                                               PFED
                                                                                                                                                              Functions


                                                                                                      Toolbar




                                                                                                                       Figure 4-3 Main PFED Screen
   Figure 8-32 Log Information Screen      Figure 8-33 Log Command Information
                                                          Screen                              2.   To exit this screen and enter the application, tap the large graphic in the
                                                                                                   middle of the screen.
8.3.2    Planned Fire Missions
Preplanned targets are listed in the Planned tab of the Fire Mission Monitor                     : Duress mode may be activated or deactivated from the PFED About screen. Refer
screen. You may create a planned target using the Edit/Fire Support/Planned               to section 9.3 Duress Mode for further information.
Target List menu option available from the Main PFED screen.
                                                                                          GPS information is displayed in the rectangular box located above the function
                                                                                          buttons at the top of the Main PFED screen. This box display’s the position
    1.   To send a pre-planned fire mission, tap the              tab at the top of the
         Fire Mission Monitor screen (Figure 8-34). Make sure you have the planned
                                                                                          data received from your GPS or that was manually entered depending upon the
         target you wish selected by tapping it once in the list.                         mode of operation. Your current location is as stated here. Your position can be
                                                                                          displayed in Military Grid Reference System (MGRS), Latitude/Longitude
                                                                                          coordinates or Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM).

                                                                                          When the GPS is activated, the Position display will be automatically updated
                                                                                          with your current location approximately every ten (10) seconds. If your GPS is
                                                                                          disabled, you may manually enter your location.


                                                                                                 : When PFED is first installed or the operator is forced to perform a “hard reset”
                                                                                          (zeroizing) on the device, the PFED application will not retain the current location
                                                                                          information. When PFED is accessed after such a contingency, the system will require the
                                                                                          operator to enter their current location information.




DRAFT                                    219                           March 16, 2009     DRAFT                                     52                              March 16, 2009
Chapter 4 – Main Screen                                                   PFED User Manual      Chapter 8 – Call For Fire                                               PFED User Manual



       : It is important that the location shown in the Position display be accurate. All             : Any Check Firing processes on a target may only be cancelled on the initiating
reports generated and sent by PFED will be based on and tagged with this location,              device.
regardless of how it was entered.

Information displayed on this screen is as follows:
                                                                                                      : If a Cancel Check Firing All message is sent and the device does not receive this
                                                                                                transmission (if the device is turned off or temporarily disconnected from the network), a
           Location Button (                                ): Either your current
                                                                                                Check Firing All indicator icon ( ) will display in the top right corner of the Fire Mission
           latitude and longitude, or MGRS or UTM location. Pressing this
                                                                                                Monitor and the CFF Screen 1 windows (Figure 8-31). The operator may continue to send
           button allows you to manually edit your location (refer to section 4.4.1             fire missions on the tactical network while in this state. However, the operator may be
           GPS/Manual Time Sync)                                                                prompted to cancel this state during processing and will be required to confirm the Cancel
           Time of Fix: States the time the location information was entered                    Check Firing All before continuing.
           Source of Fix: States how the location information was entered
           Alt/Elev: Displays your current altitude/elevation (altitude/elevation is
           shown in meters only)
                                                                                                       : When processing a Check Firing All or Check Firing by Target Number, a unit
           Heading: Displays your current heading                                               cofigured as a FiST device may not stop this processing when the originator of the
           Speed: Displays your current speed                                                   message is set in Review mode.
           Compass Arrow (Nav): Displays your current position in relation to
           the configured waypoint showing which direction the operator will
           need to proceed                                                                                                                                                  Check Fire
                                                                                                                                                                           Received Icon
4.2        PFED NAVIGATION
                                                                                                                                Figure 8-31 Check Fire Icon

4.2.1      Title Bar Ok Button                                                                  8.3.1.11 New Call For Fire
On several PFED screens you will see an             in the application title bar (Figure        At any time you may initiate a new CFF mission.
4-3) at the top right of the screen.
                                                                                                     1.   Tap          to access the CFF screen.
                                                                                                     2.   Refer to section 8.2 Call For Fire for instructions creating a new CFF
                                                                                                          request.
                              Figure 4-4 Application Title Bar

      3.   If available, may be tapped at any time to cancel the current function               8.3.1.12 Log
           being performed and return you to the previous screen.
                                                                                                Occasionally observer notifications (shot, splash, rounds complete) are received
                                                                                                too quickly to view in the the Fire Mission Monitor target list. The Fire Mission
      : The      will always operate as a “cancel and return” function within the PFED          Monitor provides access to a history of observer notifications received, as well
application. In very limited cases, this button is disabled forcing an entry on the current     as MTO received and subsequent adjusts sent.
screen.

                                                                                                     1.   Tap the           tab to access the history information (Figure 8-32).
4.2.2      Minimizing PFED
                                                                                                     2.   Highlight the message or command of interest and tap                 to view its
When you first access the PFED application, the Main PFED application screen                              specific information (Figure 8-33).
will contain an in the title bar at the top right of the screen.
                                                                                                     3.   Tap           to exit.

DRAFT                                        53                                March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                       218                             March 16, 2009
Chapter 8 – Call For Fire                                             PFED User Manual       Chapter 4 – Main Screen                                                PFED User Manual

The button is enabled if the CFF request was received or if PFED sent the                          4.   When you tap     at the top right, the Main PFED (Figure 4-3) screen will
message but did not receive an acknowledgement after three (3) retry attempts.                          disappear or minimize and display the main Today screen (Figure 4-1).
The latter ensures that you can send a Check Firing message in the case where                      5.   To display the PFED application, tap       at the top of the Today screen
AFATDS received the message, is processing it, but could not successfully send                          and select PFED from the pop-up menu. You will not need to enter your
PFED an acknowledgement.                                                                                password since you did not actually exit PFED using the Exit option (refer to
                                                                                                        section 4.4.19 Exiting PFED).
When PFED receives a shot or splash acknowledgement, the indicator is shown
                                                                                                   6.   You will also notice that the    option at the top left of the title bar
in the Status column for any Check Firing or Check Firing All messages. When
a cancel acknowledgement of a Check Firing is received, a large splash screen is                        changes to        when you enter the PFED application. If you tap          in
briefly displayed. This splash screen will automatically disappear after a few                          the title bar, the Today    menu appears (Figure 4-5). If you happen to
seconds and will be the only indicator received.                                                        select a menu option from this list, the PFED application screen will again
                                                                                                        disappear or minimize. Either repeat step 2 to return to the PFED
    1.   From the systems master toolbar at the very bottom of the handheld screen,                     application, or tap any  or     you see at the top right until the Main PFED
                                                                                                        screen reappears.
         tap    . Or, from the Fire Mission Monitor screen, tap       . You may
         press the fourth (4th) hotkey button on the handheld device. Any one of
         these will access the Check Firing button options (Figure 8-30).




                        Figure 8-30 Check Firing Button Options

    2.   Make sure you have the target you wish to perform a check firing on is
         selected by tapping it once in the above list.

    3.   To check firing on the selected target, tap                 . Tap            to
         send a message to check firing on the selected target. Tap               to exit
         the request.
    4.   If a target is in a Check Firing state and you initiated the check firing on that
         target, you may resume firing on the selected target by tapping
                                                                                                                               Figure 4-5 Start Menu
                        . Tap            to cancel the check firing on the selected
         target. Tap             to exit the cancellation request.                           4.3        TOOLBAR
    5.   To check firing on all of the targets (including those not in your list), tap
                                                                                             The PFED Toolbar (Figure 4-6) at the bottom provides quick access to some
                         . Tap            to send a message to check firing on all           frequently used functions for monitoring system and communication status.
         targets. Tap             to exit the request.
    6.   If all targets are in a Check Firing state and you initiated the check firing on

         all targets, you may resume firing on all targets by tapping                    .
         Tap           to cancel the check firing on all targets. Tap            to exit
         the cancellation request.


DRAFT                                       217                            March 16, 2009    DRAFT                                      54                              March 16, 2009
Chapter 4 – Main Screen                                          PFED User Manual      Chapter 8 – Call For Fire                                              PFED User Manual

                                                                                                 others) to transmit to. Place a check mark to the left of each unit you wish to

                       Transmit Queue                                                            transmit to, then tap         .
                                                Fire Mission      Check Firing
                                                   Monitor
                                                                                       8.3.1.9 Set Mission to Inactive
        Communications Status
                                                                       System Alerts
                                                                                       Once the end of mission message has been acknowledged by AFATDS, the fire
  GPS Time Sync
                                                                                       mission will be automatically moved to the Inactive tab. If transmission of this
                                                                     Handheld          message is not acknowledged, the operator has the option of manually setting
                                                                      Keypad
   Manual Time Sync                                                                    the target to an inactive state. On Call type missions will be moved to the On
                                                                                       Call tab. Note that using the local Make Inactive feature will not send an update
                                                                                       to AFATDS.
                                Figure 4-6 PFED Toolbar
                                                                                            1.   To manually set the mission to inactive, tap the    tab in the center of
4.3.1    GPS/Manual Time Sync                                                                    the screen. Make sure you have the target you wish to adjust by tapping it
                                                                                                 once in the list.
The GPS Time Sync ( ) and Manual Time Sync ( ) toolbar button opens a
screen that allows the selection of setting the system time through GPS methods             2.   Tap           .
or setting the time manually. Based on the option selected the system will
display the appropriate picture button. For more detail on this toolbar button,
refer to section 4.4.1 GPS/Manual Time Sync.                                                  : Pressing the Make Inactive button will cause the system to display one of the
                                                                                       following alerts:

4.3.2    Communications Status                                                         1. If the mission is an immediate suppression or immediate smoke that has not been
                                                                                       assigned a target number, the alert will be: “WARNING!!!! Deleting Mission without a
                                                                                       Target Number can corrupt Data, Continue?”
The Communications Status toolbar button ( ) opens a screen which shows                2. For all other type missions, the alert will be: “WARNING!!!! PFED may become out of
the current connect status of attached communications devices. If the active           sync with fire support systems processing this mission. Proper procedure to inactivate
communications device is not connected, the toolbar will display a down-arrow          missions is sending EOM. Continue?”
( ). Refer to section 5.2 Communications Status for more detail on this toolbar
button.                                                                                8.3.1.10 Check Firing

4.3.3    Transmit Queue
                                                                                              : Check Firing on all targets may be executed at any point whether you have active
                                                                                       fire missions listed in your monitor or not.
The Transmit Queue toolbar button ( ) opens a screen which shows the
current status of messages queued for transmission over your radio. The status         Once a CFF request has been sent, you have the option to check firing ( ), or
of a message may be: Queued, Sending, Retrying, Sent but Waiting for                   immediately halt firing, on the target. You may access this feature from the Fire
Acknowledgement, Deferred for Later Transmission, or Failed. For more detail           Mission Monitor as well as from the system toolbar shown at the bottom of the
on this toolbar button, refer to section 5.3.1 Accessing Transmission Queue.           handheld.

4.3.4    Fire Mission Monitor                                                          Under certain conditions, the Check Firing button is disabled (gray). The button
                                                                                       is disabled if the selected CFF message is waiting in the transmission queue or
The Fire Mission Monitor toolbar button ( ) allows you to view the status of           failed transmission due to a communications problem.
active fire missions. For more detail on this toolbar button, refer to section 8.3
Fire Mission Monitor.
DRAFT                                    55                          March 16, 2009    DRAFT                                       216                            March 16, 2009
Chapter 8 – Call For Fire                                           PFED User Manual     Chapter 4 – Main Screen                                                PFED User Manual

    4.   If you wish to save the target as a Planned Target and notify the FDC, check    4.3.5      Check Firing
         the box for the Save as Planned Target then continue to step 7 below.
         a.   If the Save as Planned Target option is chosen, the Save as On Call        The Check Firing toolbar button ( ) allows you to quickly send a ‘check
              Target option is inactive. You may only save a mission to either
                                                                                         firing’ message for any or all active fire missions. For more detail on this
              Planned or On Call, not both.
                                                                                         toolbar button, refer to section 8.3.1.10 Check Firing.
    5.   If you wish to save the target as an On Call target and notify the FDC, check
         the box for the Save as On Call Target then continue to step 7 below.
                                                                                         4.3.6      System Alert
         a.   If the Save as On Call Target option is chosen, the Save as Planned
              Target option is inactive. You may only save a mission to either
              Planned or On Call, not both.
                                                                                         The System Alert toolbar button ( ) allows you to view a list of system
                                                                                         notifications, such as a message received for a recipient. If there are no alerts
    6.   If you wish to send any Battle Damage information, tap            to access     stored on the system, then the button will be disabled ( ). For more detail on
         the Battle Damage Assessment (BDA) screen (Figure 8-29).                        this toolbar button, refer to section 5.4.1 Accessing Alerts.

                                                                                         4.3.7      Handheld Keypad

                                                                                         The Keypad toolbar button (         ) displays the full keypad.

                                                                                         4.4        SETTING UP YOUR PFED HANDHELD

                                                                                         4.4.1      GPS/Manual Time Sync
                                                                                               1.   To access the Manual Time Sync option, tap          (or if the system was
                                                                                                    previously set to GPS, tap    ) in the application toolbar. This will display
                                                                                                    the Set System Time screen. This screen will be different based on which
                                                                                                    selection has been chosen (Figure 4-7 or Figure 4-8).
                                                                                               2.   To allow the system to set and sync the time with the GPS device, tap the
                                                                                                    Set Time from GPS option.
                     Figure 8-29 Battle Damage Assessment Screen
                                                                                               3.   Or, to perform a manual time hack, tap the option titled Set Time Manually.
         a.   Using the available keypad, enter the % Damaged and # Casualties
              values.                                                                               This will display a                       button.
         b.   Tap to select an Effects value of Burning, Destroyed, Neutralized,
              Neutralized/Burning, No Effect or Suppressed. When finished, tap
                                                                                               4.   Tap                        to display the Date/Time Entry screen (Figure
                        .                                                                           4-9).
    7.   Before sending the EOM, enter refinement data (if applicable) under the Tgt,
         Control and Adjust tabs.
    8.   If you are finished with all changes and wish to send the correction, tap
                 .
    9.   If this EOM is being processed on a fire mission that was initiated by a
         subordinate unit, the Select Units to send to prompt will appear (Figure
         8-22). The operator may select up to four (4) units (their primary plus three

DRAFT                                    215                            March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                      56                              March 16, 2009
Chapter 4 – Main Screen                                           PFED User Manual       Chapter 8 – Call For Fire                                            PFED User Manual


                                                                                             2.   Tap            to access the CFF – [Target #] screen.
                                                                                             3.   Tap    to the right of the At My Command field option in the Method of Fire
                                                                                                  and Control section and select When Ready. When finished, tap                .
                                                                                             4.   If you are finished with all changes and wish to send the cancel AMC
                                                                                                  message, tap               .

                                                                                         8.3.1.7 Repeat Fire For Effect and Cease Loading Command
                                                                                             1.   Tap           at the bottom of the screen. Make sure you have the target you
                                                                                                  wish to fire upon selected by tapping it once in the above list.
                                                                                             2.   To repeat a FFE, Imm Smoke or Imm Suppression command, tap
                                                                                                                     . Tap           to confirm the request. Tap         to
                                                                                                  cancel.

 Figure 4-7 Set Time from GPS Screen           Figure 4-8 Set Time Manually Screen           3.   To cease loading on a target, tap                   . Tap           to confirm
                                                                                                  the request. Tap               to cancel.

                                                                                         8.3.1.8 Sending EOM
                                                                                         An EOM message may be sent at any time during the sequence for an AF or
                                                                                         FFE mission. Immediate Smoke and Immediate Suppression missions may only
                                                                                         be made Inactive.

                                                                                         PFED will allow the operator to create EOM messages for missions that are
                                                                                         initiated by themselves or by subordinate units. When the device is configured
                                                                                         as a FiST unit, and the received mission was intiated by a subordinate unit, the
                                                                                         operator may create and send an EOM to up to four (4) units (their primary plus
                                                                                         three [3] others). When the operator creates an EOM for a mission, PFED will
                                                                                         also allow this EOM to be designated as an On Call target. This mission will be
                                                                                         placed in the On Call tab of the Fire Mission Monitor.
                          Figure 4-9 Date/Time Entry Screen
                                                                                         When an EOM message is sent with BDA data, AFATDS will display 3%
                                                                                         suppressed no matter what percent is sent by PFED. The transmitted
    5.   Tap   on the day, hour, minute, or year to change this data.                    information has not been altered, simply displayed differently.
    6.   Tap   and select another month if needed.

    7.   When complete, tap           .                                                      1.   Tap the        tab in the center of the screen. Make sure you have the
                                                                                                  target you wish to adjust by tapping it once in the list.
4.4.2    Operator (Positional) Location                                                      2.   To send an EOM on the selected fire mission, tap the End Of Mission radio
                                                                                                  button then continue to step 7 below.
If the PFED device identifies that the Time of Fix or Source of Fix information              3.   If you wish to save this target as a Known Point and notify the FDC, check
shown on the Main PFED screen is incorrect, based on one of the situations                        the box for the Save as Known Point then continue to step 7 below.

DRAFT                                     57                            March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                       214                           March 16, 2009
Chapter 8 – Call For Fire                                            PFED User Manual     Chapter 4 – Main Screen                                           PFED User Manual

                                                                                          described in sections 4.4.2.1 through 4.4.2.4, these fields will flash indicating
                                                                                          the discrepancy (Figure 4-10).




                          Figure 8-28 Target Description Screen



      : The Target Location and Target Type information may not be modified.
                                                                                                       Figure 4-10 Main PFED (OTF/EPE Flash Indication) Screen
    3.   Refer to section 8.2.1 CFF (Screen 1) – Target Description for information
         on completing the Size information.                                              4.4.2.1 Non-existent GPS Device or Embedded GPS
    4.   Refer to section 8.2.1 CFF (Screen 1) – Target Description for information
         on changing the Activity and/or Protection.                                      PFED utilizes positional data for the location of the FO in a number of ways
    5.   If you are finished with all changes and wish to send the correction, tap        depending on how that data is acquired. When a GPS device is connected to the
                                                                                          PFED handheld (AN/PSG-10 (V)1), or embedded within the PFED handheld
                 .
                                                                                          (AN/PSG-10 (V)2 w/PPS or AN/PSG-10 (V)3 w/SAASM), connection is
8.3.1.5 Sending the Fire Command                                                          established with the GPS device at the data link level and a port is opened for
                                                                                          communications. Using the PLGR message protocol, handshaking occurs to
For an At My Command mission, the Fire button under the Commands button                   establish the link between the PFED handheld and the GPS device and a
will be enabled after it is received by AFATDS, and PFED receives a Ready ( )             message 8 is sent by the PLGR to the PFED upon start up. A message 253 is
notification.                                                                             also sent by the PLGR every 6 seconds and the PFED device acknowledges this
                                                                                          message.
    1.   Tap           at the bottom of the screen. Make sure you have the target you
         wish to fire upon selected by tapping it once in the above list.                 Within PFED, the GPS object is set into an initializing state, waiting for valid
                                                                                          data to be sent from the GPS device. Positional data is then sent by the GPS
    2.   Tap                      . Tap         to confirm the fire request. Tap          device in the form of the 5040 status message. It includes a flag that tells if the
                     to cancel.
                                                                                          GPS device is “converged”; meaning that enough satellites have been locked on
                                                                                          and a valid fix is possible. This message, once established with the PFED and
8.3.1.6 Canceling an At My Command (AMC)                                                  the GPS device, is in continuous mode and is sent once every second regardless
                                                                                          of the state of the data.
    1.   Tap the            tab in the center of the screen. Make sure you have the
         target you wish to adjust by tapping it once in the list.                        If the data sent by the GPS device (message 5040) is converged, meaning that
                                                                                          the GPS device has a fix on the satellites and the data being sent is valid, the
DRAFT                                     213                            March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                   58                           March 16, 2009
Chapter 4 – Main Screen                                                    PFED User Manual        Chapter 8 – Call For Fire                                           PFED User Manual

PFED application sets the FO’s position to the position sent by the GPS and
updates the PFED Main screen with this position. The Figure Of Merit (FOM)
is parsed from the 5040 message and the PFED Main screen displays text on the
screen according to the following table:

  FOM value            Text displayed on the Main Screen of the PFED application as
  sent by the          the Source of Fix
  GPS device
          1                                   GPS, +/- 25m
          2                                   GPS, +/- 50m
          3                                   GPS, +/- 75m
          4                                   GPS, +/- 100m
          5                                   GPS, +/- 200m
          6                                   GPS, +/- 500m
          7                                  GPS, +/- 1000m
                                                                                                                               Figure 8-27 CFF - [Target #] Screen
          8                                  GPS, +/- 5000m
          9                                     GPS, OLD                                               3.   Refer to section 8.2.2 CFF - Extended (Screen 2) for instructions on making
                        Table 1 5040 Message Parse Configuration                                            changes.
                                                                                                       4.   If you are finished with all changes and wish to send the correction, tap
                                                                                                                    .
       : If the GPS is in standby or initializing, the FOM internal to the GPS is set to “0” and
the display shows GPS Old on the GPS device (if external). The PFED application will also
show GPS Old on the PFED Main screen as the Source of Fix.                                         Target Location and Description

The following information is parsed from the 5040 message and displayed                                1.   Tap the       tab in the center of the screen. Make sure you have the
                                                                                                            target you wish to adjust by tapping it once in the list.
within the Comms Status screen when the GPS device is selected from the list:
          Number of satellites visible                                                                 2.   Tap            to access the Target Description screen (Figure 8-28).
          Number of satellites used (locked on)
          Key status
          Almanac Age
If the user has not manually set the time on his PFED device from within the
PFED application (refer to section 4.3.1 GPS/Manual Time Sync), the time
information provided by the GPS is used to set the system time on the PFED
handheld (in Zulu).

4.4.2.2 Disconnected GPS Device
If the GPS is disconnected or not sending data to the PFED handheld, a timer is
set within the PFED application upon initialization of the GPS device. This
timer is set to check that data has been received from the GPS every seven (7)
seconds. If data has not been received within seven seconds, the following will
occur:

DRAFT                                        59                                March 16, 2009      DRAFT                                      212                          March 16, 2009
Chapter 8 – Call For Fire                                               PFED User Manual     Chapter 4 – Main Screen                                               PFED User Manual

update the mission and route it to the subordinate unit regardless of the routing                     An alert is presented to the user that states “DANGER!!! GPS has lost
configuration in the devices Unit List. The operator will NOT receive an alert                        connectivity, your position is not guaranteed”
for this routing process.                                                                             The GPS object within the PFED application is turned OFF so as to
                                                                                                      preclude further error messages popping up every seven (7) seconds
                                                                                                      The Comms Setup screen is displayed so that the FO can see that the
       : The      icon will only display for a Check Firing By Target Number or Cancel                GPS object within the PFED application has been turned off. This
Check Firing By Target Number messages. All other Check Firing messages will not                      affords the FO the opportunity to correct the problem with the GPS and
display an icon indicator.                                                                            restart the GPS object within the PFED application
                                                                                                      The position within the PFED application related to the FO is flagged
8.3.1.4 Making Subsequent Corrections                                                                 as being in error, and the PFED Main screen of the application
                                                                                                      display’s “GPS Error” where the FOM is usually displayed
After transmitting a CFF, you can make corrections to elements previously
                                                                                                      If the FO chooses to close out the Comms Setup screen without
transmitted including parts of the target description, method of engagement, fire
                                                                                                      correcting the problem with the GPS device, the position related to the
and control. You can also enter corrections necessary to adjust rounds onto the
                                                                                                      FO remains in an error state
target.
                                                                                             If the FO attempts to compose or send any message that uses this position data:
When sending a Subsequent Adjust message, the mission cannot be defined as
                                                                                                      An alert is presented that states “DANGER!!! GPS has lost
both an At My Command and a Cannot Observe. To correctly communicate
                                                                                                      connectivity, your position is not guaranteed. Enter your location”
with AFATDS, PFED will automatically transmit this message type as an At My
                                                                                                      The Grid Location screen is presented for the FO to manually set their
Command as the method of control.
                                                                                                      location.


       : In all cases you must make sure that the appropriate target number is selected in        : This screen will not allow the FO to cancel out. They must hit the Ok to
the target list.                                                                             acknowledge that they are setting their position manually.

                                                                                                      The position data related to the FO is set to “manually entered” and the
Deviation, Range and Height of Burst (HOB)                                                            FOM on the PFED Main screen of the PFED application displays
                                                                                                      “Operator Entered”
     1.   Tap the           tab in the center of the screen. Make sure you have the
          target you wish to adjust by tapping it once in the list.                          4.4.2.3 GPS Device Not Providing Data

     2.   Tap               to access the Adjust Fire screen.                                If there is not a GPS device providing positional data to the PFED application,
     3.   Refer to section 8.2.1.1 – Location Entry for instructions on making changes
                                                                                             the position stored as the FO’s position is set as “Operator Entered”, and the
          for a Shift.                                                                       logic for checking the ‘oldness’ of the position (described below) is applied.
     4.   If you are finished with all changes and wish to send the adjustment, tap
                                                                                             4.4.2.4 Position Data Not Updated within Set Time Period
                 . Otherwise you may continue to make corrections to the other
          parameters.                                                                        If the position data related to the FO has not been updated in a set period of
                                                                                             time, a timer is started each time the Time of Fix is set within the PFED
Method of Engagement, Fire and Control                                                       application. The length of this timer is based upon the value set by the FO in the
                                                                                             Automatic Position Reporting screen. By default, this value is set to five (5)
     1.   Tap the            tab in the center of the screen. Make sure you have the         minutes. If the current time minus the Time of Fix of the position for the FO is
          target you wish to adjust by tapping it once in the list.
                                                                                             beyond the duration described above, an alert is presented stating “Your position
     2.   Tap            to access the CFF – [Target #] screen (Figure 8-27).                has not been updated in <<duration>> minutes if the FO attempts to send a
                                                                                             message (i.e., Call for Fire, Position Report, Air Crew Briefing). If the FO
DRAFT                                       211                             March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                     60                              March 16, 2009
Chapter 4 – Main Screen                                                  PFED User Manual       Chapter 8 – Call For Fire                                        PFED User Manual

chooses to set the position manually from this alert, the Source of Fix on the
PFED Main screen will be set to “Operator Entered” and the Time of Fix will be
set to the current time. If a GPS is connected and initialized, once the next 5040
message is received from the GPS device, the position FOM will be set based on
the data received from the GPS (refer to Table 1). If the user elects to ‘cancel’
out of this alert, the message will be sent, but the position’s Time of Fix will not
be changed and this alert will appear the next time the user attempts to send a
message.

4.4.2.5 Setting Operator (Positional) Location
When the PFED application has been installed for the first time, or the operator
performs a zeroizing of the device, the operators’ current location information
will be removed. This information is required for correct PFED operation.
                                                                                                                       Figure 8-26 MTO Mission Denied Screen

       : If no location information exists, the system will automatically prompt the operator       1.   When you tap on the MTO message containing a denied mission, all other
to enter their current location when any operation is chosen.                                            tabs will be disabled (Figure 8-26).
     1.   From the Main PFED screen, tap the Location
                                                                                                    2.   To accept the denial, tap         . Once this is tapped, the message will
          (                              ) button. This will display the MGRS - Grid                     be removed from the Active folder and placed in the Inactive folder.
          Location screen (Figure 4-11).
                                                                                                8.3.1.3 Report Upon Firing
                                                                                                As your fire missions are processed by AFATDS, you will automatically receive
                                                                                                Shot, Splash, Rounds Complete, Check Firing and Check Firing All messages.
                                                                                                These messages are displayed in the status column of the active targets list, as
                                                                                                they are received:




                                                                                                PFED will allow processing of observer notification messages such as shot,
      Figure 4-11 MGRS - Grid Location             Figure 4-12 Decimal Degrees - Grid           splash, round’s complete and ready messages. When an observer notification
                   Screen                                   Location Screen                     message is received that was initiated by the operator (local message), an alert
                                                                                                will display and the mission will be updated.

                                                                                                When the device is configured as a FiST unit, and an observer notification
                                                                                                message is received for a mission initiated by a subordinate unit, PFED will
DRAFT                                        61                               March 16, 2009    DRAFT                                  210                           March 16, 2009
Chapter 8 – Call For Fire                                           PFED User Manual       Chapter 4 – Main Screen                                                PFED User Manual




                            Figure 8-25 MTO Display Screen
                                                                                                     Figure 4-13 Deg:Min:Sec - Grid            Figure 4-14 UTM - Grid Location
                                                                                                            Location Screen                                Screen
    2.   Tap the          tab (Figure 8-25). If there is no MTO present for the selected
         fire mission, this tab will be unavailable.                                            2.     Note the default of MGRS as your position measurement unit. If needed,
                                                                                                       change this to another unit of measure for your position (Figure 4-12, Figure
Information displayed in this screen is:                                                               4-13, and Figure 4-14).
         Units: Units to fire                                                                   3.     Using the available keypad, complete the information to designate your
                                                                                                       position.
         AF: Adjust fire shell/fuze
         FFE: Fire for effect shell/fuze                                                                     MGRS require’s the Zone, 100k, Easting, Northing and Altitude.
         PE Range: Probable error in range                                                                   Decimal Degrees and Deg:Min:Sec requires the Lat, Lon and
         #Vol: Number of volleys                                                                             Altitude.
         Angle T: Angle T value                                                                              UTM requires the Zone, Easting Prfx, Easting, Northing Prfx,
         TOF: Time of flight                                                                                 Northing and Altitude.

8.3.1.2 Confirming Denied Missions
                                                                                                 : Altitude/Elevation data can only be entered in meters with 2 decimal places.
When the mission is denied, the MTO message will flash the red exclamation
( ) point. The operator would then need to accept the denied mission.
                                                                                                4.     Tap           . This will access the Date/Time Entry screen (Figure 4-9).

                                                                                                5.     Tap    on the day, hour, minute, or year to change the data.
                                                                                                6.     Tap     and select another month if needed.




                                                                                                      : When entering data of any kind, verify the values are correct before tapping
                                                                                           any Ok, Send, Save or any other process button.

                                                                                                7.     When complete, tap             twice.

DRAFT                                    209                            March 16, 2009     DRAFT                                       62                             March 16, 2009
Chapter 4 – Main Screen                                                PFED User Manual     Chapter 8 – Call For Fire                                              PFED User Manual

    8.   On the Main PFED screen you should now see your current location
         displayed in the Location button at the top.
                                                                                                   : The summary tab for an MTO on the Fire Mission Monitor is for displaying partial
                                                                                            information about a message to observer received for a fire mission. For full information
4.4.3    Waypoint/Route Configuration and Navigation                                        contained in a message to observer messge, select the Log tab (section 8.3.1.12) within
                                                                                            the Fire Mission Monitor and open the corresponding MTO.
A waypoint is a fixed location with a specified longitude and latitude, or UTM
coordinates, that is maintained by a radio navigation system receiver such as a             When the device is configured as an FO or a FiST unit, PFED will allow the
GPS set. A waypoint is also a destination, a location of a course change along a            receipt of an MTO from their primary unit for a mission in their mission buffers,
journey, or a point of reference useful for navigation. PFED allows the operator            and update the status of the fire mission as well as add the MTO to the mission
to enter one or more waypoints to navigate individually, or to configure a route            log.
containing multiple waypoints.
                                                                                            When the device is configured as a FiST unit, PFED will forward MTO
                                                                                            messages received and initiated by a subordinate unit as a “carbon copy” to the
    1.   To configure and select a Waypoint/Route, tap            . This will display the
         Navigation screen (Figure 4-15). At the bottom of this screen there are            units defined within the devices Unit List based on that subordinate units routing
         several buttons (Table 2) for creating, selecting, and recording                   configurations.
         waypoints/routes.
                                                                                            If the subordinate units routing configuration is set to review, PFED will alert
                                               -- record your movement as a route           the operator and save the MTO to the Inbox. The operator may edit this MTO
                                                                                            from the Inbox prior to routing the message to the subordinate unit.
                                                -- jump to previous waypoint

                                                -- navigate a waypoint/route

                                                -- jump to next waypoint                                : The alert will indicate that editing this MTO message can cause the database
                                                                                            to be Out Of Sync with their primary unit.
                                             -- create waypoint using current
                                           location                                         If the subordinate units routing configuration is NOT set to review, PFED will
                                                                                            update the mission within the system and route the MTO to the subordinate unit
                                                -- create/edit/delete waypoints             with no alert to the operator.
                                                -- create/edit/delete routes                If an MTO is received that is not addressed to another known unit, PFED will
                                                                                            display an alert indicating this and discard the message.
                                                -- access thresholds screen
    Figure 4-15 Navigation Screen              Table 2 Navigation Screen Buttons            When an MTO is received from AFATDS with a recalcualted target position,
                                                                                            PFED will change the target’s position to match this recalculated location as
4.4.3.1 Use Current Location as Waypoint                                                    well as displaying it in the MTO and Log tab in the Fire Mission Monitor.
    2.   To store your current location as a waypoint, tap    . This will access the
         Mark Location screen (Figure 4-16).
    3.   If needed, place a check mark in the Required field.
                                                                                                        : When a Copperhead MTO message is received, the Angle T and TOF will
    4.   Tap and select Friendly, Hostile, Neutral, or Unknown in the drop
                                                                                            display as N/G in the MTO.
         down.
                                                                                                 1.   If not already selected, tap the target number in the list that has an
    5.   In the Name field enter a label for this waypoint, then tap           .
                                                                                                      associated MTO (status of MTO received).

DRAFT                                     63                              March 16, 2009    DRAFT                                      208                             March 16, 2009
Chapter 8 – Call For Fire                                               PFED User Manual    Chapter 4 – Main Screen                                                      PFED User Manual

icons to the left of each target number give a quick glance indication of the
transmission or processing status, as shown in the table below.

     Icon                       Transmission or Processing Status

               The message is queued (waiting) for transmission.
               This symbol is used when a third immediate mission is waiting for an
               empty system buffer for processing.
               The message is being sent or has been sent and PFED is waiting for an
               acknowledgement. The number (1, 2, 3) depicts the number of send
   (yellow)    attempts made.

               The message was received, or you are receiving mission updates (such
    (green)    as Shot or Splash messages).
               Transmission was attempted 3 times (the maximum number of retries)
     (red)     and no acknowledgement was received.
                                                                                                                           Figure 4-16 Mark Location Screen
               Transmission failed immediately. This usually indicates that there is a
     (red)     problem with communications equipment or setup.
                                                                                            4.4.3.2 Create/Edit Waypoints
               PFED is waiting for the operator to perform an action.
                                                                                                 6.    To create and store several new waypoints tap               to access the Waypoints
               Attention is needed. For example, the mission was denied.                               screen (Figure 4-17).
     (red)
               PFED has received a Ready notification from AFATDS for an At My                   7.    Tap             to access the New Waypoint screen (Figure 4-18). Enter a new
    (blue)     Command mission.
               PFED has received a CANTPRO message and the recipient is unable to                      location by tapping                             then tap the appropriate option
               process. NOTE: A fire mission with this status cannot be acted upon                     (refer to section 8.2.1.1 for more information) for the location entry.
  (red yield) from the fire mission monitor. You must open the Transmit Queue and
               abort the message.
           Table 5 Fire Mission Transmission/Processing Status Indicators                          : You may also use your current location for this new waypoint by tapping

As a fire mission is processed, the monitor will automatically update with                                 instead of entering a location.
changes. To view details about the fire mission, simply highlight it by tapping                  8.    When the location has been set, place a check mark in the Required field if
on the target number in the list. Details of the fire mission are shown below.                         needed.
                                                                                                 9.    Tap and select either Friendly, Hostile, Neutral or Unknown in the drop
8.3.1.1 Message to Observer (MTO)                                                                      down.
                                                                                                 10. Then enter a label for this waypoint in the Name field. When complete tap
When the firing unit receives a CFF, the firing unit returns a MTO message to
                                                                                                                  . The new waypoint will be added to the list on the Waypoints
the PFED device. Reviewing this MTO provides the operator with valuable                                screen.
information about the mission to be fired. When an MTO is received for a
target, the status description of that target will change to MTO received (Figure
8-25).                                                                                             : You may also modify and delete existing waypoints by selecting one, or selecting

                                                                                            all with the           , and tapping             ,        . To unselect all waypoints, tap

                                                                                                      . You may also send the Imagery information by tapping                .


DRAFT                                     207                              March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                                64                             March 16, 2009
Chapter 4 – Main Screen                                                 PFED User Manual      Chapter 8 – Call For Fire                                               PFED User Manual

    11. To exit the Waypoints screen tap               .                                      8.3        FIRE MISSION MONITOR

                                                                                              Once a CFF request is sent, the Fire Mission Monitor is automatically displayed.
                                                                                              This tabbed screen (Figure 8-24) allows you to; monitor the transmission and
                                                                                              processing status of your active fire missions, view received MTO messages,
                                                                                              perform subsequent corrections, send EOM messages, send pre-planned
                                                                                              missions, make an inactive mission active, delete inactive missions, and view a
                                                                                              log of message processing. If your device has been configured as a FiST, the
                                                                                              operator will also see the subordinate targets.


                                                                                                     : When a fire mission is processed and the Fire Mission Monitor is not displayed, the



                                                                                              system will show an alert (                                 ) indicating that a
                                                                                              message has been processed through the monitor. To view and/or remove these alerts,
                                                                                              refer to section 6.4.10 for more information.
     Figure 4-17 Waypoints Screen                  Figure 4-18 New Waypoint Screen
                                                                                                    1.    To access the Fire Mission Monitor from the Main PFED screen, tap the
4.4.3.3 Create/Edit Routes                                                                                icon at the bottom.

    12. To create and store new routes tap           to access the Route List screen                2.    To view the list of active targets, tap the         tab if needed.
        (Figure 4-19).

    13. Now tap          to access the Edit Route screen (Figure 4-20). This
        screen is where you will enter all of the waypoints that make up a route.
    14. In the field block at the very top is the label for this route. PFED will fill this
        field for you with a label that contains what it believes is the next
        consecutive number (i.e., Rte 1, then Rte 2, etc.). If you wish to save this
        route with a different name, tap in this field block and replace the route
        name.
    15. Next you may create new waypoints, or select existing waypoints to build
         the route. To select an existing waypoint tap                      . This will
         display the Select Waypoint screen (Figure 4-21).
    16. Tap on the waypoint you wish to include in this route. The system will return
        to the Edit Route screen and list the selected waypoint.
    17. Repeat steps 15 and 16 to add as many existing waypoints as you need.

    18. To create a new waypoint tap                       . This will display the Location
        screen.                                                                                                  Figure 8-24 Fire Mission Monitor - Active Tab Screen


    19. Enter a location by tapping                             then tap the
                                                                                              8.3.1       Monitoring Active Targets
        appropriate option (refer to section 8.2.1.1 for more information) for the
        location entry.                                                                       To the right of each target number in the list is a text description of the mission’s
                                                                                              current transmission status or processing status according to AFATDS. The
DRAFT                                      65                               March 16, 2009    DRAFT                                         206                           March 16, 2009
Chapter 8 – Call For Fire                                              PFED User Manual     Chapter 4 – Main Screen                                                 PFED User Manual



                                                                                                  : You may also use your current location for this new waypoint by tapping

                                                                                                         instead of entering a location.

                                                                                                 20. When the location has been set, place a check mark in the Required field if
                                                                                                     needed.
                                                                                                 21. Tap and select either Friendly, Hostile, Neutral or Unknown in the drop
                                                                                                     down.
                               Figure 8-22 Units Selection                                       22. Then enter a label for this waypoint in the Name field. When complete tap
          a.    Tap to the left of each unit to place a check mark for the units you wish                         . The new waypoint will be added to the route on the Edit Route
                to send to.                                                                             screen. This new waypoint will also be added to the Waypoints screen
                                                                                                        identifying in what route it was created.
          b.    When ready, tap             . Any subordinate messages that are not sent         23. Repeat steps 18 through 22 to create any number of new waypoints for this
                to this local device will be processed in the Active folder, then                    route.
                immediately placed in the Inactive folder of this unit’s Fire Mission            24. When navigating a route, PFED allows the operator to pick whether the
                Monitor.                                                                             route will be run from first to last (forward order) or last to first (reverse
                                                                                                     order). If you wish to change the order of the waypoints within a route,
8.2.3     Sending CFF Template Fire Mission
                                                                                                        select a waypoint and move it up or down in the list by tapping      or   .
If you have already configured the devices hotkey capability, you have the                       25. To exit the Edit Route screen tap             .
ability to quickly send a pre-filled fire mission literally at the tap of a button.
The hotkeys configured on the device are shown below (Figure 8-23).
                                                                                                  : You may also edit and delete single waypoints within a route on the Edit Route
                                                                                            screen by selecting the waypoint then tapping               or               . On the
          Button 2                                                                          Route List screen, you may modify and delete a route by selecting the route and tapping
                                                                    Button 3
                                                                                                    ,          .

                                                                                                 26. Then exit the Route List screen by tapping              .
           Button 1                                                    Button 4

                      Figure 8-23 PFED Handheld Hotkey Buttons

     1.   To display a pre-filled template for transmission, press the appropriate
          hotkey you have previously configured (refer to section 4.4.11 Fire Support
          Setup – CFF Templates). This will display the CFF screen containing the
          template information.


     : Note that button 4 is reserved for the Check Firing functionality and may not be
changed.

     2.   Tap           on the CFF screen to transmit the displayed mission.




DRAFT                                      205                             March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                          66                           March 16, 2009
Chapter 4 – Main Screen                                              PFED User Manual       Chapter 8 – Call For Fire                                            PFED User Manual

                                                                                                     c.   If you have selected Time On Target, tap          to access the

                                                                                                          Date/Time Entry screen. Using , enter the desired date and time on
                                                                                                          target time. This field is initially set to the current system time. When
                                                                                                          finished, tap         .
                                                                                                26. Tap in the Control Method field to select this option if needed for the
                                                                                                    Secondary control method.
                                                                                                27. Finally, tap in the Sheaf/Distribution field to select the sheaf/distribution
                                                                                                    option. Depending on the shell type selected for the FFE1 field only, the
                                                                                                    sheaf/distribution pull-down list will change. If no shell type, or Copperhead
                                                                                                    type, is selected this field is disabled.


                                                                                                  : When transmitting a Copperhead mission, the Method of Engagement will default
                                                                                            to High Angle and cannot be changed.

     Figure 4-19 Route List Screen                 Figure 4-20 Edit Route Screen


                                                                                                 : When transmitting a non-Priority Copperhead mission, PFED will transmit this
                                                                                            message as an FFE mission.

                                                                                                        Control Method               Distributin                Sheaf
                                                                                                       Cannot Observe         1 Gun Illum                   Converged
                                                                                                       Coordinated Illum      2 Gun Illum                   Open
                                                                                                       Continuous Illum       2 Gun Illum, Lateral          Parallel
                                                                                                                              Spread
                                                                                                       Continuous Fire        2 Gun Illum, Range
                                                                                                                              Spread
                                                                                                                              4 Gun Illum, Lateral &
                                                                                                                              Range Spread


                                                                                                28. When ready to transmit the message tap              .
                                                                                                29. If the unit has been configured as a FiST device and this message is being
                          Figure 4-21 Select Waypoint Screen                                        transmitted as a Non-Local message, the system will display a prompt
                                                                                                    requesting the selection of all units it is to be transmitted to (Figure 8-22).
4.4.3.4 Record A Route
    1.   To autotmatically record your movement as a route, tap       . This will display
         the Define Route screen (Figure 4-22).
    2.   In the Name field, PFED will fill this field for you with a label that contains
         what it believes is the next consecutive number (i.e., Rte 1, then Rte 2, etc.).
         If you wish to save this recorded route with a different name, tap in this field
         and enter a new name.
    3.   To have each waypoint of this route recorded by a specific number of
         meters, enter a numeric value in the available box for the number of meters

DRAFT                                     67                             March 16, 2009     DRAFT                                     204                            March 16, 2009
Chapter 8 – Call For Fire                                          PFED User Manual       Chapter 4 – Main Screen                                                   PFED User Manual

                                                                                                   (i.e., 500, 100, etc.). Or, enter a numeric value in the available box for a
                                                                                                   specific number of seconds or minutes.

                                                                                              4.   When ready, exit the Define Route screen by tapping         . The system
                                                                                                   will then begin recording your movement as you had specified.
                                                                                              5.   During the recording of a route you may either Stop or Pause the process
                                                                                                   (Figure 4-23).

                                                                                                   a.   To Stop tap      then tap                         to end the recording.

                                                                                                   b.   To Pause tap        then tap                          . To Resume recording
                                                                                                        of a Paused process, tap        .




                            Figure 8-20 Comments Screen

    24. Tap in the blank Comments field and use the available keypad to enter any
         statement you wish. When complete tap             . Or, tap            to exit
         the screen without saving.

Method of Fire and Control

The Method of Fire and Control group in the CFF – Extended screen is used to
describe the manner of attacking the target and control the delivery of fire. Sub-
elements include a primary and secondary method of control and a sheaf or
distribution type based on the FFE1 selection (Figure 8-21).

                                                                                              Figure 4-22 Define Route Screen                   Figure 4-23 Stop/Pause Prompt
                                                                  Secondary Control
     Primary Control
                                                                                          4.4.3.5 Navigate To Waypoints/Routes

                                                                   Sheaf/Distribution         1.   To navigate to a waypoint, tap           to access the Click to Navigate screen
                       Figure 8-21 Method of Fire and Control                                      (Figure 4-24).
                                                                                                   a.   To navigate to a waypoint, tap on one of the listed points shown in the
    25. Tap to the right of the When Ready option shown to change this option if                        Waypoints column on the left. The system will immediately return you
        needed for the Primary control method. This field is defaulted to When                          to the Nav to Waypoint # screen (Figure 4-25). This screen will then
        Ready.                                                                                          display the selected waypoint location, azimuth and range.
         a.   If the At My Command option is selected, the fire command will be
                                                                                                   b.   During navigation of a waypoint you may either Stop or Pause the
              sent via the Fire Mission Monitor (refer to section 8.3 Fire Mission
                                                                                                        process (Figure 4-26).
              Monitor) at the desired time.
         b.   The Time On Target option is only available for FFE missions. If the                      i)    To Stop tap      then tap                         to end the navigation.
              Time On Target option is selected here,        will be enabled.
                                                                                                        ii)   To Pause tap      then tap                          . To Resume
                                                                                                              navigation of a Paused process, tap         .
DRAFT                                    203                           March 16, 2009     DRAFT                                        68                              March 16, 2009
Chapter 4 – Main Screen                                               PFED User Manual      Chapter 8 – Call For Fire                                                 PFED User Manual

                                                                                                  WDG          500                                               WDG            10
                                                                                                  (Smoke)      750                                               (Smoke)        15
                                                                                                               1000       Left Crosswind        Scattered
                                                                                                               1500
                                                                                                                          Right
                                                                                                                          Crosswind
                                                                                                 20. Tap to the right of the FFE1 or FFE2 fields for the Fuze type selection, if
                                                                                                     applicable.


                                                                                                    : When the FFE1 shell option of Excalibur is chosen with a Quick Fuze (Q), this
                                                                                            selection is transmitted as Point Detonating. And when the device is configured as an FO
                                                                                            unit, a Fuze selection is not required.




                                                                                                  : PFED will require the operator to select projectile/fuze information when
                                                                                            transmitting FPF missions.

  Figure 4-24 Click to Navigate Screen          Figure 4-25 Nav to Waypoint # Screen


                                                                                                 : When specifying a Copperhead mission, the FFE2 field will be disabled. Entry of a
                                                                                            secondary projectile/fuze could cause issues with FOS, AFATDS, etc.


                                                                                            Volleys/Comments

                                                                                                 21. At the right of              , tap      to increase/decrease the number of
                                                                                                     volleys.

                                                                                                 22. You may also tap                     to display the Volleys screen that allows you
                                                                                                      to enter the value. When complete, tap                .


                                                                                                  : When entering Volley data, you must have at least one Munitions (FFE Shell)
                                                                                            value selected.

                                                                                                 23. You may also enter any additional comments, and view any Pedigree
                           Figure 4-26 Stop/Pause Prompt
                                                                                                      information, by tapping                   (Figure 8-20). Enter the comment text
    2.   To navigate to a route, tap      to access the Click to Navigate screen                      in the space provided, and when complete tap                .
         (Figure 4-27).
         a.   To navigate to a route, tap on one of the listed routes shown in the
              Routes column on the right.
         b.   To navigate this route in a first to last waypoint direction tap
                                  .



DRAFT                                     69                               March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                         202                            March 16, 2009
Chapter 8 – Call For Fire                                              PFED User Manual     Chapter 4 – Main Screen                                                 PFED User Manual

                                                                                                     c.   To navigate this route in a last to first waypoint direction tap
                                                                                                                                .
                                                                                                     d.   The system will immediately return you to the Nav to Waypoint # screen
                                                                                                          (Figure 4-28). Notice the waypoints that make up this route are listed in
                                                                                                          the grey panel on the right hand side and the first waypoint is
                                                                                                          highlighted. This is indicating the waypoint it is currently navigating to.
                                                                                                     e.   During navigation of a route you may do one of four things; Jump to
                                                                                                          Next Waypoint, Jump to Previous Waypoint, Stop or Pause this process
                                                                                                          (Figure 4-29).

                                                                                                          i)     To Jump to Next Waypoint tap       . Notice that the highlighted
                                                                                                                 waypoint in the grey panel has skipped to the next waypoint.

                                                                                                          ii)    To Jump to Previous Waypoint tap      . Notice that the highlighted
                                                                                                                 waypoint in the grey panel has skipped back to the previous
                                                                                                                 waypoint.
                            Figure 8-19 Smoke Mission Screen
                                                                                                          iii)   To Stop tap        then tap                     to end the navigation.
         b.     Use the available keypad to enter the MTL (Maneuver Target Line)
                value. Then, tap to the right of this field to select the appropriate
                                                                                                          iv)    To Pause tap        then tap                     . To Resume
                measurement.
                                                                                                                 navigation of a Paused process, tap         .
         c.     Tap to the right of the Sheaf Length field and select the appropriate
                measurement.
         d.     Tap to the right of the Wind Direction field and select a direction               : When navigating through a route, the system will alert the operator each time it
                that is relative to the MTL.
         e.     Tap to the right of the Cloud Coverage field and select a cloud
                density option.                                                             reaches a waypoint (                                        ).

         f.     Tap    to the right of the Duration field and select a time period value.
         g.     To the right of the Duration field, select whether the smoke mission is
                to block Vis(ual) or Infrared (IR) sightings.

         h.     When complete, tap             .

         Sheaf Length         Wind Direction           Cloud             Duration
                                                     Coverage
      WP           100        Calm Winds,          Broken          WP           5
      (Smoke)      200        No Effect                            (Smoke)      10
                   300                                                          15
                   400
                   600
      HC           200        Head                 Clear           HC           4
      (Smoke)      400                                             (Smoke)      6
                   600                                                          8
                   800
                   1000
                                                                                              Figure 4-27 Click to Navigate Screen              Figure 4-28 Nav to Waypoint # Screen
      FLT          250        Tail                 Overcast        FLT          5

DRAFT                                       201                            March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                        70                             March 16, 2009
Chapter 4 – Main Screen                                               PFED User Manual      Chapter 8 – Call For Fire                                                PFED User Manual



                                                                                                   : When the FFE1 field has been populated, the Distribution/Sheaf field will be
                                                                                            activated.




                                                                                                       : .When Copperhead is selected in the FFE1 field as the projectile, the angle will
                                                                                            default to High and cannot be changed.




                                                                                                    : When sending an Immediate Suppress/Smoke mission, it is recommended that
                                                                                            this field be left blank. AFATDS will assign this information based on the commander’s
                                                                                            criteria.



                           Figure 4-29 Stop/Pause Prompt
                                                                                                  : When conducting a quick smoke mission through FOS, only select HC (Smoke).
    3.   Once you have started a navigation process and wish to return to the PFED
         Main screen, tap       at the top right corner. Notice that the Main screen will
         indicate that it is navigating by displaying a moving arrow (Figure 4-30).
         When navigation is complete, the moving arrow will disappear (Figure 4-31).
                                                                                                           : If a FiST device is configured in Review mode and this device receives a
                                                                                            CFF with WP (Smoke) and a Free Text message with Quick Smoke data, the Quick Smoke
                                                                                            data will be blank when editing this CFF message. When this edited message is routed, it
                                                                                            will result in sending “another” CFF and Quick Smoke Free Text to AFATDS. However, the
                                                                                            original Quick Smoke Free Text message from the FO will still be waiting for routing. This
                                                                                            is only an issue if the FiST modifies the Quick Smoke data. AFATDS will receive two (2)
                                                                                            different Quick Smoke messages when the FiST taps Rte.



                                                                                                      a.   Tap           to access the Smoke Mission screen (Figure 8-19).




     Figure 4-30 Active Navigation                 Figure 4-31 Inactive Navigation



     : When a waypoint or route has comlpeted, a finished alert will display



(                                     ,                                        ).

DRAFT                                     71                              March 16, 2009    DRAFT                                       200                              March 16, 2009
Chapter 8 – Call For Fire                                                  PFED User Manual        Chapter 4 – Main Screen                                            PFED User Manual

          d.    Select the Destruction option to indicate that the target is to be                 4.4.3.6 Define Thresholds
                destroyed.
          e.    Select the Adj. FPF (Adjust Final Protective Fire) option to indicate              On the Navigation screen, the system has the ability to display the location of
                an entire battery or mortar platoon firing. If this option is chosen, the          any hostiles within the route or waypoints the operator has selected to navigate.
                Priority Target option is also checked and disabled from being                     These hostiles will be shown on the moving compass that appears on this screen.
                unchecked.                                                                         To view these hostiles, the operator has the ability to define the thresholds as to
     17. Tap to the right of the AF (Adjustment of Fire) field to select a projectile              when to indicate where a hostile is located and when an alert should appear.
         or shell type.
                                                                                                       1.   To access the Define Thresholds screen, tap the      icon (Figure 4-24).



             : Currently fire support computers do not process coordinated Illumination
missions properly. This type of mission must be transmitted as two (2) CFF missions, one
specifying the Illumination and a second specifying the HE.




     : For Continuous Illumination missions, you must select the Illum option as the
FFE1 Shell, and specify a Distribution (i.e., 1-Gun Illum, 2-Gun Illum, etc.).

     18. Tap      to the right of the AF field for the Fuze type selection.


      : The AF Shell/Fuze data will be sent “only” when transmitting to an Army VMF
configured unit. If the receiving unit is configured under another format, this data will not be
transmitted.

     19. Tap to the right of the FFE1 and FFE2 (Fire For Effect) fields to select a
                                                                                                                             Figure 4-32 Mark Location Screen
         projectile or shell type. When FFE1 is set to HE/WP, the FFE2 field is
         unavailable.                                                                                  2.   Enter the appropriate values in the fields for Do not display hostiles
                                                                                                            when… and Display alert when hostiles are…
                 AF                            FFE1                       FFE2
                                                                                                       3.   Place check mark if you wish to Adjust alert threshold based on speed.
         HE                          HE                           HE
         WP                          HE/WP                        WP                                   4.   Lastly, tap and select a value to Use GPS position for navigation when
         WP (Smoke)                  WP                           Illum                                     accuracy is…
         HC (Smoke)                  WP (Smoke)                   DPICM                                5.   When complete, tap           .
         FLT WDG (Smoke)             HC (Smoke)
         Illum                       FLT WDG (Smoke)                                               4.4.4    Edit Menu Overview
         DPICM                       Illum
                                     DPICM                                                         The PFED application allows for limited user customization and setup. These
                                     Copperhead                                                    options are available through the         menu accessible from the Main PFED
                                     Excalibur
                                                                                                   screen. Depending on the particular handheld hardware, the            menu may
                                                                                                   appear at the top or bottom left of the main screen. The         menu allows you to
        : If the option WP Smoke, HC Smoke or FLT WDG Smoke is selected in the FFE1
field, you will be required to enter the information pertinent to a quick smoke mission.
                                                                                                   set and customize:


DRAFT                                        199                               March 16, 2009      DRAFT                                     72                           March 16, 2009
Chapter 4 – Main Screen                                          PFED User Manual     Chapter 8 – Call For Fire                                            PFED User Manual

         Address/Unit List: allows you to maintain a list of organizational unit                     Moving                           Overhead Cover
         recipients for message transmission                                                         Observing
         Own Unit Info: Here you may set your Call Sign, Unit Name, Unit                             Recon
         Reference Number (URN), ID, Service, Role, Echelon, System Type,                            Refueling
         and Laser Information                                                                       Securing
         Devices: allows you to configure peripheral devices that may be                             Withdrawing
         connected to your system (i.e., sensors or radios), and network
         configurations                                                               8.2.2    CFF - Extended (Screen 2)
         Map Datum Info: Allows the selection of the Ellipsoid, Datum and
                                                                                      The second CFF - Extended screen is used to enter additional information for
         Area
                                                                                      the CFF, including the method of engagement and method of fire and control.
         Fire Support: Sub-menu allows you to maintain Target Numbering,
         Planned Target Lists, Known Points, CFF Templates and
         FSCMs/Geometries information                                                     15. Tap       to move to the second CFF screen (Figure 8-4). If you wish to
         Prefs (Preferences): Sub-menu allows you to enable/disable the Auto                   return to the first CFF screen tap     .
         Position Reporting feature. Default units of measure and formats may
         be maintained to specify Position, Distance, Direction,                      Method of Engagement
         Altitude/Elevation and Speed. You may also set the hotkeys to perform
         a shortcut CFF transmission and configure the messaging preferences          The method of engagement group of controls in the CFF – Extended screen is
         Databases: Any data saved by PFED, such as your Inbox/Outbox,                used to describe the attack of the target. Sub-elements include trajectory (i.e.,
         report’s and fire missions, are saved into local databases. The              High Angle), type of engagement (i.e., Danger Close, High Angle, etc.),
         Databases option lets you purge any or all of these databases                ammunition and volleys.
         Passwords: Sub-menu allows you to change your FiST password
         About: Displays the PM BC logo and release date of the currently
         installed PFED application                                                        : When the operator selects the Final Protective Fire (FPF) option during an Adjust
                                                                                      FFE mission, PFED will automatically check the Priority Target option.
4.4.5    Address/Unit List Setup
The Address/Unit List settings determine how the handheld communicates with
other units on the tactical communications network. For more detail, refer to               : PFED does not automatically transition to AMC/DNL FFE when the location falls
section 5.1.2 Address/Unit List Setup.                                                below 50 meters. The observer must select FFE for the Adjust FPF to transition to the DNL
                                                                                      assign FPF phase. Selection of FFE will generate an EOM on the adjust portion and a new
                                                                                      assign Do Not Load (DNL)/FFE FPF CFF.
4.4.6    Own Unit Information (Own Unit Info) Setup
                                                                                          16. At the top of this screen, tap the checkboxes to further describe the
When the system type is configured to a generic R5, that device will only                     trajectory and type of engagement.
receive R5 formatted messages.                                                                 a.   Select the Danger Close option to alert the Fire Direction Center (FDC)
                                                                                                    that the predicted impact of the round is within the minimum safe
The device is configured as a Role of FO as the default when PFED is first                          distance, according to standard operating procedures, of friendly
                                                                                                    troops. This option is automatically selected if your position is within
installed. However, it may be changed to a FiST mode at any point. When the
                                                                                                    600 meters of the target location (refer to section 8.2.1 Danger Close
device is placed in FiST mode, the system will prompt the operator for a                            Conditions).
password. This password may only be changed when a valid password has been
entered.                                                                                       b.   Select the High Angle option to specify high angle fire for the
                                                                                                    trajectory.

When processing fire mission related messages in FiST mode, the system will                    c.   Select the Priority option. Select Priority Target to indicate a mission
alert the user if changes are made to the fire mission related databases for local                  reaction time of 30 to 60 seconds (plus time of flight).
DRAFT                                   73                           March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                     198                            March 16, 2009
Chapter 8 – Call For Fire                                                  PFED User Manual       Chapter 4 – Main Screen                                              PFED User Manual

                                                                                                  missions (missions initiated by the operator). While operating in FiST mode, the
                                                                                                  operator may override the manual review setting for a unit on a per mission
                                                                                                  basis at the initial CFF stage of the mission. All subsequent mission messages
                                                                                                  for that fire mission will then be automatically routed.

                                                                                                      1.   Locate and tap       . A menu similar to the following (Figure 4-33) will
                                                                                                           display.


                                                                                                         : The appearance of the Edit menu may differ from handheld to handheld, but the
                                                                                                  functionality will remain the same.

                                                                                                      2.   Tap the Own Unit Info option. The Unit screen will display (Figure 4-34).




      Figure 8-17 Target Types Screen              Figure 8-18 Target Types List Screen


     12. Select the type of target by tapping the appropriate picture graphic. This will
         display a secondary screen (Figure 8-18) for a more detailed selection. Tap
         the detailed information needed to describe the target. This will either
         display a third screen of target subtypes, if applicable, or return you to the
         previous screen with the type displayed.

                                                                                                                          Edit Menu
     : To close the list to select a different platform icon, tap anywhere outside of the list.




      : For Illumination missions, the standard selection for Target Type/Subtype is
Terrain/Unknown.
                                                                                                    Figure 4-33 PFED Edit Menu Screen                    Figure 4-34 Unit Screen

Activity
     13. To the right of the Activity field, tap      to select the appropriate action.

Degree of Protection/Posture
     14. To the right of the Protection field, tap       to identify the appropriate
         protection.

                            Activity                       Protection
               Attacking                           In The Open
               Defending                           Prone
               Delaying                            Prand
               Engaging                            Prug
               Fortifying                          Dug In

DRAFT                                        197                               March 16, 2009     DRAFT                                     74                             March 16, 2009
Chapter 4 – Main Screen                                              PFED User Manual     Chapter 8 – Call For Fire                                           PFED User Manual




                                                                                                                  Figure 8-16 Target Size/Shape Screen
                          Figure 4-35 Laser Information Screen
                                                                                              7.   To enter the Strength value, use the keypad.
    3.     Because PFED’s underlying message formats and communications
           protocols require certain information from an observer, there are several          8.   Select a Shape to establish the size information in more detail. For
           required fields on the Unit screen. These are Call Sign, ID, Unit Name and              Rect(angle) and Irreg(ular), enter values for the Length, Width and
           URN.                                                                                    Attitude. For Line, enter a Length and Attitude. For Circ(le), enter a
                                                                                                   Radius value.

      : Naming conventions for the Call Sign, ID, Unit Name, Laser Code, Role and
Echelon fields should be identified in the unit Tactical Standard Operating Procedures         : The Rectangle and Irregular field’s normal setup would be Length = Meters,
(TACSOP). The URN field information can be obtained from the unit TACSOP or AFATDS.       Width = Meters and Attitude = Mils Grid.

    4.     When each text field is tapped to enter/change information, a keypad will          9.   Do not forget to tap for each of these fields to select the measurement
           display at the bottom of the screen (Figure 3-1). Enter or change                       values (i.e., Meters, Kilometers, Feet, etc).
           information in these fields by tapping the desired keys on the pop-up
           keypad. When one field is complete, tap on the next field.                         10. When complete, tap             .
    5.     The Service, Role and Echelon fields are all drop-down selection lists and     Type (Required)
           filtered based on the service selected. Tap to the right of each field name
           and tap the appropriate selection from the displayed list.                         11. The system default for the Target Type is set to Unknown Personnel,

                Service                   Role                    Echelon                          however this may be changed. If needed, tap       to select a different
         Air Force             Administrative             Air Army                                 Target Type. This will display the Target Type screen (Figure 8-17).
         Army                  Aerial Observer            Air Command
         Coast Guard           Airbourne Commando         Air Control Party
         Navy                  Airbourne Infantry         Air Corps
         Marines               Air Cavalry                Air Detachment
         Joint                 Air Defense Artillery      Air Division
         Composite             Airmobile Infantry         Air Element
         Unknown               Air-to-Air Missile         Air Flight
                               Air-to-Surface Missile     Air Group
                               Amphibious Assault         Air Regiment
DRAFT                                     75                             March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                      196                         March 16, 2009
Chapter 8 – Call For Fire                                            PFED User Manual     Chapter 4 – Main Screen                                        PFED User Manual

                                                                                                                    Amphibious Engineers     Air Squadron
                                                                                                                    Amphibious Tank          Air Wing
                                                                                                                    Antiair Warfare          Army Group
                                                                                                                    Antiarmor Missile        Battalion
                                                                                                                    Antisubmarine Warfare    Battery
                                                                                                                    Armor                    Border District HQ
                                                                                                                    Armored Cavalry          Brigade
                                                                                                                    Army Aviation            Combat Command
                                                                                                                    Artillery Unit           Command
                                                                                                                    Assault Engineers        Company
                                                                                                                    Assault Landing          Corps
                                                                                                                    Biological Ordnance      Detachment
                                                                                                                    Capable
                                                                                                                    Bomber                   Division
                                                                                                                    Cavalry                  Divisional Artillery
         Figure 8-14 Imagery Interface Error          Figure 8-15 Imagery Interface                                                          Group
                       Prompt                             Confirmation Prompt                                       Chemical                 Field Army
                                                                                                                    Combat Engineers         Fleet
Target Description                                                                                                  Combat Observation       Front
                                                                                                                    Team
                                                                                                                    Combat Service Support   Group
The target description allows entry of target information in the Size, Target
Type, Activity and Protection. The Target Number for the target you are                                             Combat Type Unknown      Group of Forces
describing is located to the right of the Size field. When calling for fire on a                                    Combined Arms            Group of Fronts
new target, this number is automatically assigned by the system from your                                           Commando                 Komendatura
allocated target block previously entered in the Auto Target Numbering screen                                       Composite Warfare        Major Fleet
                                                                                                                    Command
accessible from the Main PFED screen (Edit/Fire Support/Target
                                                                                                                    Dismounted Cavalry       National Defense
Numbering). However, the target number will be blanked out for immediate                                                                     Headquarters
missions until a message to observer is received.                                                                   Electronic Counter       Naval Detachment
                                                                                                                    Measures
Size                                                                                                                Electronic Support       Naval Division
                                                                                                                    Measures
The number displayed in the gray box to the right of the # Size button is the                                       Engineer                 Naval Force
target’s strength, or number of targets being observed. You can also enter                                          EW Coordinator           Naval Group
information describing the target’s general shape, physical dimensions and                                          Field Artillery          Naval Section
orientation (attitude).                                                                                             Fighter                  Naval Squadron
                                                                                                                    Fighter Bomber           Naval Task Element
                                                                                                                    Fire Direction Center    Naval Task Force
    6.     To enter the Size, you can either tap    to increase/decrease the value, or
                                                                                                                    Firing Platform          Naval Task Group
           tap            to display the Size screen (Figure 8-16) that allows you to                               Fire Support Officer     Naval Task Unit
           enter a description of the target shape.                                                                 Fire Support Team        Numbered Fleet
                                                                                                                    Fire Support Element     Other
                                                                                                                    Forward Observer         Otryad
                                                                                                                    Frog SSM Unit            Patrol
DRAFT                                      195                           March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                76                             March 16, 2009
Chapter 4 – Main Screen                                       PFED User Manual     Chapter 8 – Call For Fire                                                   PFED User Manual

                          Gun Howitzer             Platoon
                          Helicopter               Regiment
                          Infantry                 Regimental Artillery
                                                   Group                                       : Significant increases in Leica 21B/Viper II average azimuth errors may occur
                          Infantry on Foot         Section                         when the PFED and PFED/PLGR devices were relocated without being recalibrated
                                                                                   (standard cable length). The devices must be recalibrated when relocated.
                          Intelligence             Squad
                          Maintenance              Squadron
                          Marine Expeditionary     Task Element                    8.2.1.1.5 Imagery Data Method
                          Brigade
                          Marine Expeditionary     Task Force
                          Force
                                                                                             a.   Tap                  to access the Imagery Data screen (Figure 8-11).
                          Marine Expeditionary     Task Group
                          Unit
                                                                                             b.   To accept the location tap              or                to not accept.
                          Mechanized Infantry      Task Unit
                          Medical                  Theater Army
                          Military School or       Troop                           8.2.1.1.6 Refine Imagery Data
                          Academy
                                                                                             a.   Once a location has been set using one of the above methods, tap
                          Mining                   Zastrova
                          Mortar                   Unknown                                        Location (                           ) to refine it.
                          Motorized Rifle Troops
                          Mountain Infantry
                          Navy Infantry/Marines                                              b.   Tap                  to send the current location to the interface
                          Nuclear Ordnance                                                        application (i.e., PFI viewer). If the current location is not sent to the
                          Capable Unit                                                            interface application correctly, an error prompt will appear (Figure
                                                                                                  8-14). If the data is correctly sent a Confirmation screen will briefly
                          Other
                                                                                                  appear (Figure 8-15). If this screen does not disappear after a few
                          Ordnance
                                                                                                  moments tap               to pass it and display the Interface Viewer
                          Paramilitary
                                                                                                  screen (Figure 8-12).
                          Picket
                          Pontoon                                                            c.   To refine the position tap          then drag the crosshair ( ) to the
                          Railroad Troops                                                         appropriate location.
                          Ranger
                          Reconnaissance                                                     d.   Tap                    at the top to grab the new crosshair location.
                          Reconnaissance, Armor                                              e.   Send this new position to PFED by tapping              in the viewer.
                          Sapper (Mine)
                          Scud SSM Unit
                                                                                             f.   After a few moments the Imagery Data screen will reappear with the
                          Signal/Electronics                                                      new location. Tap          to accept the refined location.
                          Special Forces
                          Supply
                          Surface-to-Air Missile
                          Surface-to-Surface
                          Missile
                          Surveillance
                          Tank
                          Tank, Light
DRAFT                               77                            March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                       194                                 March 16, 2009
Chapter 8 – Call For Fire                                               PFED User Manual      Chapter 4 – Main Screen                                                 PFED User Manual

                                                                                                                              Tank, Medium
                                                                                                                              Tank, Heavy
                                                                       Flashes between                                        Tank, Destroyer
                                                                         Black & Grey                                         Tank, Recovery
                                                                                                                              Training
                                                                                                                              Transport
                                                                                                                              Transportation
                                                                                                                              Weather
                                                                                                                              Unknown


                                                                                                      : When the operator chooses a Role of Fire Support Officer, Fire Support
                                                                                              Element or Fire Support Team (setting the handheld in FiST mode), the system will allow
                                                                                              the customization of the routing of messages within the Address/Unit List menu option
                                                                                              (refer to section 5.1.2.3 Message Configuration for further information).

                            Figure 8-13 LRF Data Pop-up Screen                                     6.   Tap to the right of the System Type field and select the appropriate
                                                                                                        option for the handhelds configuration (i.e., AFATDS, FOS, TACP, R5,
                                                                                                        SWB2, SWB3, PFED).
       : The Distance field will flash when there is a possible Danger Close situation. The
EPE field will flash when it is beyond +/- 50 meters. The Time Of Flight (TOF) field will
flash when the lazed information is beyond the threshold of the devices current operator           : The Laser Code field must meet the following conditions: first digit = 0 or 1;
position information.                                                                         second digit = 1 through 7; third and fourth digits = 1 through 8.

          c.   When finished, tap            to calculate the position and return to the           7.   Tap        to enter the laser code information (Figure 4-35). Each digit of
               CFF screen, or tap              to discard the lazing information and try                the Laser Code field is filtered allowing only the appropriate numbers to be
               again.                                                                                   selected.


      : If you took measurements using your LRF before entering the CFF screen, you                  : When transmitting a message with Visibility information, the operator may specify
                                                                                              an actual value such as 2500 meters. However, during transmission this value is converted
                                                                                              to an enumeration defining range. When transmitting a message with Cloud Height
can tap                  to calculate the target’s position without having to retake the      information, the operator can specify an actual value such as 2533 meters. However
measurements. If the measurements have expired beyond the systems designated time             during transmission this value is converted by dividing by 100. This results in different
frame, the system will prompt the operator that the information is too old to retain.         values being seen on PFED and FOS/AFATDS.

          d.   If you do not have an LRF device physically connected to the PFED                   8.   Complete this screen by entering any Cloud Height and/or Visibility
               system, you can enter the data obtained by lazing the target with the                    information.
               LRF into the PFED system manually.
                                                                                                   9.   When complete, tap             .
          e.   Laze the target using the LRF to determine the target’s range, direction
               and elevation data. These values will be visible on your LRF display.               10. Tap      to select the needed Platform Type (refer to section 8.2.1 CFF
          f.   Then use the Polar method to enter the information (refer to section                    (Screen 1) – Target Description for information on completing the Target
               8.2.1.1.2 Polar Location Method).                                                       Type field, also known as platform type in the unit information).

                                                                                                   11. When complete, tap               until you have returned to the PFED Main
                                                                                                       screen.



DRAFT                                       193                             March 16, 2009    DRAFT                                        78                             March 16, 2009
Chapter 4 – Main Screen                                                PFED User Manual        Chapter 8 – Call For Fire                                               PFED User Manual

4.4.7     Map Datum Information (Map Datum Info) Setup                                         the polar data received. When the screen is displayed, it presents the offset data
                                                                                               between the forward observer’s own location and the calculated target. The user
A local Map Datum can be defined for use within the PFED application from the                  can then call up that same position by clicking on the ‘LRF’ button on the
Map Datum Info Setup screen. By default, the datum used by the PFED system                     location panel of any report type that uses positional data. The data shown in
is the WGS 84. If the FO selects a different datum for use with the PFED                       the pop up window will be different if the user has moved since it is based on of
system, all positions displayed within PFED will be in the selected local datum.               the calculated position of the original target lazed. This ensures that the polar
                                                                                               data originally received from the LRF is only applied to the position of the FO at
If there is a GPS device attached to PFED, it is assumed that the GPS device is                time of laze. However, if the target/entity has moved and two consecutive lazes
set in WGS 84 and that all data received from the GPS device is WGS 84 data.                   are taken within twelve (12) seconds, the heading and speed will be calculated
When data is received from the GPS device, it is transformed to the local datum                using both lazed values.
selected by the FO using the Molodensky formula.

When the FO manually inputs polar data, or fires the laser to obtain polar data                      : The PLGR CON setting must be used for the Mark VII, Leica V4, 21A and 21B. If
from his position to define a target position, the T. Vincenty formula is used with            the LRF is not set in PLGR CON, you will be presented with the alert “LRF not set to use
the ellipsoid data for the selected local datum.                                               PLGR CON. Set to PLGR CON and Laze again.”


Map information is used by PFED to determine how to calculate geodetic
locations (coordinates on the earth), not to identify map area of operation like                     : Any LRFs which allow the user to change the Northing Reference must be set into
AFATDS, FOS, etc. These settings are necessary to ensure that your location is                 Magnetic. If the output of data is not set to Magnetic, you will be presented with the alert
calculated accurately on your PFED system and plotted correctly on AFATDS.                     “LRF Northing Reference not set to MAGNETIC. Set Northing Reference to MAGNETIC
They also affect target locations and how laser range finder data is interpreted.              and laze again.”
All setup data should be displayed on the bottom of your field map.

                                                                                                    : When using an LRF device, no compensation should be made within the LRF for
                                                                                               magnetic variation.

             : When entering the Map Datum Information, be aware that if the physical                    a.   Ensure that a LRF unit is attached to the PFED device and is
paper maps are not current, this data may be different from what AFATDS and FOS may                           configured in the PFED application.
contain. If this incorrect datum information is entered into PFED, this can cause conversion
errors when messages are transmitted to AFATDS and/or FOS due to the miss-match of                       b.   Use your LRF option to laze the target. This will transmit the target’s
the datum information.                                                                                        range, direction and elevation data to your PFED system. The location
                                                                                                              obtained by lazing (Figure 8-13) will be shown in the location panel on
                                                                                                              the first CFF screen (refer to section 5.1.1 Device Setup).
     1.   Tap       then tap the Map Datum Info option to display the Map Datum
          Information screen (Figure 4-36). The Datum, Area and Ellipsoid fields
          operate as drop-down selection list fields.




DRAFT                                      79                               March 16, 2009     DRAFT                                       192                             March 16, 2009
Chapter 8 – Call For Fire                                               PFED User Manual     Chapter 4 – Main Screen                                          PFED User Manual



      : The normal setup for a Polar method would be Direction = Mils Grid, Distance =
Meters and Vertical Difference = Meters.




           : When entering data of any kind, verify the values are correct before tapping
any Ok, Send, Save or any other process button.

          c.   When finished, tap        . The target location entered will display in
               the Location box on the CFF screen.


8.2.1.1.3 Shift From Known Point
          a.   To the right of the Point field, tap     to select the known point.                                  Figure 4-36 Map Datum Setup Screen

          b.   Tap the appropriate button to select between Rgt (right) or Lft (left)
               Lateral shift. Then use the available keypad to enter the left or right       4.4.7.1 Datum/Area/Ellipsoid
               Lateral shift value.
                                                                                             The Datum, Area and Ellipsoid fields filter and default off of each other based
          c.   To the right of this field, tap     to select the appropriate measurement.    on what value is selected in any one field. For example:
          d.   Tap the appropriate button to select between Add or Drp (drop) Range
               shift. Then use the available keypad to enter add or drop Range shift                  If you choose a Datum of Guam 1963, the Area field will display Guam
               value.                                                                                 and the Ellipsoid field will show Clarke 1866. When you tap the drop-
          e.   To the right of this field, tap     to select the appropriate measurement.             down for the Ellipsoid and Area fields, the selection lists will show
                                                                                                      only those values that pertain to the Guam 1963 datum.
          f.   Tap the appropriate button to select between Up or Dwn (down)
               Vertical shift. Then use the available keypad to enter the up or down
               Vertical shift value.                                                                  Or, if you select an Area of Hong Kong, the Datum field will display
                                                                                                      Hong Kong 1963 and the Ellipsoid field will display International
          g.   To the right of this field, tap     to select the appropriate measurement.             1924. Again, when you tap the drop-down for the Datum and Ellipsoid
                                                                                                      fields, the selection lists will show only those values that pertain to the
                                                                                                      Hong Kong area.

           : When entering data of any kind, verify the values are correct before tapping    When a selection has been made in any of these fields, the other 2 fields will
any Ok, Send, Save or any other process button.
                                                                                             also contain a selection of Show All. This will allow the operator to display the
                                                                                             entire selection list for that field if a different option needs to be chosen.
          h.   When finished, tap        . The target location entered will display in
               the Location box on the CFF screen.


8.2.1.1.4 Laser Data Method

The data received from the LRF is polar data; meaning a range, direction and
vertical difference between the LRF and the lazed target. When PFED receives
this data, it calculates a target based on the forward observer’s own position and
DRAFT                                        191                            March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                   80                           March 16, 2009
Chapter 4 – Main Screen                                             PFED User Manual     Chapter 8 – Call For Fire                                                PFED User Manual



                                                                                                : This display message is a dynamically created message. If the values for Auto
                                                                                         Position Reporting feature are changed the system displays the time frame listed in the
                                                                                         Auto Position Report. If the values for the Auto Position Reporting feature are not changed
                                                                                         the system uses a default of 5 minutes.


                                                                                         8.2.1.1.1 Grid Location Method
                                                                  Ellipsoid Value
                                                                                                   a.   At the top left of the screen, tap to select the format you wish to use
                                                                                                        to define the grid coordinates. The options include Decimal Degrees,
                                                                                                        Deg:Min:Sec, MGRS (default) or UTM.
                                                                                                   b.   Use the available keypad to enter the grid coordinates (Easting and
                                                                                                        Northing) of the target. You may enter a six (6), eight (8), or ten (10)
                                                                                                        digit grid.
                                                                   Datum Value                     c.   Use the available keypad to enter the Altitude of the target.
                                                                                                   d.   Use the available keypad to enter the Heading and Speed of the
                                                                                                        target.
                                                                                                   e.   Under each of these fields, tap      to select the appropriate
                                                                                                        measurement.




                                                                                                    : When entering data of any kind, verify the values are correct before tapping
                                                                                         any Ok, Send, Save or any other process button.
                           Figure 4-37 Field Map Legend

    2.   Tap to the right of the Datum field name then tap the item you wish to
         select. Make sure that the horizontal datum selection matches the value                 : A FOS device processes attitudes in 100's of Mils. Because of this, any attitude
         that is listed on the bottom of your field map (Figure 4-37) and the value      that is less than 100 will appear as 0. If an attitude of 100 is transmitted, then FOS will
         loaded on AFATDS. If these are not the same, your location may be off by        show it as 1. If an attitude of 200 is transmitted, then FOS will show it as 2, etc.
         as much as 500 meters or more. Tap Show All to view all available options:
                                                                                                   f.   When finished, tap        . The target location entered will display in
  World Geodetic System    Fort Thomas 1955            North Sahara 1959
                                                                                                        the Location box on the CFF screen.
  1984
  World Geodetic System    GAN 1970                    Observatorio Meterologica
  1972                                                 1939                              8.2.1.1.2 Polar Location Method
  Adindan                  Geodetic Datum 1949         Old Egyptian 1907
  Afgooye                  Graciosa Base SW 1948       Old Hawaiian                                a.   Using the available keypad, enter the Direction, Distance, Vert(ical)
                                                                                                        Diff(erence), Heading and Speed of the target. To move between
  Ain al Abd 1970          Guam 1963                   Oman
  American Somoa 1962      Gunung Segara               Ordinance GB 1936                                fields, tap on the Label (i.e.,           ) of the field you want to enter.
  Anna 1 Astro 1965        Gux 1 Astro                 Pico De Las Nieves
                                                                                                   b.   To the right of each of these fields, tap     to select the appropriate
  Antigua Island Astro     Herat North                 Pitcairn Astro 1967                              measurement.
  1943
  Arc 1950                 Hermannskogel               Point 58

DRAFT                                  81                               March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                       190                              March 16, 2009
Chapter 8 – Call For Fire                                               PFED User Manual     Chapter 4 – Main Screen                                            PFED User Manual

                                                                                               Arc 1960                  Hjorsey 1955                Pointe Noire 1948
                                                                                               Ascension Island 1958     Hong Kong 1963              Porto Santo SE Base
                                                                                                                                                     1936
                                                                                               Astro Beacon ‘E’ 1945     Hu-Tzu-Shan                 Prov. S American 1956
                                                                                               Astro DOS 71 4            Indian                      Provisional South Chilean
                                                                                                                                                     1963
                                                                                               Astro Tern Island 1961    Indian 1954                 Puerto Rico-Virgin Island
                                                                                               Astronomical Station      Indian 1960                 Pulkovo 1942
                                                                                               1952
                                                                                               Australian Geodetic       Indian 1975                 Qatar National
                                                                                               1966
                                                                                               Australian Geodetic       Indonesian 1974             Qornog
                                                                                               1984
                                                                                               Ayabelle Lighthouse       Ireland 1965                Reunion
                                                                                               Bellevue IGN              ISTS 061 Astro 1968         Rome 1940
      Figure 8-10 LRF Data Screen
                                                                                               Bermuda 1957              ISTS 073 Astro 1969         S-42 (Pulkovo 1942)
                                                    Figure 8-11 Imagery Data Screen            Bissau                    Johnston Island 1961        Santo (DOS) 1965
                                                                                               Bogota Observatory        Kandawala                   Sao Braz
                                                                                               Bukit Rimpah              Kerguelen Island 1949       Sapper Hill 1943
                                                                                               Camp Area Astro           Kertau 1948                 Schwarzeck
                                                                                               Campo Inchauspe 1969      Kusaie Astro 1951           Selvagem Grande 1938
                                                                                               Canton Astro 1966         L.C. 5 Astro 1961           Sierra Leone 1960
                                                                                               Cape                      Leigon                      S-JTSK
                                                                                               Cape Canaveral            Liberia 1964                South American 1969
                                                                                               Carthage                  Luzon                       South Asia
                                                                                               Chatham Island Astro      M’Poraloko                  Tananarive Observatory
                                                                                               1971                                                  1925
                                                                                               Chua Astro                Mahe 1971                   Timbalai 1948
                                                                                               Coordinate System         Massawa                     Tokyo
                                                                                               1937
                                                                                               Corrego Alegre            Merchich                    Tristan Astro 1968
                                                                                               Dabola                    Midway Astro 1961           Viti Levu 1916
                                                                                               Deception Island          Minna                       Voirol 1874
                   Figure 8-12 Interface Viewer for Refining Position
                                                                                               Djarkata                  Monserrat Island Astro      Voirol 1960
                                                                                                                         1958
                                                                                               DOS 1968                  Nahrwan                     Wake Island Astro 1952
      : If your PFED device is not connected to a GPS device, the system will display a        Easter Island 1967        Naparima: BWI               Wake-Eniwetok 1960
prompt message. The message will note the problem based on which option, time or
                                                                                               European 1950             North American 1927         Yacare
distance, has been set.
                                                                                               European 1979             North American 1983         Zanderij
If time is set, the message will contain a reference such as “Your position has not been
updated in # minutes.” If distance is set, the message will contain a reference such as
“Your position is not guaranteed to within # meters.” If both are set, the message will           : Make sure that your PLGR is configured to output WGS-84 Datum.
contain a reference to the option that has expired first. If this message appears, the
operator should tap Yes to manually enter their new location.                                    3.   If there are multiple options associated with the selected Datum, the Area
                                                                                                      field may be blank. To select an associated area, tap to the right of the

DRAFT                                       189                             March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                     82                             March 16, 2009
Chapter 4 – Main Screen                                            PFED User Manual     Chapter 8 – Call For Fire                                            PFED User Manual

        Area field name then tap the area you wish to select. Tap Show All to view
        all available options:

  Afghanistan          Deception Island        Lesotho            Salvage Islands
  Africa-East (Mean)   Diego Garcia            Liberia            San Salvador
  Africa-South-        Djibouti                Madagascar         Sardinia
  Central (Mean)
  Africa-West (Mean)   Easter Island           Madeira Island     Saudi Arabia
  Alaska               Eastern Canada          Malawi             Scotland
  Albania              Ecuador                 Malaysia           Senegal
  Alberta              Egypt                   Mali               Seychelles
  Aleutian Islands     England                 Malta              Sicily
  Aleutian Islands E   England (Mean)          Manado             Sierra Leone
  of 180W
  Aleutian Islands W   England: Wales          Manitoba           Singapore
  of 180W
  Algeria              Espirito Santo          Marcus Island      Somalia                   Figure 8-7 Grid Location Screen               Figure 8-8 Polar Location Screen
                       Island
  Amazon River         Estonia                 Marshall Island    Samoa
  Antarctica           Ethiopia                Mascarene Island   South Africa                                                                              Point Designator
  Argentina            Europe (Mean)           Masirah Island     South America
                                                                  (Mean)
  Ascension Island     Europe-Western          Maui               South Georgia
                       (north border)                             Islands
  Australia            Falkland Island         Mexico             South Korea
  Azores               Fiji Island             Micronesia         Sri Lanka
  BR-Channel Island    Finland                 Midway Island      St. Helena                    Lateral Range                                       Meters from
  Bahamas              Florida                 Mindanao Island    St. Kitts                       & Vertical                                       Target to Point
  Bahrain              Gabon                   Morocco            Sudan                          Shift Options
  Baltra               Galapagos Island        Muscat             Surinam
  Bangkok              Germany                 Nambia             Swaziland
  Bangladesh           Ghana                   Nepal              Sweden
  Bermuda              Greece                  Nevis              Taiwan
  Bolivia              Greenland               New Georgia        Tanzania                                       Figure 8-9 Shift From Known Point Screen
  Borneo               Guadalcanal             New Hebrides       Tern Island
  Botswana             Guam                    New South Wales    Thailand
  Brazil               Guinea-Bissau           New Zealand        Tobago
  British Columbia     Guyana                  Niger              Tokyo (Mean)
  Burkina Faso         Hawaii                  Nigeria            Trinidad
  Burundi              Hawaii (Mean)           Northwest          Tristan da Cunha
                                               Territories
  CONUS                Hebrides                Oahu               Tunisia
  Cameroon             Hong Kong               Okinawa            US
  Canada               Hungary                 Oman               US Eastern

DRAFT                                     83                           March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                      188                          March 16, 2009
Chapter 8 – Call For Fire                                               PFED User Manual     Chapter 4 – Main Screen                                                 PFED User Manual

cancel out of the Danger Close alert, the message is not sent, but the message                 Canal Zone             Iceland                 Ontario               US Western
will be set in a Danger Close state (if applicable).                                           Canary Island          Indonesia               Pakistan              United Arab
                                                                                                                                                                    Emirates
8.2.1.1 Location Entry                                                                         Caribbean              Iran                    Paraguay              Uruguay
                                                                                               Cayman Brac BWI        Iraq                    Peru                  Venezuela
                                                                                               Central America        Ireland                 Philippines           Vietnam (Con
     4.   Tap                           to display the selection window for choosing                                                                                Son Island)
          the appropriate Location Method (Figure 8-6).                                        Chatham Island         Israel                  Phoenix Island        Vietnam (Hanoi)
                                                                                               Chile                  Iwo Jima                Pitcairn Island       Vietnam (Mean)
                                                                                               Chile-North            Japan                   Poland                Wake Atoll
                                                                                               Chile-South            Johnston Island         Portugal              Wales
                                                                                               Cocos Island           Jordan                  Puerto Rico           Worldwide
                                                                                               Colombia               Kauai                   Qatar                 Yugoslavia
                                                                                               Congo                  Kazakhstan              Quandahar             Yukon
                                                                                               Cuba                   Kenya                   Republic of           Zaire
                                                                                                                                              Maldives
                                                                                               Cyprus                 Kerguelen Island        Rio Branco            Zambia
                     Figure 8-6 Location Method Selection Screen
                                                                                               Czech Republic         Latvia                  Romania               Zimbabwe
     5.   Tap the appropriate button to bring up a Location Entry screen, or use your          Czechoslovakia         Leeward Islands         Russia
          LRF device to designate the target and automatically enter the location.
                                                                                                  4.   If there are multiple options associated with the selected Datum and Area,
          Depending upon the location method selected; Grid Location (Figure 8-7),
                                                                                                       the Ellipsoid field may be blank. To select an associated ellipsoid, tap to
          Polar Location (Figure 8-8), Shift from Known Point (Figure 8-9), Laser Data
                                                                                                       the right of the Ellipsoid field name then tap the ellipsoid value you wish to
          (Figure 8-10), Use Imagery Data (Figure 8-11), or Refine Position via
                                                                                                       select (the Ellipsoid value will be the Spheroid value on the field map [Figure
          Imagery (Figure 8-12); the appropriate screen will be displayed.
                                                                                                       4-37]).

                                                                                                          World Geodetic System 1972       GRS 80
                                                                                                          World Geodetic System 1984       Helmert 1906
             : Remember to tap            at the bottom of the screen. If the   located at                Airy                             Hough
the top right-hand corner is used, a message will display informing the operator that “if                 Australian National              Indonesian 1974
confirmed” the system will disregard any entries made and return the operator to the
previous screen.                                                                                          Bessel 1841                      International 1924
                                                                                                          Bessel 1941                      Krassovsky 1940
                                                                                                          Clarke 1866                      Modified Airy
                                                                                                          Clarke 1880                      Modified Fischer 1960
                                                                                                          Everest                          South American 1969
                                                                                                          Everest 1948


                                                                                                    : A check is performed when you tap OK in the Map Datum Info screen to verify
                                                                                             that the datum selected supports the current position. If it does not, the system will alert
                                                                                             you and switch the system to WGS-84 Datum. A check is also performed when the
                                                                                             operators position changes to ensure that the datum supports the new position. If the
                                                                                             operator’s position is not supported by the selected datum, PFED will switch to the WGS 84
                                                                                             datum and alert the operator of this change.

                                                                                                  5.   When all map information is entered, tap                 .

DRAFT                                       187                             March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                       84                              March 16, 2009
Chapter 4 – Main Screen                                                PFED User Manual       Chapter 8 – Call For Fire                                             PFED User Manual

4.4.7.2 Grid Declination and Magnetic Variance
                                                                                                    : The Imagery Data option is only available when there is refinement data available.
Grid Declination is the number of mils from Grid North to True North. This
value is used for converting from mils or degrees Grid to mils or degrees True
and back. PFED calculates this value based on the current Datum selected and
current user position.                                                                              : The Refine Position option will only be available once a location has been
                                                                                              entered. This option is used to help define a location in more detail.


      : The value displayed may be different from that shown on a paper map for the           Danger Close Conditions
operator’s area. This is due to the fact that the paper map’s value for Grid Convergence is
based on the center of the map and the map’s age.                                             A Danger Close condition within the PFED application is defined when the
                                                                                              distance between the FO and the target being fired upon is less than 600 meters.
Magnetic Variance is the number of mils from Magnetic North to True North.                    A check for a Danger Close condition is performed when there is an LRF
This value is used for converting from mils or degrees Magnetic to mils or                    attached to the PFED and it is fired, or when it is manually selected. The data
degrees True and back. PFED calculates this value based on the World                          received is checked to see if it is below 600 meters.
Magnetic Model 2005.
                                                                                              If it is, an alert is presented to the FO to warn of the Danger Close condition
                                                                                              (Figure 8-5). If this is performed while in the Call for Fire screen, or the Air
     : The value displayed for Magnetic Variance may differ from values displayed on the      Crew Briefing screen, then the FO will not be alerted again when he attempts to
PLGR, LLDR or other systems. This is due to the fact that other systems such as PLGR
may be using an earlier version of the World Magnetic Model (such as 2000).                   send the message from that screen (see next paragraph). For validity, if the LRF
                                                                                              data is invalid, a popup is displayed that states ‘Bad LRF data’ or ‘<<Type>>
4.4.8     Devices Setup                                                                       Error’ (could be distance or azimuth, this message is only shown for LRF’s that
                                                                                              denote the type of error that was encountered). If the LRF data is valid, a popup
Communication settings determine how the handheld communicates with the                       is displayed that shows the data received from the LRF, a position is calculated
radio, GPS receiver, laser range finder, and any other external devices. For                  from this data and FO’s position, and PFED sets the position within the screen
more detail, refer to section 5.1.1.1 Configuring Devices.                                    where the FO is currently located in the PFED application (this can be any
                                                                                              report that uses positional data; [e.g., CFF, SALUTE/ATI, NBC1, etc.]).
4.4.9     Fire Support Setup - Target Numbering
The Target Numbering option allows you to enter your allocated block of target
numbers, and enables automatic assignment of target numbers to new fire
missions you initiate. This information will either be retrieved from the unit
TACSOP or given to the operator from the FiST Chief.
     1.   To display the Auto Target Numbering screen (Figure 4-38), tap the
          following:     , Fire Support then Target Numbering.                                                       Figure 8-5 Danger Close Warning Screen

                                                                                              If the FO attempts to send a message that uses the FO’s location for calculation
                                                                                              of a position, the calculated position is checked for a distance less than 600
                                                                                              meters. An alert is presented to the FO denoting a Danger Close condition is
                                                                                              present. If the FO elects to send the message anyway, the message will be set in
                                                                                              a Danger Close state (if applicable) and the message is sent. If the FO elects to

DRAFT                                      85                               March 16, 2009    DRAFT                                     186                             March 16, 2009
Chapter 8 – Call For Fire                                             PFED User Manual      Chapter 4 – Main Screen                                                  PFED User Manual




                                                                                                                     Figure 4-38 Auto Target Numbering Screen
    Figure 8-3 Call For Fire (Screen 1)          Figure 8-4 Call For Fire - Extended
                                                             (Screen 2)                          2.     In the Start field, enter the first target number of your assigned block (two-
                                                                                                        letter prefix followed by four digits).
8.2.1     CFF (Screen 1)                                                                         3.     In the End field, enter the four digits of the last target number assigned to
                                                                                                        you. Once this is complete, the Next field displays the target number that
Certain fields are required on the first CFF screen before you can send a fire                          will be automatically assigned to the next fire mission you initiate. This field
mission or access the second CFF - Extended screen.                                                     may not be edited.
                                                                                                 4.     The Increment field defaults to 1. However, this value can be modified to
Mission Type (Required)                                                                                 establish an alternate incremental increase of the next automatically
                                                                                                        assigned target number (e.g., last target number used = 6, increment value
     3.   Tap the appropriate button to select a Mission Type of either Adjust Fire,                    = 3, next number assigned = 9).
          Fire for Effect, Imm(ediate) Smoke or Imm(ediate) Suppression. The Adjust
          Fire option is set as the default.                                                     5.     When complete, tap             .

Location (Required)
                                                                                                     : You will not be able to use the CFF function unless you have entered a target
                                                                                            block.
There are five options for entering a target location: Grid, Polar, Shift from
known point, Laser Data and Imagery Data.
                                                                                            4.4.10 Fire Support Setup - Planned Target List
                                                                                            The Planned Target List option allows you to enter a list of planned targets.
      : The Shift from known point method is only available when known points have          This option is used to pre-format a target description and location for each
been entered into the system via the Edit/Fire Support/Known Points menu.
                                                                                            planned target.
                                                                                                 1.     To display the Planned Target List screen (Figure 4-39), tap the following:

     : The Laser Data method of location is only available when a LRF (i.e., Mark VII) is                    , Fire Support then Planned Target List.
connected to your PFED and configured in the PFED application.




DRAFT                                      185                            March 16, 2009    DRAFT                                          86                            March 16, 2009
Chapter 4 – Main Screen                                                 PFED User Manual          Chapter 8 – Call For Fire                                             PFED User Manual

                                                                                                  8.2        CALL FOR FIRE REQUEST
       : If the operator’s position location has not been updated within a specified system
time period, PFED will display a message prompt asking for updated coordinates. The
operator may change this information at this time or pass the prompt message to update
the location at a later date.                                                                           1.   Tap          on the Main PFED screen. If the device has been configured
                                                                                                             as a FiST unit, then a pop-up screen will display requesting the operator to
4.4.10.1 Creating New Targets                                                                                select whether they wish to create the message as a Local or Non-Local
                                                                                                             message (Figure 8-1).
     2.   To clear all target information and create a new planned target, tap                .
     3.   In the Target Number field, enter a target number value using the available
          keypad. This number is defaulted to the next available target number in
          your assigned target block.                                                                        a.   To process this message as a Local message tap                .
     4.   Select the Mission Type (e.g., AF (Adjust Fire) or FFE (Fire for Effect)).                         b.   To process this message with a subordinate unit as a Non-Local
     5.   Refer to section 8.2.1.1 – Location Entry for information on completing the                             message, tap one of the units listed in the Non-Local (Subordinate)
          Location field.                                                                                         list. Once the selection is made, the system will display the first CFF
                                                                                                                  screen with the selected subordinate shown in the title bar (Figure 8-2).
     6.   Refer to section 8.2.1 CFF (Screen 1) – Target Description for information
          on completing the Size field.
     7.   Refer to section 8.2.1 CFF (Screen 1) – Target Description for information
          on completing the Target Type field (this field defaults to Unknown
          Personnel).

     8.   Tap           to access the CFF – [Target #] screen (Figure 4-40). Refer to
          section 8.2.2 CFF - Extended (Screen 2) for instructions on completing this
          screen.




                                                                                                    Figure 8-1 Local/Non-Local Selection




                                                                                                                                                   Figure 8-2 Subordinate Selection
                                                                                                                                                               Example

                                                                                                        2.   The system will then go directly to the first CFF screen (Figure 8-3).


                                                                                                         : Tap          to clear any CFF information and begin again.


      Figure 4-39 Target List Screen               Figure 4-40 CFF - [Target #] Screen

     9.   When this screen is complete, tap              to return to the main Planned
          Target List screen.

DRAFT                                       87                               March 16, 2009       DRAFT                                      184                            March 16, 2009
Chapter 8 – Call For Fire                                              PFED User Manual     Chapter 4 – Main Screen                                                 PFED User Manual


                                                                                                10. Once all target information is entered, tap             . The new target will
                                 CHAPTER 8                                                          display at the Planned Target List screen.
                                CALL FOR FIRE
                                                                                            4.4.10.2 Modify Existing Targets
                                                                                                11. To modify information in an existing planned target, tap on the existing
8.1     INTRODUCTION                                                                                target in the list to select it. Follow steps 3 through 10 above (section
                                                                                                    4.4.10.1).
The CFF preformatted screen allows you to quickly enter necessary information
for a CFF, including mission type, target location, and target description.                 4.4.10.3 Removing Existing Targets
Additional parameters, such as method of control and method of engagement,
may be entered if desired. After a fire mission is initiated using PFED, and
                                                                                                 : You will not be able to remove a planned target if it is an active mission.
received by AFATDS, you can monitor the mission, adjust firing, make
subsequent corrections and send end-of-mission.                                                 12. To remove an exiting planned target, tap on the existing target in the list to
                                                                                                     select it. Tap           to remove it.

                                                                                            4.4.10.4 Exit Screen
           : When entering data of any kind, verify the values are correct before tapping       13. To exit the screen, tap      at the top right.
any Ok, Send, Save or any other process button.
                                                                                            4.4.11 Fire Support Setup – CFF Templates
8.1.1     Fire Support Message Processing
                                                                                            The CFF Templates option allows you to create commonly used CFF missions
When the device is configured as a FiST unit, PFED will allow the operator to               as templates that can be sent more quickly. These pre-filled fire mission
designate fire support messages (including initial calls for fire, subsequent               templates, that may include any elements of the CFF, can be linked to hotkey
adjustments and end of missions) initiated by the subordinates to be sent as a              (shortcut key) buttons on the PFED device. To initiate a mission using a pre-
“copy” to up to four (4) units in their Unit List (three [3] plus their primary).           filled template, the operator would press the appropriate button, laze the target
These messages can also be sent as a plain text message, or carbon copy, to up              and manually send the mission.
to four (4) units in their Unit List. These units will be mutually exclusive from
the units designated as receiving an actual copy of the message.                            Before creating the CFF templates, you must first assign the buttons to their
                                                                                            correct functions. To configure the hotkey buttons for the pre-filled CFF
8.1.2     Initial Fire Mission Processing                                                   templates, refer to section 4.4.16 Preferences (Prefs) Setup – Hotkeys.

When the device is configured as a FiST unit, PFED will allow the operator to                   1.   Once all hotkey buttons are assigned properly, display the first CFF
initiate a CFF for a subordinate unit and to specify what addresses in addition to                   Templates Setup screen (Figure 4-41) by tapping             , Fire Support then
the primary should receive this CFF. When a fire mission is received from a                          CFF Templates.
subordinate unit, who is configured for Review routing in the Unit List, the
system will allow the operator to override this routing process to Automatic or
FR Approval on any subsequent fire support messages received for that mission.




DRAFT                                      183                             March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                      88                                March 16, 2009
Chapter 4 – Main Screen                                                   PFED User Manual      Chapter 7 - Reports                                             PFED User Manual


                                                                                                         c.   To delete all requests, tap         .
                                                                                                         d.   To exit the Open Report/Request screen, tap   at the top right.




          Figure 4-41 CFF Templates Setup               Figure 4-42 CFF Templates Setup
                      Screen 1                                      Screen 2

Notice that the CFF Template Setup screens (Figure 4-41 and Figure 4-42) are
very similar to the CFF mission screens. The template screens allow you to
create a fire mission using all of the same CFF information. One major
difference between both of the first CFF screens is the Button Number field
located at the top right side of the Target Description area. On the template
screen, the Button Number field is used to select which hotkey button will be
associated with the completed template.
     2.    In the Button Number field, tap        and select the button this template will be
           associated to.




             : If you have already assigned a new template to a button number, and you
mistakenly choose the same button number for another template, the second template will
replace the previous one originally saved. You will need to re-create the first template and
save it to another button number.

     3.    To create a template, complete both of the CFF mission template screens
           as you would when creating a CFF mission (refer to sections 8.2.1 CFF
           (Screen 1) and 8.2.2 CFF - Extended (Screen 2) for information on
           completing both screens).




           : When entering data of any kind, verify the values are correct before tapping
any Ok, Send, Save or any other process button.

DRAFT                                        89                               March 16, 2009    DRAFT                                       182                      March 16, 2009
Chapter 7 - Reports                                                   PFED User Manual     Chapter 4 – Main Screen                                            PFED User Manual

    40. On the Egress screen, you may choose a compass direction by tapping on
        the compass diagram. This will disable the Pull-Out Offset section and set             4.   Save the template by tapping           .
        its value to N/G (not given).
                                                                                               5.   Tap          to clear both screens and repeat this process to create each
    41. If the Egress value is to be a Pull-Out Offset option, you may choose this by               template.
        tapping any of the available buttons at the bottom of the screen.
    42. To clear the compass diagram and enable the Pull-Out Offset section, tap
                                                                                                 : The          option may be found on other PFED screens and would perform in
                  .                                                                        the same manner.

    43. When finished, tap            . The selected value will display in the Egress          6.   To exit the screen, tap   at the top right.
        field.                                                                                 7.   Once all templates have been created and saved, they may be used for
                                                                                                    sending fire missions (refer to section 8.2.3 Sending CFF Template Fire
Time on Target (TOT)                                                                                Mission).

                                                                                           4.4.12 Fire Support Setup – Known Points
    44. Tap            to access the Date/Time Entry screen. Using , enter the
        desired time on target. This field in initially set to the current system time.    The Known Points menu option allows the FO to create and save known points
         When finished, tap           .                                                    in the PFED system using either the grid or polar methods. These known points
    45. Tap the Danger Close box to check if this mission will be within 600 Meters        are retained in a PFED database list. Known points may also be added to list
        (Munitions Dependant) of friendly units.                                           through the Fire Mission Monitor when sending an End Of Mission (EOM)
                                                                                           (refer to section 8.3.1.8 Sending EOM). This information is only stored in
                                                                                           PFED. Known point information is not sent or stored at FOS or AFATDS.
     : Refer to section 8.2.1 Danger Close Conditions for more information on the
Danger Close processing.
                                                                                               1.   To display the Known Points screen (Figure 4-43), tap the following:      ,
                                                                                                    Fire Support then Known Points.
Remarks
                                                                                           4.4.12.1 Creating New Known Points
    46. Tap           to access the Text Entry screen to enter any additional
        remarks using the available keypad.                                                    2.   To clear all information and create a new known point, tap         .

    47. When finished, tap            .                                                        3.   In the Point field, enter a numeric value using the available keypad. This
                                                                                                    value should be unique for each known point created.
Send, Save, Open Buttons                                                                       4.   Select the method of either Grid or Polar. This will display either the Grid
                                                                                                    Location (Figure 4-44) or the Polar Location (Figure 4-45) screen based on
                                                                                                    which method is chosen.
    48. Tap         after reviewing your report for accuracy. This will queue the
        message for transmission.

    49. Tap          to save the report request to persistent storage for later review
        and transmission.

    50. Tap            to access a list of previously saved report requests.
         a.   To open a report request, tap on the request to select it then tap
                       .
         b.   To delete a report request, tap on the request to select it then tap
                       . The selected request will be removed immediately.
DRAFT                                     181                             March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                    90                            March 16, 2009
Chapter 4 – Main Screen                                           PFED User Manual     Chapter 7 - Reports                                                 PFED User Manual

                                                                                       7.2.9.2.3.4   Exit Mark Location List
                                                                                           38. To exit the Mark Location List screen and return to the AirCrew Brief (Line 8-
                                                                                                9) screen, tap         .

                                                                                       Egress (Required)

                                                                                           39. Tap               to access the Egress screen (Figure 7-43).




   Figure 4-43 Known Points Screen              Figure 4-44 Grid Location Screen




                                                                                          Figure 7-41 Mark Location Screen            Figure 7-42 Mark Friendly Location List
                                                                                                                                                     Screen




                          Figure 4-45 Polar Location Screen

    5.   Refer to either section 8.2.1.1.1 Grid Location Method or 8.2.1.1.2 Polar
         Location Method for information on completing the Grid or Polar location
         screen.

    6.   When this screen is complete, tap          to return to the main Known
         Points screen.

    7.   Tap         . The new known point will display in the Known Points list.

                                                                                                                     Figure 7-43 Egress Screen


DRAFT                                   91                            March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                    180                            March 16, 2009
Chapter 7 - Reports                                                       PFED User Manual    Chapter 4 – Main Screen                                              PFED User Manual

                 Prone                              Dug In                                    4.4.12.2 Modify Existing Known Points
                 Prand                              Overhead Cover
                                                                                                  8.   To modify information in an existing known point, tap on the existing target
                                                                                                       in the list to select it. Repeat steps 3 through 7 above (section 4.4.12.1).
7.2.9.2.3 AirCrew Brief (Line 8-9)
                                                                                              4.4.12.3 Removing Existing Known Points
    26. Tap       to display the third AirCrew Brief (Line 8-9) screen (Figure 7-40).             9.   To remove an exiting known point, tap on the existing target in the list to

Friendly Locations                                                                                     select it. Tap           to remove it.

                                                                                              4.4.12.4 Exit Screen
    27. Tap                          to access the Mark Location List screen (Figure
        7-42) for entering location information for the closest Friendly forces.                  10. To exit the screen, tap      at the top right.

7.2.9.2.3.1    Add New Locations                                                              4.4.13 Fire Support Setup – FSCMs/Geometries
                                                                                              The Fire Support Coordination Measures (FSCMs)/Geometries option allows
    28. To enter a new list item, tap              to clear all fields.
                                                                                              the operator to view a list of received FSCMs and other battlefield geometries,
    29. Refer to section 8.2.1.1 – Location Entry for information on completing the           including maneuver controls and tactical graphics. When sending a CFF or
        Location information.
                                                                                              CAS Request message, PFED will perform checks against the geometries stored
    30. Tap to select a Mark and corresponding Color value (if available) for how             on the system. Specifically, PFED will notify the operator if the target location
        the friendly location will be indicated to the aircraft.
                                                                                              given in the fire support request violates any of the following coordination
         a.    If the Flares, Light, Panels or Colored Smoke option is selected in the        measures: Coordinated Fire Line (CFL), Fire Support Coordination Line
               Mark field, the Color field will be available.                                 (FSCL), No Fire Area (NFA), Restrictive Fire Area (RFA), Restrictive Fire Line
                                                                                              (RFL), Zone of Responsibility (ZOR) and Forward Line of Own Troops (FLOT).
    31. Tap               to add the new item to the list.
                                                                                              PFED does not allow creation or editing of these geometries.
    32. Repeat this process to enter multiple Friendly forces.
                                                                                                  1.   To display the Battlefield Geometries screen (Figure 4-46), tap the following:
7.2.9.2.3.2    Edit Existing Locations
                                                                                                            , Fire Support then FSCMs/Geometries.
    33. To modify an existing location item, tap on the listed entry to select it.                2.   If you wish to filter the listed geometry types based on category, shape
    34. Refer to section 8.2.1.1 – Location Entry for information on completing the                    (e.g. area or line), or threat, tap for one or all of the Show fields and
        Location information.                                                                          select the information you wish to filter.
    35. Tap to select a different Mark and corresponding Color value (if                          3.   To view the details of a specific geometry, tap on one of listed names to
        available).                                                                                    highlight it then tap                    (Figure 4-47).
         a.    If the Flares, Light, Panels or Colored Smoke option is selected in the
               Mark field, the Color field will be available.

    36. Tap               to update the selected location item.

7.2.9.2.3.3    Remove Existing Locations
    37. To remove a listed location, tap on the existing location entry to select it then
         tap          .




DRAFT                                        179                             March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                      92                            March 16, 2009
Chapter 4 – Main Screen                                                    PFED User Manual        Chapter 7 - Reports                                                 PFED User Manual

                                                                                                   Mark Type (Required)

                                                                                                       13. Tap             to access the Mark Location screen (Figure 7-41) and enter
                                                                                                           the method that will be used to indicate the target to the aircraft.
                                                                                                       14. The Location information from the previous step will pre-fill on the Mark
                                                                                                           Location screen. If not, repeat step 12 above.
                                                                                                       15. Tap     to select a Marking Type.
                                                                                                            a.   If the Flares, Light, Panels or Colored Smoke option is selected, the
                                                                                                                 Marking Color field will be available.
                                                                                                            b.   If the Laser Designator option is selected, the Laser Code, Laser/Tgt
                                                                                                                 Line and Attack Heading fields will be available.
                                                                                                       16. Tap to select a Marking Color for the Flares, Light, Panels or Colored
                                                                                                           Smoke Marking Types.

                                                                                                       17. Tap                to access the Laser Code screen. Using the available
    Figure 4-46 Battlefield Geometries              Figure 4-47 View Battlefield Geometry
                 Screen                                       Screen (example                               keypad, enter the code value. When finished, tap            .

     4.   When finished tap               to return to the Battlefield Geometries screen.              18. Tap               to access the Laser-Target Line screen. Use the
                                                                                                           available keypad to enter the laser/target value. When finished, tap
                                                                                                                    .
      : PFED checks fire missions for violations against the following battlefield geometry            19. Tap     to select a measurement for the Laser/Tgt Line value.
types of ZOR, CFL, FSCL, RFL, RFA, NFA and FLOT.

     5.   If a ZOR geometry is selected, the Responsible Unit field will appear                        20. Tap                to access the Final Attack Heading screen. Use the
          (Figure 4-48). This field allows the operator to select the unit who will be                     available keypad to enter the attack heading value. When finished, tap
          responsible for this zone.                                                                                .
                                                                                                       21. Tap     to select a measurement for the Attack Heading value.
       : The operator should assign a unit who will be responsible for each ZOR. For                   22. When finished with the Mark Location screen, tap            .
example; the FO should assign him/herself as responsible for his/her own zone. This field
is local to PFED and is not received from the FDC system. If a zone has no unit
responsible for it, all targets will always violate the zone if short of the CFL.
                                                                                                   Target Description - Size
                                                                                                       23. Refer to section 8.2.1 CFF (Screen 1) – Target Description for information
     6.   Tap                        . This will display the Unit List screen.                             on completing the Size information.

                                                                                                   Target Description - Target Type (Required)
       : If the target location is outside of the mission initiator’s ZOR, an alert will display
stating Target location is Outside Zone Of Responsibility. However, a violation has not                24. Refer to section 8.2.1 CFF (Screen 1) – Target Description for information
occurred. This alert is for information only.                                                              on completing the Target Type information.

     7.   Tap on the unit you wish to select as the responsible party to select it. Then           Protection
          tap           to return to the Battlefield Geometries screen. The selected
          unit will appear in the Responsible Unit field (Figure 4-49).                                25. Tap     to select a degree of Protection value for the target.

                                                                                                                                           Protection
                                                                                                                   In The Open                    Prug

DRAFT                                         93                                March 16, 2009     DRAFT                                    178                             March 16, 2009
Chapter 7 - Reports                                                  PFED User Manual     Chapter 4 – Main Screen                                             PFED User Manual

MSN#
    5.   Tap in the Msn# field and enter an appropriate value using the available
         keypad.

Contact Point Name

    6.   Tap           under Contact Point and enter a name using the available
         keypad.

Contact Point Location (Required)

    7.   Tap                                     to access a Grid Location screen.
         Refer to section 8.2.1.1.1 – Grid Location for information on completing the
         Location information.

Initial Point (IP) Name                                                                      Figure 4-48 Responsbile Unit Field          Figure 4-49 Selected Responsible Unit

    8.   Tap           under Initial Point and enter a name using the available keypad.       8.   If you wish to remove a geometry select the item and tap            or

Initial Point Location (Required)                                                                          to remove all of them.

                                                                                              9.   When complete, tap             to exit the Battlefield Geometries screen.
    9.   Tap                                      to access a Grid Location screen.
         Refer to section 8.2.1.1.1 – Grid Location for information on completing the     4.4.14 Preferences (Prefs) Setup - Measurement Units
         Location information.
                                                                                          The Measurement Units screen allows you to choose your default unit of
Offset                                                                                    measure display for position, distance, alt/elev. and speed. Units will be
    10. Tap Left, Right or N/G (not given) buttons to select an Offset option for this    automatically converted when you generate messages or CFF.
        message.
                                                                                              1.   To display the Measurement Units screen (Figure 4-50), tap the following:
                                                                                                       , Prefs then Measurement Units.
7.2.9.2.2 AirCrew Brief (Line 3-7)

    11. Tap        to display the second AirCrew Brief (Line 3-7) screen (Figure 7-39).

Target Location

Once the Location information is entered on the previous screen, the Target
Location will be filled and the IP-to-Target will be set. This Target Location
may be changed if needed.
    12. Refer to section 8.2.1.1 – Location Entry for information on completing the
        Location information.




DRAFT                                     177                            March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                     94                            March 16, 2009
Chapter 4 – Main Screen                                                PFED User Manual      Chapter 7 - Reports                                               PFED User Manual




                Figure 4-50 Units of Measurement Preferences Screen
                                                                                                Figure 7-38 CAS (Line 1-2) Screen           Figure 7-39 CAS (Line 3-7) Screen
    2.    Tap each     for all fields and select the desired information.


     : For Field Artillery (FA) observers the following options are recommended: Position
= UTM, Distance = Meters, Direction = mils Grid and Alt/Elev = Meters.

        Position        Distance      Direction      Alt/Elev            Speed
      Decimal          Meters         Mils True     Meters          Miles/Hour
      Degrees
      Deg:Min:Sec      Kilometers     Mils          Kilometers      Kilometers/Hour
                                      Magnetic
      MGRS             Feet           Mils Grid     Feet            Knots
      UTM              Yards          Deg True      Yards
                       Nautical       Deg           Nautical
                       Miles          Magnetic      Miles
                       Statute        Deg Grid      Statute
                       Miles                        Miles
                                                                                                                      Figure 7-40 CAS (Line 8-9) Screen
    3.    When complete, tap            .
                                                                                             7.2.9.2.1 AirCrew Brief (Line 1-2)
4.4.15 Preferences (Prefs) Setup – Automatic Position
       Reporting
                                                                                             CAS# (Required)
The Automatic Position Reporting function controls how often your position                       4.   Tap in the CAS# field and enter an appropriate value using the available
will be automatically reported back to the command center. This time interval                         keypad.
also controls how often the pop-up prompt will appear when an operator’s
position coordinates are too old for accurate transmissions.


DRAFT                                       95                              March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                   176                           March 16, 2009
Chapter 7 - Reports                                                   PFED User Manual      Chapter 4 – Main Screen                                                 PFED User Manual

                                                                                                 1.   To display the Auto Position Reporting screen (Figure 4-51), tap the
    41. Tap          to save the report request to persistent storage for later review
        and transmission.                                                                             following:       , Prefs then Auto Position Reporting.

    42. Tap            to access a list of previously saved report requests.
                                                                                                       Position
         a.    To open a report request, tap on the request to select it then tap
                                                                                                      Reporting
                       .                                                                               Criteria

         b.    To delete a report request, tap on the request to select it then tap
                       . The selected request will be removed immediately.

         c.    To delete all requests, tap         .
         d.    To exit the Open Report/Request screen, tap        at the top right.                     Reporting
                                                                                                         Interval
7.2.9.2 CAS (AirCrew) Briefing
When a device is set in FiST mode, the Aircrew Briefing reports may be
forwarded to up to 4 other recipients on the tactical network after being
reviewed or not reviewed.
                                                                                                                    Figure 4-51 Position Reporting Setup Screen

                                                                                                 2.   Position reporting may be accomplished either automatically and/or
    1.   Tap                         to enter an AirCrew Briefing.
                                                                                                      manually as described below.
    2.   If fire missions were not previously sent, or planned targets have not yet
                                                                                                 3.   Tapping the Off option will disable automatic reporting but will still allow you
         been created, a warning will be displayed stating that there are no
                                                                                                      to send out a position report from the Main PFED screen Reports button.
         established fire missions. Tapping             at this point returns you to the
         Main PFED screen.
    3.   If fire missions were sent, the first AirCrew Brief (Line 1-2) screen will                : It is important that the location displayed on the Main PFED screen be your true
         display (Figure 7-38).                                                             location. This location is attached to every message that is sent. And in case of an
                                                                                            emergency, this location would be used to locate you.

                                                                                                 4.   Tapping the On option configures PFED to report your position at regular
                                                                                                      intervals based on time and/or distance traveled.


                                                                                                   : The automatic setting does not prevent you from sending manual position reports
                                                                                            via the Main PFED screen Reports button.

                                                                                                 5.   When on, you have the option to report your position by Time. Tapping this
                                                                                                      option configures PFED to report your position at regular intervals based on
                                                                                                      time. Enter a time using the available keypad. It is recommended that this
                                                                                                      setting be no less than 15 minutes to reduce system traffic.
                                                                                                 6.   Tapping the Distance option configures PFED to report your position based
                                                                                                      on distance moved. Enter a distance using the available keypad. 500
                                                                                                      meters is the recommended entry and is the system default.
                                                                                                 7.   The Both option configures PFED to report your position based on time or
                                                                                                      distance. A position report will be sent based on time or distance depending

DRAFT                                        175                           March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                       96                              March 16, 2009
Chapter 4 – Main Screen                                            PFED User Manual      Chapter 7 - Reports                                                       PFED User Manual

         on which condition is met first. Each condition is set independently            7.2.9.1.2.1    Add New Locations
         according to steps 5 and 6 above.

    8.   When complete, tap            .                                                     27. To enter a new list item, tap              to clear all fields.
                                                                                             28. Refer to section 8.2.1.1 – Location Entry for information on completing the
4.4.16 Preferences (Prefs) Setup – Hotkeys                                                       Location information.
                                                                                             29. Tap to select a Mark and corresponding Color value (if available) for how
The Hotkeys function is used to configure the devices external buttons to allow a                the friendly location will be indicated to the aircraft.
quicker way of recalling a fire mission for transmission, or performing a check
firing. The fire missions are stored in PFED in the form of templates. Before                     a.    If the Flares, Light, Panels or Colored Smoke option is selected in the
                                                                                                        Mark field, the Color field will be available.
creating any CFF templates, the hotkey buttons must be configured. They are
located on the PFED device itself (Figure 4-52). These buttons may be un-                    30. Tap               to add the new item to the list.
assigned for no operation if the operator wishes, or configured to activate a
                                                                                             31. Repeat this process to enter multiples Friendly forces.
template.
    1.   Access the Hotkeys Setup screen (Figure 4-53) by tapping the following:         7.2.9.1.2.2    Edit Existing Locations
               , Prefs then Hotkeys.                                                         32. To modify an existing location item, tap on the listed entry to select it.
                                                                                             33. Refer to section 8.2.1.1 – Location Entry for information on completing the
                                                                                                 Location information.
 Button 2                         Button 3
                                                                                             34. Tap to select a different Mark and corresponding Color value (if
                                                                                                 available).
                                                                                                  a.    If the Flares, Light, Panels or Colored Smoke option is selected in the
  Button 1                                                                                              Mark field, the Color field will be available.
                                 Button 4
                                                                                             35. Tap               to update the selected location item.
  Figure 4-52 PFED Handheld Hotkey
                                                                                         7.2.9.1.2.3    Remove Existing Locations
               Buttons
                                                                                             36. To remove a listed location, tap on the existing location entry to select it then
                                                                                                  tap          .

                                                                                         7.2.9.1.2.4    Exit Mark Location List

                                                                                             37. To exit the Mark Location List screen tap                 .
                                                  Figure 4-53 Hotkeys Setup Screen

    2.   To change a hotkey assignment setting, tap on any listed button to select it.   Remarks
         Your selection will display in the Button assignment field and activate the
         assignment selection to its right.                                                  38. Tap           to access the Text Entry screen to enter any additional
    3.   Tap     and select any of the available options.                                        remarks using the available keypad.

                                                                                             39. When finished, tap               .
    4.   Tap           to save this assignment.
    5.   If needed, repeat steps 2 through 4 to change any other button                  Send, Save, Open Buttons
         assignments.

                                                                                             40. Tap         after reviewing your report for accuracy. This will queue the
                                                                                                 message for transmission.
DRAFT                                       97                         March 16, 2009    DRAFT                                        174                             March 16, 2009
Chapter 7 - Reports                                                 PFED User Manual      Chapter 4 – Main Screen                                                PFED User Manual

                                                                                              6.   Once you have made all needed changes, you may now create the CFF
    17. Tap                to access the Final Attack Heading screen. Use the                      templates for those buttons assigned as CFF Template (refer to section
        available keypad to enter the attack heading value. When finished, tap                     4.4.11 Fire Support Setup – CFF Templates).
                 .                                                                            7.   If you wish to reset all of the buttons back to their defaults, tap
    18. Tap     to select a measurement for the Attack Heading value.                                               .
    19. When finished with the Mark Location screen, tap            .                         8.   When complete, tap       at the top right.

Target Description - Size                                                                 4.4.17 Preferences (Prefs) Setup – SALUTE/ATI
    20. Refer to section 8.2.1 CFF (Screen 1) – Target Description for information        The Messaging function controls how the SALUTE/ATI report is transmitted.
        on completing the Size information.
                                                                                              1.   To display the Messaging Preferences screen (Figure 4-54), tap the
Target Description - Target Type (Required)
                                                                                                   following:     , Prefs then SALUTE/ATI.
    21. Refer to section 8.2.1 CFF (Screen 1) – Target Description for information
        on completing the Target Type information.

Protection
    22. Tap     to select a degree of Protection value for the target.

                                     Protection
             In The Open                    Prug
             Prone                          Dug In
             Prand                          Overhead Cover


7.2.9.1.2 CAS Request (Screen 2)

    23. Tap     to display the CAS Request – Screen 2 screen (Figure 7-37).

Initial Point (IP) Name
                                                                                                                Figure 4-54 Messaging Preferences Screen

    24. Tap           under Initial Point and enter a name using the available keypad.        2.   Tap the appropriate option to configure how the SALUTE/ATI report will be
                                                                                                   transmitted.
Location (Required only if IP Name field has been filled)
                                                                                              3.   When complete, tap             .
    25. Refer to section 8.2.1.1 – Location Entry for information on completing the
        Location information.                                                             4.4.18 Database Maintenance
Friendly Locations                                                                        PFED stores most data in individual databases. The Database Maintenance
                                                                                          feature allows you to purge these databases, including:
    26. Tap                          to access the Mark Location List screen (Figure
                                                                                                   Inbox, Outbox, Plain Text Messages (PTM), Transmit Queue
        7-42) for entering location information for the closest Friendly forces.
                                                                                                   All Reports/Requests (SALUTE/ATI, MEDEVAC, NBC1, etc)
                                                                                                   Fire Support (Fire Missions, Known Points)


DRAFT                                    173                             March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                       98                             March 16, 2009
Chapter 4 – Main Screen                                                    PFED User Manual         Chapter 7 - Reports                                                    PFED User Manual

         Tracks: Deletes all tracks (unit positions) received or created by you.                    FP Name/Mission Priority
         A track is created every time you send a SALUTE/ATI report or Fire
         Mission                                                                                        5.   If this message is set as a Preplanned, enter a name in the FP Name field.
         Unit List: Deletes the unit list                                                               6.   Tap to select a Mission Priority of Paramount, Essential, Ordinary or
                                                                                                             Routine.
    1.   To display the Database Maintenance screen (Figure 4-55), tap the
                                                                                                    Time on Target (TOT)
         following:       then Databases.

                                                                                                        7.   Tap            to access the Date/Time Entry screen. Using , enter the
                                                                                                             desired time on target. This field in initially set to the current system time.
                                                                                                             When finished, tap           .
                                                                                                        8.   Tap to select a Desired Results of Neutralization, Smoke, Mark,
                                                                                                             Harassment, Interdiction, Destruction, Illumination or Final Protective
                                                                                                             Fire.

                                                                                                    Location (Required)
                                                                                                        9.   Refer to section 8.2.1.1 – Location Entry for information on completing the
                                                                                                             Location information.

                                                                                                    Mark Type (Required)

                                                                                                        10. Tap             to access the Mark Location screen (Figure 7-41) and enter
                                                                                                            the method that will be used to indicate the target to the aircraft.
                      Figure 4-55 Database Management Screen                                            11. The Location information from the previous step will pre-fill on the Mark
                                                                                                            Location screen. If not, repeat step 9 above.
    2.   To purge data from specific databases, tap the checkbox to the left of the
                                                                                                        12. Tap     to select a Marking Type.
         database name. Tap                 , then tap either             to confirm or
                                                                                                             a.   If the Flares, Light, Panels or Colored Smoke option is selected, the
                  to cancel.                                                                                      Marking Color field will be available.

    3.   To purge all of the listed databases, tap              , then tap either              to            b.   If the Laser Designator option is selected, the Laser Code, Laser/Tgt
                                                                                                                  Line and Attack Heading fields will be available.
         confirm or            to cancel.
                                                                                                        13. Tap to select a Marking Color for the Flares, Light, Panels or Colored
                                                                                                            Smoke Marking Types.
    4.   To purge the address/unit list database, tap                             , then tap
                                                                                                        14. Tap                 to access the Laser Code screen. Using the available
         either           to confirm or           to cancel.
                                                                                                             keypad, enter the code value. When finished, tap               .
    5.   To exit the Database Maintenance screen, tap                 .
                                                                                                        15. Tap               to access the Laser-Target Line screen. Use the
4.4.19 Exiting PFED                                                                                         available keypad to enter the laser/target value. When finished, tap
                                                                                                                      .
    1.   To exit the PFED application, tap the following:          then Exit.
                                                                                                        16. Tap     to select a measurement for the Laser/Tgt Line value.




DRAFT                                       99                                 March 16, 2009       DRAFT                                     172                               March 16, 2009
Chapter 7 - Reports                                               PFED User Manual     Chapter 5 - Communications                                             PFED User Manual



                                                                                                                       CHAPTER 5
                                                                                                                     COMMUNICATIONS

                                                                                       5.1        INTRODUCTION

                                                                                       Before PFED can be used to send and receive messages, you must properly
                                                                                       configure the communications device networks. This tells PFED how to “talk”
                                                                                       with external devices (such as a GPS), Lightweight Forward Entry Device
     Figure 7-35 CAS Select Screen                                                     (LFED) users, Forward Entry Device (FED) users, other PFED users and
                                                                                       AFATDS terminals.

                                                                                       5.1.1      Device Setup
                                                                                       The Devices option is where you configure the external devices and radios
                                              Figure 7-36 CAS Request - Screen 1       attached to your system. The following external sensors are currently supported:
                                                                                                  Rockwell-Collins PLGR – GPS receiver
                                                                                                  Leica – Laser Range Finding binoculars
                                                                                                  Mark VII – Laser Range Finding binoculars
                                                                                                  Sensor Link Protocol (SLP) – LRF communications protocol designed
                                                                                                  for IP networks
                                                                                                  Imagery Interface

                                                                                               : SLP devices are assumed to support location information as well as polar data
                                                                                       (i.e., Azimuth, Elevation Angle, Target Range).

                                                                                       5.1.1.1 Configuring Devices

                                                                                             1.   To display the Device Setup screen (Figure 5-1), tap the following:        ,
                                                                                                  then Devices.

                        Figure 7-37 CAS Request - Screen 2                                   2.   Add a SINCGARS network:

                                                                                                  a.   In the Comms section, tap         .
7.2.9.1.1 CAS Request - Screen 1                                                                  b.   Tap on the SINCGARS option. This will display the TACLINK Setup
                                                                                                       screen.
    3.   Select if this request is an Immediate or Preplanned.
                                                                                                  c.   Tap in the Network Name field and enter a new name.
CAS#
    4.   The system automatically assigns a CAS# to each briefing message.                   : PFED will allow the operator to store multiple network configurations for
         However, tap in the CAS# field if you need to change this briefing number.    communications across multiple types of networks. This configuration will work in relation
                                                                                       to your units in the Address/Unit List. Each unit will be stored based upon a network
                                                                                       configuration using the unique name entered here.
DRAFT                                   171                           March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                       100                            March 16, 2009
Chapter 5 - Communications                                                PFED User Manual        Chapter 7 - Reports                                                      PFED User Manual

          d.   In the Network Type field, tap        and select the network you will be
               using.                                                                                  6.   Once all URN’s have been listed in the URN’s to Query column, tap
                                                                                                            to transmit the request. The primary recipient will then reply to this request
          e.   If you selected the 188-220A or 188-220C network (Figure 5-2):                               with any and all information available. The reply will appear in the operator’s
                                                                                                            Inbox.

          : It is strongly recommended that the operator begin by entering a value in the first        7.   Tap            to save the request for later transmission.
portion of the Rank field. The Station ID and the last part of the Local IP fields will be pre-
filled with the last octet value based on the number entered for the operators Rank.                   8.   Tap            to access a list of previously saved requests.
               i)     Begin by entering a value in the Rank field. Notice that the last
                                                                                                            a.    To open a request, tap on the request to select it then tap             .
                      octet value has been entered into the Station ID and the final part
                      of the Local IP fields.
                                                                                                            b.    To delete a request, tap on the request to select it then tap               .
               ii)    If needed, change the value of the Station ID field by entering the                         The selected request will be removed immediately.
                      correct value for the last octet. If you have changed this value,
                      notice that the final part of the Local IP field has been updated
                      with this new value.                                                                  c.    To delete all requests, tap          .

               iii)   In the first three (3) parts of the Local IP field, enter the Local IP
                                                                                                            d.    Tapping        will return you to the URN Query screen to enter a
                      address that is assigned to your unit. The last portion should be
                                                                                                                  new query request.
                      filled with the correct last octet value. If not, correct this value now.
                                                                                                            e.    To exit the Open Report/Request screen, tap         at the top right.
               iv)    Tap             .
                                                                                                  7.2.9     CAS Request/AirCrew Briefing
                                                                                                  The CAS Request consists of 2 separate screens and the AirCrew Briefing report
                                                                                                  consists of 3 separate screens.


                                                                                                       : All CAS Briefs will be handled by the unit established as Primary in the unit list.
                                                                                                  CAS Briefs may only be created for an established fire mission.




                                                                                                        : CAS Briefs can NOT be sent to version 7.01 FOS systems. If the primary unit is a
                                                                                                  7.01 FOS system, the FOS system will return a CANTPRO (Cannot Process) message to
                                                                                                  the PFED system upon receipt of the CAS Brief.



                                                                                                       1.   Tap           from the Main PFED screen. The CAS Select screen will
     Figure 5-1 Device Setup Screen                 Figure 5-2 188-200A/188-220C Setup                      display (Figure 7-35) to choose a CAS Request or an AirCrew Briefing.
                                                                   Screen
                                                                                                  7.2.9.1 CAS Request
                                                                                                  PFED will transmit all CAS Request reports with a priority of Immediate when
                                                                                                  sending on a tactical network.


                                                                                                       2.   To enter a CAS Request tap                             (Figure 7-36).

DRAFT                                        101                              March 16, 2009      DRAFT                                         170                            March 16, 2009
Chapter 7 - Reports                                              PFED User Manual      Chapter 5 - Communications                                      PFED User Manual


         c.   To delete all requests, tap         .
         d.   To exit the Open Report/Request screen, tap   at the top right.

7.2.8    URN Query
The URN Query option allows the operator to transmit requests to the designated
primary recipient for all known information on existing URN’s within the
operator’s address book, or new and unknown URN’s. When a device is set in
FiST mode, the URN Query reports may be forwarded to up to 4 other recipients
on the tactical network after being reviewed or not reviewed.


    1.   Tap                  from the Reports/Requests screen. The first Query URN
         screen will display (Figure 7-34).

                                                                                                   Figure 5-3 188-220A/188-220C Settings Advanced Screen

                                                                                                   v)    Tap and select the parameters according to your radio setup for
                                                                                                         the Configuration field.

                                                                                                            188-220A                        188-220C
                                                                                                   4800 PT SC                      4800 PT SC
                                                                                                   4800 CT SC                      4800 CT SC
                                                                                                   4800 CT FH                      4800 CT FH
                                                                                                   Non Standard                    1200N PT SC
                                                                                                                                   1200N CT SC
                                                                                                                                   1200N CT FH
                                                                                                                                   2400N CT FH
                                                                                                                                   4800N CT FH
                                                                                                                                   Non Standard

                             Figure 7-34 URN Query Screen                                          vi)   Tap and select the parameters according to your radio setup for
                                                                                                         the Modulation field of NRZ, FSK-188C or STANAG-4202A.
    2.   Enter a new URN in the New unknown URN field and tap        . This will                   vii) Tap and select the parameters according to your radio setup for
         place the URN in the URN’s to Query column.                                                    the Baud Rate field.
    3.   Tap on a listed unkown URN in the Rcvd unknown URN’s field and tap        .                        188-220A                       188-220C
         This will place the URN in the URN’s to Query column.
                                                                                                   600                             600
    4.   You may also query on any known URN’s by selecting a known URN listed                     1200                            1200
         in the Known URN’s field and tapping . This will place these URN’s in                     2400                            1200N
         the URN’s to Query column as well.
                                                                                                   4800                            2400
    5.   To remove a URN from the URN’s to Query column, tap on the number to                      16000                           2400N
         select it and tap         .                                                                                               4800
                                                                                                                                   4800N
                                                                                                                                   16000
DRAFT                                       169                      March 16, 2009    DRAFT                                 102                          March 16, 2009
Chapter 5 - Communications                                             PFED User Manual    Chapter 7 - Reports                                                     PFED User Manual

             viii) Tap and select the parameters according to your radio setup for            Anti-Tank Rocket       All Subtypes                  Unknown, 75MM, 76MM,
                   the Security field.                                                        Launcher                                             80MM, 81MM, 82MM, 85MM,
                                                                                                                                                   88MM, 90MM, 100MM,
                        188-220A                            188-220C                                                                               105MM, 106MM, 107MM/4.2
             Plain Text                          Plain Text                                                                                        Inch Mortar, 120MM, 122MM,
                                                                                                                                                   130MM, 152MM, 155MM,
             Cipher Text                         Cipher Vinson                                                                                     160MM, 175MM, 180MM,
             ix)    Tap and select the parameters according to your radio setup for                                                                203MM/8 Inch Howitzer
                    the Hop Mode field, Single Channel or Frequency Hop.                      Howitzer-Self Propel   All Subtypes                  155MM
                                                                                              155MM
             x)     Tap and select the parameters according to your radio setup for
                    the Error Correct field.                                                  Howitzer-Self Propel   All Subtypes                  203MM/8 Inch Howitzer
                                                                                              203MM
                      188-220A                             188-220C                           Howitzer-Towed         All Subtypes                  105MM
             None                                None                                         105MM
             Scrambling Only                     Scrambling Only                              Howitzer-Towed         All Subtypes                  155MM
                                                                                              155MM
             FEC Only
             FEC + Scrambling                                                              Flash-to-Bang Time
             FEC + TDC
             FEC + TDC + Scrambling                                                            16. In the Flash-Bang Time field, tap      to increase/decrease the value of time
             Double FEC TDC                                                                        (in seconds) needed.
             xi)    Place a check mark in the Use Net Busy Delay field if you wish to
                    use the timing settings configured for the 188-200C network.               17. You may also tap                  to access the Flash to Bang Time
                                                                                                   screen. Using the available keypad, enter the amount of flash to bang time
             xii) When complete tap                .
                                                                                                    needed. When finished, tap            .
             xiii) When ready, tap               . You may be prompted to reset your
                    PFED device. Tap               to pass this message. DO NOT reset
                                                                                           Comments
                    the device at this time.
                                                                                               18. Tap                      to access the Text Entry screen to enter any remarks
        f.   If you selected the TACFIRE network (Figure 5-4):
                                                                                                    and/or damage information. When finished, tap              .
             i)     Tap in the Network Name field and enter a new name.
             ii)    In the Station ID field enter the address assigned to your unit.       Send, Save, Open Buttons
             iii)   Tap              to display the advanced TACFIRE Settings screen
                    (Figure 5-5).                                                              19. Tap          after reviewing your report for accuracy. This will queue the
                                                                                                   message for transmission.

                                                                                               20. Tap          to save the report request to persistent storage for later review
                                                                                                   and transmission.

                                                                                               21. Tap           to access a list of previously saved report requests.
                                                                                                    a.   To open a report request, tap on the request to select it then tap
                                                                                                                 .
                                                                                                    b.   To delete a report request, tap on the request to select it then tap
                                                                                                                 . The selected request will be removed immediately.


DRAFT                                      103                            March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                    168                               March 16, 2009
Chapter 7 - Reports                                             PFED User Manual      Chapter 5 - Communications                                               PFED User Manual

Caliber (Required)

The Caliber selection list will display only those choices that are associated with
the selected Weapon Type. The list shown here is a complete list of all possible
calibers for all Weapon Types.
    15. Tap and select a Caliber. The available options are dependent upon the
        selection of the Weapon Type and SubType:

       Weapon Type              Subtype                         Caliber
   Artillery             Unknown                     Unknown
                         Light                       Unknown, 45MM, 57MM,
                                                     70MM, 75MM, 76MM, 85MM,
                                                     88MM, 100MM, 105MM,
                                                     122MM
                         Medium                      Unknown, 130MM, 152MM,
                                                     155MM
                                                                                        Figure 5-4 TACLINK TACFIRE Setup                    Figure 5-5 TACFIRE Settings Advanced
                         Heavy                       Unknown, 175MM, 180MM,                           Screen                                               Screen
                                                     203MM/8 Inch Howitzer
   Mortar                Unknown                     Unknown                                        iv)   Tap and select the parameters according to your radio setup for
                         Light                       Unknown, 60MM, 81MM,                                 the Baud Rate, Mod(ulation), Network Access Delay (NAD) Hi
                                                     82MM                                                 Init(ial), Hi Sub(sequent), Lo Init(ial) and Lo Sub(sequent) and
                         Medium                      Unknown, 107MM/4.2 Inch                              the Error Correction.
                                                     Mortar, 120MM                                  v)    Notice the Key Time field is defaulted with the value of 0.7. If this
                         Heavy                       Unknown, 160MM                                       default value is not accurate, tap in the Key Time field and enter
                         Very Heavy                  Unknown, 240MM, 280MM                                the correct value using the available keypad. When complete, tap
   Rocket                All Subtypes are:           Unknown, 20MM, 45MM,                                          .
                         Unknown                     57MM, 60MM, 70MM, 75MM,
                         Light                       76MM, 80MM, 81MM, 82MM,              3.   When ready, tap              .
                         Medium                      85MM, 88MM, 90MM, 2.75
                         Heavy                       Inch/Airborne Rocket
                         Very Heavy                                                         : If corrections are needed tap on the network in the Comms list needing
                         Nuclear
                         Light Self Propel                                            adjustment, then tap       to access the Taclink Setup screen.
                         Medium Self Propel
                         Heavy Self Propel                                                4.   If needed, repeat step 2 above any number of times for additional
                         Very Heavy Self Propel                                                SINCGARS or Two-Wire networks.
                         Antipersonnel
                         Position                                                         5.   To activate a network in your device list:
   TACAIR, Surface To    All Subtypes                Unknown, 100MM, 105MM,                    a.   Tap on any SINCGARS or Two-Wire item in the Comms list then tap
   Surface Missile and                               106MM, 107MM/4.2 Inch
   MLRS                                              Mortar, 120MM, 122MM,                                to initialize the device.
                                                     130MM, 152MM, 155MM,
                                                     160MM, 175MM, 180MM,
                                                     203MM/8 Inch Howitzer,
                                                     237MM, 240MM, 260MM,
                                                     280MM
   Smoke, 5IN38,         All Subtypes                NO Available Calibers
   5IN54 and 16IN50
DRAFT                                   167                         March 16, 2009    DRAFT                                           104                          March 16, 2009
Chapter 5 - Communications                                                    PFED User Manual    Chapter 7 - Reports                                                   PFED User Manual

                                                                                                  Weapon Type/Subtype (Required)
                                                                                                       9.     For the [Weapon] field, tap and select a Weapon Type (see table under
               : Be aware that only one network may be activated at any one time. You must                    Caliber for available options).
                                                                                                       10. For the [Subtype] field, tap and select a weapon Subtype (see table
stop (     ) the connection of one network to activate another. To do so, first stop the                   under Caliber for available options).
active network then activate an alternate network. If the network needs to be restarted, tap
                                                                                                  Munitions
     .

     6.   Add a PLGR to your device list.                                                         The Munitions Type selection list will display only those munitions that are
                                                                                                  associated with the selected Weapon Type. The list shown here is a complete
          a.     Above the Sensors section, tap           (Figure 5-6).                           list of all possible munitions for all Weapon Types.
          b.     Tap on the PLGR option. This will be added to the Sensors list.
                                                                                                       11. To the left of the [Munition] field, tap   to increase/decrease the value of
                                                                                                           for the number of rounds.
          c.     Tap on the PLGR item in the list then tap        .
          d.     Check to make sure all connection information is set correctly:                       12. You may also tap         to access the Number of Rounds screen. Using the
                           Port Num = (refer to Table 3 for proper COM settings)                              available keypad, enter the number of rounds. When finished, tap             .
                           Baud Rate = 9600                                                            13. For the [Munition] field, tap    and select a Munitions Type.
                           Stop Bits = 1
                           Flow Control = None                                                                                         Munition Type
                           Data Bits = 8                                                                    Unknown          Smoke – Red  Riot Control            ICM Dual Purpose
                           Parity = None                                                                                                  Agent CS
                                                                                                            HE               Smoke –      Gas GB                  Antipersonnel Mine –
                     Embedded PLGR                      COM6                                                                 Yellow                               Long Delay
                     PLGR Models S & G                  COM6
                     PLGR Model C                       COM6                                                ICM              Smoke –         Gas H or HD          Antipersonnel Mine –
                                                                                                                             Violet                               Short Delay
                     PLGR With Cable Connection to the  COM1
                     bottom of the R-PDA                                                                    Antipersonnel    Smoke – HC      White                Antimaterial Mine –
                          Table 3 COM Settings When Using PLGR                                                                               Phosphorus WP        Long Delay

                                                                                                            Smoke – Green    Illumination    Mix HE and WP        Antimaterial Mine –
          e.     Change information as necessary then tap                 .                                                                                       Short Delay

          f.     Tap on the PLGR item in the list then tap   . This will initiate the
                 PLGR device and turn the indicator “green” ( ).                                  Nature of Fire
     7.   Add a Mark VII LRF to your device list.                                                      14. Tap and select a Nature of Fire of Adjustment, Fire For Effect or
                                                                                                           Harassing.

      : When configuring a Mark VII device for operation with PFED, you MUST set the
system to use PLGR CON.                                                                                 : When sending R5, SWB2 or SWB3 formatted messages, additional comments
                                                                                                  must be sent in voice mode. There is no access to a detailed comment block or field to
          a.     At the top, above Sensors tap        .                                           include these additional comments.

          b.     Tap on the Mark VII option. This will be added to the Sensors list.


          c.     Tap on the Mark VII item in the list then tap        .
DRAFT                                       105                                  March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                      166                            March 16, 2009
Chapter 7 - Reports                                                  PFED User Manual    Chapter 5 - Communications                                              PFED User Manual

                                                                                                   d.   Tap the first blank          to enter the minimum Range Gate value.
                                                                                                        Enter the value in the displayed screen then tap                .

                                                                                                   e.   Tap the second blank               to enter the maximum Range Gate
                                                                                                        value. Enter the value in the displayed screen then tap                 .


                                                                                                : When configuring an LRF device, it is recommended that a beginning and ending
                                                                                         Range Gate value be entered. This range, in meters, will designate the LRF devices
                                                                                         receiving boundaries. If an LRF device receives a value that falls outside its boundary, the
                                                                                         message “Bad LRF Data” will be displayed.

                                                                                                   f.   When using the serial communication verify the following:
                                                                                                                   Port Num = COM1
                                                                                                                   Baud Rate = 9600
                                                                                                                   Stop Bits = 1
   Figure 7-32 Shelling Report Screen          Figure 7-33 Weapon Direction Screen                                 Flow Control = None
                                                                                                                   Data Bits = 8
    3.   Use the available keypad to enter a value for the weapons direction. When                                 Parity = None
         finished, tap        .
    4.   Tap    and select a measurement for the Weapon Direction.                                 g.   Change any information as necessary then tap                .

Detection Method (Required)                                                                        h.   Tap in the Mark VII item in the Sensors list then tap       .
                                                                                              8.   Add a Leica 4/21A/21B to your device list.
    5.   Tap    and select a Detection Method of Flash, Sound or Groove.
                                                                                                   a.   At the top above Sensors tap           (Figure 5-6).
Start of Strike/End of Strike Time
                                                                                                   b.   On the Device Select screen tap on the Leica (4/21A/21B) option. This
                                                                                                        will be added to the Sensors list.
The Start of Strike/End of Strike Time field is pre-filled with the current system
date and time data. However, this may be changed if needed.
                                                                                                   c.   Tap on the Leica (4/21A/21B) item in the list then tap              .

    6.   Tap          to access the Date/Time Entry screen. Using     , enter the                  d.   Tap the first blank         to enter the minimum Range Gate value.
         desired start time of strike. When finished, tap        .                                      Enter the value in the displayed screen then tap                .

                                                                                                   e.   Tap the second blank            to enter the maximum Range Gate value.
    7.   Tap          to access the Date/Time Entry screen. Using     , enter the
                                                                                                        Enter the value in the displayed screen then tap                .
         desired end time of strike. When finished, tap         .
                                                                                                   f.   Do the following to configure the Leica under a serial connection:
Location (Required)                                                                                     i)    On the Configure Device screen (Figure 5-7), make sure the Serial
    8.   Refer to section 8.2.1.1 – Location Entry for information on completing the                          Cable option is selected and tap           .
         Location information.                                                                          ii)   Verify the following configuration:
                                                                                                                   Port Num = COM1
                                                                                                                   Baud Rate = 9600
                                                                                                                   Stop Bits = 1
                                                                                                                   Flow Control = None
DRAFT                                    165                            March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                       106                                March 16, 2009
Chapter 5 - Communications                                                PFED User Manual       Chapter 7 - Reports                                                     PFED User Manual

                            Data Bits = 8                                                        Send, Save, Open Buttons
                            Parity = None

               iii)   Change any information as necessary then tap                .                   13. Tap         after reviewing your report for accuracy. This will queue the
                                                                                                          message for transmission.
               iv)    Tap           to return to the Device Setup screen.
                                                                                                      14. Tap          to save the report request to persistent storage for later review
               v)     Tap in the Leica (4/21A/21B) item in the Sensors list then tap        .             and transmission.
                      This will initiate the Leica device and turn the indicator “green” ( ).
          g.   Do the following to configure the Leica under a Bluetooth connection:                  15. Tap             to access a list of previously saved report requests.
                                                                                                           a.    To open a report request, tap on the request to select it then tap
                                                                                                                         .
      : The capability of configuring a device for Bluetooth communications is dependant
upon what build of the PFED software was provided. If the About screen contains the build                  b.    To delete a report request, tap on the request to select it then tap
number followed by No BT, then this step will not apply.
                                                                                                                         . The selected request will be removed immediately.

                                                                                                           c.    To delete all requests, tap         .
                                                                                                           d.    To exit the Open Report/Request screen, tap        at the top right.
            : Declination in the Leica MUST be set to 0.0 to insure data integrity.
1. To verify/reset the declination to 0:
                                                                                                 7.2.7     Shelling Report
    a. Click the left (Azimuth) key 3 times in rapid succession.
    b. “deCL 0” should be displayed on the screen.                                               PFED will transmit all Shelling reports with a priority of Routine. When a
                                                                                                 device is set in FiST mode, the Shelling reports may be forwarded to up to 4
2. If there is a value entered for declination (a number other than “0” is displayed):
      a. Click the left (Azimuth) key 5 times in rapid succession. “Unit Sett” will display on   other recipients on the tactical network after being reviewed or not reviewed.
      the screen.
      b. Click the right button once.
      c. Click the left (Azimuth) key 5 times. “Stor” will display on the screen.                     1.   Tap                  from the Reports/Requests screen. The Shelling
      d. Click the left (Azimuth) key 5 times in rapid succession.                                         Report screen will display (Figure 7-32).
      e. Click the right button until the units are “6400 SI-U”.
      f. Click the left (Azimuth) key 5 times in rapid succession. “Stor” will display on the
      screen.
                                                                                                         : Some fields will require the use of the system keypad that appears on the bottom
                                                                                                 half of the screen. If this keypad does not disappear automatically for you, you may need

                                                                                                 to tap the keypad (   ) found at the very bottom right of the screen. This will remove the
       : When configuring an LRF device, it is recommended that a beginning and ending           keypad from your display and allow access to any fields or buttons that may have been
Range Gate value be entered. This range, in meters, will designate the LRF devices               hidden.
receiving boundaries. If an LRF device receives a value that falls outside its boundary, the
message “Bad LRF Data” will be displayed.
                                                                                                 Weapon Direction
               i)     On the Configure Device screen tap            to enter the Select
                      Connection screen and highlight the Bluetooth option. This will                 2.   Tap               to access the Weapon Direction screen (Figure 7-33).
                      display the Destination Address (Figure 5-8).

               ii)    Tap                to go to the Edit Bluetooth Address screen
                      (Figure 5-9) and enter the Bluetooth Destination Address of the
                      Leica. This address should be found on the Leica device.

               iii)   Tap           twice to return to the Configure Device screen.
DRAFT                                        107                              March 16, 2009     DRAFT                                         164                           March 16, 2009
Chapter 7 - Reports                                                    PFED User Manual     Chapter 5 - Communications                                              PFED User Manual

         c.    To modify the Ready, Damage and Destroy fields of an existing listed                       iv)     If this device was perviously configured with a Serial connection,
               item, tap on the listed entry, modify the Ready, Damage and Destroy                                you first must remove this configuration before you can save and
                                                                                                                  activate the Bluetooth setup. Tap the Serial Cable option under
               fields then tap          .
                                                                                                                  the Connections list and tap           .
         d.    To remove a listed entry, tap on the listed entry to select it then tap
                                                                                                          v)      Tap           to return to the Device Setup screen (Figure 5-1).
                         .
         e.    To exit the screen and return to the Unit Status Report screen, tap
                         .

Unit Geometry

The unit geometry approximates the physical size, span and density of your unit.

Length (Required)

    6.   Tap           to access the Length screen. Use the available keypad to
         enter an approximate value of the length-wise span of your unit. When
         finished, tap           .
    7.   Tap     and select a measurement for the Length field.

Width (Required)
                                                                                                    Figure 5-6 Device Select Screen               Figure 5-7 Configure Device
    8.   Tap           to access the Width screen. Use the available keypad to                                                                          Screen - Serial
         enter an approximate value of the width-wise span of your unit. When
         finished, tap           .
    9.   Tap     and select a measurement for the Width field.

Formation/Heading/Posture
    10. Tap      and select a Formation option.
    11. Tap      and select a Heading option.
    12. Tap      and select a Posture option.

               Formation                    Heading              Posture
         Column                      N (north)             Dismounted
         Line                        S (south)             Mounted
         Other                       E (east)
                                     W (west)
                                     NE (north east)
                                                                                                                Figure 5-8 Configure Connection Screen - Bluetooth
                                     SE (south east)
                                     NW (north west)                                                      vi)     On the Leica device, click the left (Azimuth) key 6 times in rapid
                                     SW (south west)                                                              succession. “IF Sett” will display for a short time, followed by the
                                                                                                                  current interface setting selected for the Leica.

DRAFT                                        163                           March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                       108                             March 16, 2009
Chapter 5 - Communications                                            PFED User Manual       Chapter 7 - Reports                                                  PFED User Manual

             vii) Click the right button until “bt PC CON” is displayed.
             viii) Click the left (Azimuth) key 6 times in rapid succession. “Stor”
                   should be displayed. If it is not, begin again at step v 2 steps
                   above. After “Stor” is displayed, “bt pair” will be displayed.
             ix)   On the PFED device, make sure the Leica (4/21A/21B) option is
                   highlighted then tap     .
             x)    This will initiate the Leica device and turn the indicator “green” ( ).
             xi)   On the Leica device, click the right button once then “bt end”
                   should be displayed.
             xii) Perform a laze with the Leica by pressing both buttons at once and
                  releasing. The distance and direction to the target should be
                  displayed. “bt stdby” should then display and PFED should
                  receive the data (Figure 5-10). If the Leica displays “bt fail” refer
                  to section B.5).
             xiii) With every laze, there will be a warning prompt (Figure 5-11).
                   Make sure that no declination is set within the Leica before               Figure 7-29 Unit Status Report Screen          Figure 7-30 Personnel Status Table
                   accepting any data.                                                                                                                     Screen

             xiv) Tap              to accept the data.




                                                                                                                     Figure 7-31 Platforms Status Screen

   Figure 5-9 Edit Bluetooth Address              Figure 5-10 Lazed Data Received                     a.   To enter a new item, tap     . Tap on the Platform, Ready,
                Screen                                                                                     Damage(d) and Destroy(ed) fields and enter the information using the
                                                                                                           available keypad. When finished, tap           .
                                                                                                      b.   If you have many entries to make that are similar, you can tap on the
                                                                                                           listed entry that is similar, change the value in the Platform field (make
                                                                                                           changes to the other fields as needed), then tap          . This will
                                                                                                           create a new entry.


DRAFT                                     109                             March 16, 2009     DRAFT                                    162                             March 16, 2009
Chapter 7 - Reports                                                PFED User Manual      Chapter 5 - Communications                                            PFED User Manual


         c.    To delete all requests, tap         .
         d.    To exit the Open Report/Request screen, tap     at the top right.

7.2.6    Unit Status Report
The Unit Status Report is used to convey information on unit composition,
geometry and status. PFED will transmit all Unit Status reports with a priority
of Routine.


    1.   Tap                 from the Reports/Requests screen. The Unit Status
         Report screen will display (Figure 7-29).

Unit Composition

The Unit Composition section of this report screen has two tables: Personnel                                    Figure 5-11 Warning Declination Prompt
and Platform Types.
                                                                                             9.   Add any other sensor devices needed by repeating step 7 or 8.
    2.   Tap              to access the Personnel Status Table screen (Figure 7-30)          10. To delete any Comms or Sensor device:
         to adjust the number of personnel that are On Hand, MIA (missing in                      a.   Select the item you wish to remove.
         action), WIA (wounded in action), and KIA (killed in action) in your unit.
    3.   Tap on each of the options listed in the table and use the available keypad              b.   Tap         to remove the device.
         to enter the number of personnel for that selected item.
                                                                                             11. Save all settings by tapping              until you have returned to the Main
    4.   When finished, tap           .                                                          PFED screen.

    5.   Tap               to access the Platforms Status screen (Figure 7-31).              12. Exit PFED by tapping          and Exit.
                                                                                             13. If the system prompted you to reboot the handheld to enable the
                                                                                                 communications network, perform a Soft Reset and restart PFED (refer to
                                                                                                 section 3.3.1 Soft Reset) at this time.


                                                                                               : The light next to each device does NOT indicate success or failure of PFED
                                                                                         connectivity with the device. These icons are used to denote that a device should be
                                                                                         turned on. Check your Communications Status screen to verify connectivity and refer to
                                                                                         Appendix B TROUBLESHOOTING if you encounter problems.

                                                                                         5.1.2    Address/Unit List Setup
                                                                                         The Address/Unit List stores information about other users whom you may
                                                                                         communicate with using your handheld. This feature may be accessed while in
                                                                                         the Message screen or through the Address/Unit List setup.




DRAFT                                        161                        March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                     110                             March 16, 2009
Chapter 5 - Communications                                                 PFED User Manual         Chapter 7 - Reports                                                  PFED User Manual

                                                                                                                  Rocket                         Subsurface
       : To complete the unit list information accurately, data should be obtained from the                       ADM
unit TACSOP.
                                                                                                    Flash-to-Bang Time – Nuclear Only
5.1.2.1 Units Configuration
                                                                                                        17. In the Flash-Bang Time field, tap        to increase/decrease the value of time
     1.     From the Main PFED screen, tap           , then Address/Unit List (Figure                       needed.
            5-12).
                                                                                                        18. You may also tap                  to access the Flash to Bang Time screen
     2.     Tap         .                                                                                   (Figure 7-28). Using the available keypad, enter the amount of flash to bang
                                                                                                             time needed. When finished, tap             .

      : You may also modify and delete existing units by selecting one, or selecting all

with the           , and tapping          ,         . To unselect all units, tap          . You

may also send the Imagery information by tapping              .

     3.     If needed, tap the           tab. This will display the Unit – New Unit screen
            (Figure 5-13).




                                                                                                                               Figure 7-28 Flash to Bang Time Screen


                                                                                                    Send, Save, Open Buttons

                                                                                                        19. Tap         after reviewing your report for accuracy. This will queue the
                                                                                                            message for transmission.

                                                                                                        20. Tap         to save the report request to persistent storage for later review
          Figure 5-12 Unit List Screen               Figure 5-13 Unit – New Unit Screen                     and transmission.
                                                          (without Messages tab)
                                                                                                        21. Tap            to access a list of previously saved report requests.
     4.     Tap the Location Unknown button at the top to enter a location for this unit
            address (refer to section 8.2.1.1 – Location Entry for information on                            a.   To open a report request, tap on the request to select it then tap
            completing the Location field).
                                                                                                                           .
     5.     Using the available keypad, enter a unique call sign name for a new address
            in the Call Sign field. This field is stored locally on the PFED device. This                    b.   To delete a report request, tap on the request to select it then tap
            name may be anything the operator chooses if not given by the TACSOP.
                                                                                                                           . The selected request will be removed immediately.
     6.     In the Unit Name field, enter a value for this information.

DRAFT                                         111                                  March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                      160                           March 16, 2009
Chapter 7 - Reports                                                  PFED User Manual    Chapter 5 - Communications                                           PFED User Manual

    11. When finished, tap           .                                                       7.   In the URN field, enter the URN for this unit. This field has a maximum
                                                                                                  length of 8 digits.


                                                                                               : To associate a URN to a Call Sign, simply add a URN and Call Sign without
                                                                                         assigning it to a net.

                                                                                             8.   Also enter a value for the ID field.
                                                                                             9.   Tap to the right of the Service, Role and Echelon fields to select the
                                                                                                  appropriate values (see table of selections in section 4.4.6 step 5).
                                                                                             10. Tap      to the right of the System Type field to select the appropriate value.

                                                                                             11. Tap          to display the Laser Information screen (Figure 4-35 – refer to
                                                                                                 section 4.4.6 step 7).

                                                                                             12. Tap      to display the Platform Types screen. Refer to section 8.2.1 CFF
                                                                                                 (Screen 1) – Target Description for completing the Platform Type
                                                                                                 information.

                           Figure 7-27 Cloud Data Screen                                 5.1.2.2 Network Information

Start/End Attack Time (Required) – Biological and Chemical Only                          When a device is configured as an FO or a FiST unit, the operator may designate
                                                                                         a unit address in his/her list as being their direct report, or primary. This will
The Start of Attack/End of Attack Time fields are generally pre-filled with the          ensure that the designated primary unit will be sent all fire support messages,
current system date and time data. However, these may also be changed if                 including initial calls for fire, subsequent adjustments and end of missions. The
needed.                                                                                  operator may also specify other units as being either the direct or indirect
                                                                                         address on the tactical network. When a unit is specified as direct, PFED will
                                                                                         allow the operator to specify the unit’s network address that will be used for
    12. Tap              to access the Date/Time Entry screen. Using      , enter the    sending messages to this unit. When a unit is specified as indirect through
         desired start of attack time. When finished, tap        .                       another unit, PFED will compose messages with the remote unit’s URN
                                                                                         included in the recipient list of the message and sent to the routing unit’s
    13. Tap              to access the Date/Time Entry screen. Using      , enter the    network address.
         desired end of attack time. When finished, tap          .
    14. Tap the appropriate option for the needed Agent Type.                            When a device is configured as a FiST unit, the system will allow the operator to
                                                                                         designate units other than the primary to be subordinate units (units that report
Delivery Means (Required)                                                                directly to them). Routing and updating modes of Review, Automatic and FR
                                                                                         Approval may also be specified for these subordinate units.
    15. Tap     and select a Delivery Means.
                                                                                             1.   Tap the          tab to display the Unit - Nets screen (Figure 5-14).
Burst Type (Required)
                                                                                             2.   If you wish to set this unit as the primary recipient, tap I report directly to
    16. Tap     and select a Burst Type.                                                          this Unit (Primary) to check it. You may only set ONE unit as the primary
                                                                                                  message recipient. If the device is configured as a Fire Support Team, Fire
                   Delivery Means                   Burst Type                                    Support Element or Fire Support Officer, there will be an option to indicate
            Aircraft (default)             Air (default)                                          This Unit reports directly to me. If checked, this unit will be made
            Missile                        Surface                                                available as a Subordinate Unit.

DRAFT                                    159                            March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                     112                            March 16, 2009
Chapter 5 - Communications                                            PFED User Manual      Chapter 7 - Reports                                                   PFED User Manual

     3.   If the network you wish to select for this unit is displayed in red, this
          indicates that the network is not yet configured for the unit. Select the
          network and tap                   to setup its configuration for the current
          unit.


      : To ONLY delete a networks associated data tap                    .




      : In the Unit - Nets screen, note the different colors displayed to the left of the
available networks. When selecting a network for a unit, you may choose any available
connection. However, only one may be active at any one time. A green ( ) icon indicates
the network that is active. The blue ( ) icon indicates the network is not yet activated.

     4.   This will display the Connection Setup screen. Based on what network type
          the selection has been configured, 188-220A/188-220C or TACFIRE, will
          depend upon which screen appears (Figure 5-15 or Figure 5-16).                     Figure 7-25 NBC1 – Biological Screen         Figure 7-26 NBC1 – Chemical Screen
     5.   For the 188-220A/188-220C network type, enter the Station Address and
          the IP Address for the unit on this network.
                                                                                            Location (Required)
     6.   For the TACFIRE network type, enter the Station Address that corresponds
          to the unit on this network.
                                                                                            The Location field is generally pre-filled with the operator’s current location
     7.   For any selected network, select a message format type of R5, SWB2 or             data. However, this may be changed if needed.
          SWB3.
                                                                                                3.   Refer to section 8.2.1.1 – Location Entry for information on completing the
                                                                                                     Location information.
                                                                                                4.   Tap the appropriate button option for the needed Location Type.
                                                                                                5.   Tap the appropriate button option for the needed Event Type.

                                                                                            Detonation Time (Required) – Nuclear Only

                                                                                            The Detonation Time is automatically pre-filled with the current system date and
                                                                                            time. However, this also may be changed if needed.

                                                                                                6.   Tap                 to access the Date/Time Entry screen. Using      , enter
                                                                                                     the desired detonation time. When finished, tap          .

                                                                                                7.   Tap              to access the Cloud Data screen (Figure 7-27).
                                                                                                8.   Tap the appropriate button to select the Measure Cloud From either from
     Figure 5-14 Unit - Nets Screen              Figure 5-15 188-220A/188-220C Net                   Top or Bottom.
                                                            Setup Screen                        9.   Using the available keypad, enter values for the Stabilized Height, Angular
                                                                                                     Height and the Width fields.
                                                                                                10. Tap and select the measurement values for the Stabilized Height,
                                                                                                    Angular Height and the Width fields (i.e., m = Meters, mil G = mils G, etc).

DRAFT                                     113                             March 16, 2009    DRAFT                                   158                              March 16, 2009
Chapter 7 - Reports                                                   PFED User Manual       Chapter 5 - Communications                                             PFED User Manual


          c.   To delete all requests, tap         .
          d.   To exit the Open Report/Request screen, tap       at the top right.

7.2.5     NBC 1 Report
The NBC 1 Report (Observer’s Report) option allows you to report a Nuclear,
Biological or Chemical attack. When a device is set in FiST mode, the NBC
reports may be forwarded to up to 4 other recipients on the tactical network after
being reviewed or not reviewed.


       : Some FOS versions do not correctly process the transmission of NBC 1 Reports.
When AFATDS receives this report, it does not correctly parse the Location information and
displays it incorrectly. It is recommended that the operator transmit a Freetext message
following the transmission of an NBC 1 Report identifying the correct grid coordinate
information.                                                                                  Figure 5-16 TACFIRE Net Setup Screen                Figure 5-17 Transmit Indirect

                                                                                                 8.   To specify this unit as a Direct address on the network, the Direct indicator
     1.   Tap                 from the Reports/Requests screen. The NBC 1 Report                      should be displayed (Figure 5-15). This setting is the default for all units, so
          screen will display (Figure 7-23).                                                          nothing will need to be changed.
                                                                                                 9.   If you wish to specify this unit as an Indirect address on the network, tap
     2.   Tapping              ,                or               will access the
          NBC1 – Nuclear screen (Figure 7-24), NBC1 – Biological screen (Figure                                  to change it to             and display a
          7-25) or NBC1- Chemical screen (Figure 7-26).
                                                                                                                                             field (Figure 5-17).
                                                                                                 10. To select which unit you wish to route this unit through, tap
                                                                                                                                             . This will display the Unit List Selection
                                                                                                      screen (Figure 6-2).
                                                                                                 11. Place a check mark in the box to the left of the unit you wish to designate as
                                                                                                      the routing unit then tap          to return to the Connection Setup screen.

                                                                                                 12. Tap            twice to return to the Unit List screen.
                                                                                                 13. To create other units for the same or other networks, repeat the steps in
                                                                                                     sections 5.1.2.1 and 5.1.2.2 as many times as needed.

                                                                                             5.1.2.3 Message Configuration
                                                                                             When the operator has configured the handheld with a Role of Fire Support
                                                                                             Officer, Fire Support Element or Fire Support Team, the Unit List screen
                                                                                             will allow (Figure 5-18) the customization of the routing/relaying and Messages
    Figure 7-23 NBC1 Report Screen                 Figure 7-24 NBC1 - Nuclear Screen         of Interest (MOI). When in this mode the operator may; 1) specify certain
                                                                                             messages to be sent to another system when received from a specific unit after it
                                                                                             has been reviewed or not reviewed; 2) specify a message to be copied and sent
                                                                                             to another system(s) when it has been received from a specific unit; 3)
                                                                                             view/edit/forward/deny/create messages that have been received from a specific
DRAFT                                        157                          March 16, 2009     DRAFT                                     114                              March 16, 2009
Chapter 5 - Communications                                            PFED User Manual      Chapter 7 - Reports                                                     PFED User Manual

unit. All, or some, of these procedures may be performed with the following
                                                                                                19. Tap        to access the Text Entry screen to enter the National Stock
message types; On Call Fire Commands, Subsequent Adjust, Message to                                 Number (NSN) or description by using the available keypad. When finished,
Observer (MTO), EOM, FSCM, AirCrew Brief, Observer Notifications of Shot,
                                                                                                     tap          .
Splash and Roudns Complete, Check Firing, CFF, Observer Coordinates
(OBCO), NBC1, MEDEVAC, and Free Text.                                                           20. Tap                   to access the Text Entry screen to enter the Nomenclature
                                                                                                     description by using the available keypad. When finished, tap                   .
     1.   Tap the               tab to display the Unit - Messages screen (Figure
          5-19).                                                                                21. Tap                   to access the Text Entry screen to enter an End Item
     2.   To route messages to alternate Units, tap                      and place a                 description using the available keypad. When finished, tap                  .
          check mark to the left of any and all units. When complete, tap               .       22. Tap                     to access the Quantity screen. Use the available keypad
     3.   To route a text copy to alternate Units, tap                   and place a                 to enter the desired quantity. When finished, tap              .
          check mark to the left of any and all units. When complete, tap               .       23. Tap                     to access the Priority screen. Use the available keypad to
                                                                                                     enter the priority value. When finished, tap             .
       : The Review Type and Update Type field’s allows the operator to configure the
                                                                                                24. When finished with the Class IX Supplies screen, tap                .
system to require that all messages are to be reviewed before routing the message, or
updating any system information (refer to section 6.4 Receiving Messages (Inbox) for
further information).                                                                       Transportation Helicopter Support Team (HST)
     4.   Tap      to select a Review Type of Auto, FR Approval or Review.
                                                                                                25. Tap              to access the Text Entry screen to enter the
     5.   Tap      to select an Update Type of Auto or Review.                                      Transportation/Helicopter Support Team information using the available
     6.   To specifically customize the routing of all transmissions by message type,                keypad. When finished, tap                 .
          tap                     . This will display a list of all message types (Figure
          5-20).                                                                            Send, Save, Open Buttons

                                                                                                26. Tap         after reviewing your report for accuracy. This will queue the
                                                                                                    message for transmission.


                                                                                                    : If the Resupply Request message is too large for transmission, a pop-up message
                                                                                            will alert you to remove a specific amount of text. It is recommended that you begin
                                                                                            removing the stated amount of characters from the Trans/Hst and/or the Eng Spt text
                                                                                            fields. These fields may be easiest to re-write or narrow down. Try transmitting the
                                                                                            message again once the noted amount of characters have been removed.

                                                                                                27. Tap         to save the report request to persistent storage for later review
                                                                                                    and transmission.

                                                                                                28. Tap               to access a list of previously saved report requests.
                                                                                                     a.    To open a report request, tap on the request to select it then tap
                                                                                                                      .
Figure 5-18 Unit – New Unit Screen (with         Figure 5-19 Unit - Messages Screen
                                                                                                     b.    To delete a report request, tap on the request to select it then tap
             Messages tab)
                                                                                                                      . The selected request will be removed immediately.
DRAFT                                     115                             March 16, 2009    DRAFT                                         156                           March 16, 2009
Chapter 7 - Reports                                                   PFED User Manual     Chapter 5 - Communications                                           PFED User Manual

Class IX Supplies


      : If both the NSN and Nomen fields are filled for the Supply Identification Type,
the system will will only send out the NSN data.

     18. Tap                 to access the Class IX Supplies screen (Figure 7-22).




                                                                                                                      Figure 5-20 Custom Setup Screen

                                                                                                 7.   Tap on each message type to select it, then tap either                 or
                                                                                                                      and select the Unit(s) this message type will be transmitted.

                                                                                                 8.   When complete, tap           .

                                                                                           5.2        COMMUNICATIONS STATUS
 Figure 7-20 Medical Nomenclature List           Figure 7-21 Maintenance Contact Screen
                Screen
                                                                                           The Communications Status screen is used to provide quick access in viewing
                                                                                           the status of the sensors and communication devices configured on your PFED
                                                                                           handheld. When the toolbar icon displays the “     ” symbol, this indicates that
                                                                                           the communication network is connected and functional. If the toolbar displays
                                                                                           the “ ” symbol, this informs the operator that there may be a problem with the
                                                                                           active network connection.
                                                                                                 1.   To open the Communications Status screen (Figure 5-22 and Figure 5-23),
                                                                                                      tap     or    in the command bar at the bottom (Figure 5-21).




                         Figure 7-22 Class IX Supplies Screen



DRAFT                                      155                            March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                       116                         March 16, 2009
Chapter 5 - Communications                                        PFED User Manual      Chapter 7 - Reports                                                      PFED User Manual

                                                                                        Medical Supplies
                     Communication
                        Status                                                               14. Tap               to access the Medical Supply List screen (Figure 7-20).
                                                                                                 This nomenclature screen allows the entry of specific medical supplies
                                                                                                 needed.

                                                                                                  a.   To enter a new list item, tap       . Tap on the Nomen and Qty fields
  Figure 5-21 Communications Status                                                                    and enter the information using the available keypads. When finished,
                Button
                                                                                                       tap           .
                                                                                                  b.   If you have many entries to make that are similar, you can tap on the
                                              Figure 5-22 Communications Status                        listed entry that is similar, change the value in the Nomen field, then tap
                                                            Screen
                                                                                                               . This will create a new entry.
                                                                                                  c.   To modify the quantity of an existing item, tap on the listed entry,
                                                                                                       modify the Qty information only then tap              .
                                                                                                  d.   To remove a listed entry, tap on the listed entry to select it then tap
                                                                                                               .
                                                                                                  e.   To exit the screen and return to the Rapid Resupply Request screen,
                                                                                                       tap           .

                                                                                        Maintenance Contact Team

                                                                                             15. Tap              to access the Maintenance Contact Team screen (Figure
                                                                                                 7-21). Tap any of the available options listed on this screen to select it.
                   Figure 5-23 Communications Status with Data
                                                                                             : Only one item may be selected. If more items need to be specified, it is
5.2.1    Device Status Information                                                      recommended the operator add this information in the Description field.

The device shown in the Communications Status window contains an icon                        16. Tap               to access a Text Entry screen where you may enter a
indicator denoting whether the device is operable. At any time, you may tap
                                                                                                  description of the maintenance required. When finished, tap                 twice
         to view what these icons are indicating for each device. Tapping                         if needed.
         will remove the legend information.
                                                                                        Engineering Support
    1.   To view detailed status information, tap on the device name in the list. The
         textual information shown below the list will change depending on the device        17. Tap                     to access the Text Entry screen to enter a description of
         selected. For example, when you tap on the PLGR option (Figure 5-24),
         you will see the Sat Vis, Sat Used, Almanac Age and Key State information                the engineering support required. When finished, tap                .
         for that device.




DRAFT                                   117                           March 16, 2009    DRAFT                                         154                            March 16, 2009
Chapter 7 - Reports                                                   PFED User Manual      Chapter 5 - Communications                                             PFED User Manual




                                                                                                                  Figure 5-24 PLGR Legend/Status Information


  Figure 7-18 Fuel Nomenclature List            Figure 7-19 Batteries Nomenclature List           2.   You can also tap        to expand the screen and monitor communications
                Screen                                          Screen                                 traffic (Figure 5-23). Certain events are posted to this screen and messages
                                                                                                       are displayed during transmission and receipt of data.
         a.   To enter a new list item, tap       . Tap on the Nomen and Qty fields         5.2.2      Resetting a Device
              and enter the information using the available keypads. When finished,
              tap         .                                                                       1.   Tap on a listed device (Figure 5-25). This will display a     (reset) option.
         b.   If you have many entries to make that are similar, you can tap on the               2.   If the device was disconnected for a short time and PFED shows the device
              listed entry that is similar, change the value in the Nomen field, then tap
                                                                                                       as not operable, the operator may reset the connection by tapping       .
                      . This will create a new entry.
         c.   To modify the quantity of an existing item, tap on the listed entry,
              modify the Qty information only then tap           .
         d.   To remove a listed entry, tap on the listed entry to select it then tap
                      .
         e.   To exit the screen and return to the Rapid Resupply Request screen,
              tap         .

7.2.4.2 Rapid Resupply Request (Screen 2)
                                                                                                             Figure 5-25 Communications Status Device Selection
The supply items listed on the second screen may be requested for echelons
above squad level.                                                                          5.3        TRANSMISSION STATUS
    13. Tap     .
                                                                                            Once a message is sent from PFED it is added to a list called the transmission
                                                                                            queue. This queue is a cumulative list of messages sent from your device along
                                                                                            with their transmission status. For example, the message may be waiting in the
                                                                                            transmission queue, in the process of being sent, has already been sent, or the
DRAFT                                     153                             March 16, 2009    DRAFT                                      118                            March 16, 2009
Chapter 5 - Communications                                             PFED User Manual       Chapter 7 - Reports                                                   PFED User Manual

transmission could have failed. A failed transmission could be due to a number                         d.   To remove a listed entry, tap on the listed entry to select it then tap
of factors such as an overburdened network or loose hardware connections. The                                       .
Transmission Queue screen (Figure 5-27) allows the operator to abort, defer,
retry or transmit data to a new unit.                                                                  e.   To exit the screen and return to the Rapid Resupply Request screen,
                                                                                                            tap         .
5.3.1     Accessing Transmission Queue
                                                                                              Fuel
     1.   Tap on the satellite icon (    ) at the bottom as shown in Figure 5-26.
                                                                                                  11. Tap            to access the Fuel Supply List screen (Figure 7-18). A
     2.   The Transmission Queue screen will appear (Figure 5-27). From this
                                                                                                      nomenclature list will be shown.
          screen you can view a list of transmitted messages, or perform a function on
          a message. Simply tap on a message shown in the list and tap one of the
                                                                                                       a.   To enter a new list item, tap       . Tap on the Nomen and Qty fields
          buttons provided.
                                                                                                            and enter the information using the available keypads. When finished,
                                                                                                            tap         .
                       Transmission
                          Queue                                                                        b.   If you have many entries to make that are similar, you can tap on the
                                                                                                            listed entry that is similar, change the value in the Nomen field, then
                                                                                                            tap         . This will create a new entry.
                                                                                                       c.   To modify the quantity of an existing item, tap on the listed entry,
Figure 5-26 Transmission Queue Button                                                                       modify the Qty information only then tap           .
                                                                                                       d.   To remove a listed entry, tap on the listed entry to select it then tap
                                                                                                                    .
                                                                                                       e.   To exit the screen and return to the Rapid Resupply Request screen,
                                                                                                            tap         .
                                                 Figure 5-27 Transmission Queue Screen

                                                                                              Batteries
The list is divided into three columns, Message, To and Status. The Message
column lists the type of message being transmitted (i.e., Free Text, CFF, NBC1,
etc). To the left of the message type will be an icon depicting the status of the                 12. Tap              to access the Batteries Supply List screen (Figure 7-19). A
                                                                                                      nomenclature list will be shown.
message. The icons can be interpreted as stated in Table 4.

If any of the status text is hidden, use the horizontal scroll at the bottom of the
list to view the rest of the description.


         : PFED contains two (2) CFF mission buffers that act as holding areas for “active”
missions that are waiting for transmission, or in the process of transmission. The first
buffer processes Immediate missions only. The second buffer processes all mission types
including Immediate missions. One buffer must complete a transmission before the other
may begin a transmission.




DRAFT                                      119                             March 16, 2009     DRAFT                                     152                             March 16, 2009
Chapter 7 - Reports                                                  PFED User Manual     Chapter 5 - Communications                                               PFED User Manual



                                                                                                   : Immediate Smoke/Suppression missions are processed before any other
                                                                                          mission type. However, since PFED contains two (2) mission buffers, only two Immediate
                                                                                          missions may be “active” at the same time as long as both buffers are empty. If the second
                                                                                          buffer contains a different type of mission, the new Immediate mission will be placed in a
                                                                                          “wait” state. This is indicated in the Fire Mission Monitor by an hourglass ( ) icon and a
                                                                                          status of “Waiting for free active buffer…”. Once the second buffer has completed
                                                                                          transmission, the new Immediate mission will be activated.


                                                                                                    Icon             Status                             Meaning
                                                                                                                                    Queued in the system buffer and awaiting
                                                                                                              Queued
                                                                                                                                    transmission.
                                                                                                              Deferred              Transmission has been deferred.
                                                                                                                                    Being transmitted and is waiting for an
                                                                                                              Waiting for ACK       Acknowledgement (ACK) from the destination
                                                                                               (yellow)       (Attempt #)           unit. The number depicts the number of attempts
    Figure 7-15 MRE's Entry Screen                 Figure 7-16 Water Entry Screen
                                                                                                                                    that have been made.

                                                                                                              Received              The message was received.
                                                                                               (green)
                                                                                                                                    Transmission was attempted 3 times, the
                                                                                                                                    maximum number of retries. An
                                                                                                              Failed
                                                                                                    (red)                           acknowledgement was not received from the
                                                                                                                                    destination unit.
                                                                                                                                    The transmission failed immediately possibly due
                                                                                                              Failed
                                                                                                    (red)                           to equipment problem.

                                                                                                              Recipient unable      The message that PFED attempted to send was
                                                                                              (red yield)     to process            unable to be processed by the recipient.
                                                                                                                       Table 4 Transmission Status Indicators



                                                                                               : The       toolbar icon is replaced with any of the above icons showing the
                                                                                          Transmission Status of the current message being processed.

                      Figure 7-17 Ammo Nomenclature List Screen
                                                                                          5.3.1.1 Aborting a Transmission
         a.   To enter a new list item, tap       . Tap on the Nomen and Qty fields       No matter what state a message is in, it is possible to abort it and remove it from
              and enter the information using the available keypads. When finished,
                                                                                          the queue list.
              tap          .
                                                                                               1.      Tap on the message to select it.
         b.   If you have many entries to make that are similar, you can tap on the
              listed entry that is similar, change the value in the Nomen field, then          2.      Tap                 . The message will be aborted and removed from the
              tap          . This will create a new entry.                                             queue list.

         c.   To modify the quantity of an existing item, tap on the listed entry,
              modify the Qty information only then tap           .

DRAFT                                     151                            March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                         120                            March 16, 2009
Chapter 5 - Communications                                                 PFED User Manual        Chapter 7 - Reports                                                   PFED User Manual

5.3.1.2 Retrying a Transmission
                                                                                                       3.   Tap                  to access the Date/Time Entry. Using , enter the
It is possible to retransmit a message if it has failed transmission. A failed                              desired time of resupply. This field is initially set to the current system time.
transmission is indicated with a red dot icon and the status description of Failed.                         When finished, tap           .

     1.   Tap on the message to select it.                                                         Instructions

     2.   Tap                  . The message will be resent and its status will be
                                                                                                       4.   Tap                   to access the Text Entry screen to enter clarifying
          updated in the list.
                                                                                                            instructions. Use the available keypad to enter the instructions. When
5.3.1.3 Deferring a Transmission                                                                            finished, tap         .

If transmission of a message fails, it is possible to defer the message. Deferring                 Number of Meal’s Ready to Eat (MRE’s)
a transmission means halting it indefinitely.
                                                                                                       5.   In the # MRE’s field, tap    to increase/decrease the number of individual
                                                                                                            MRE’s needed.

                                                                                                       6.   You may also tap             to access the MRE’s screen (Figure 7-15).
                : In certain instances, a message may still be transmitted by the system if it‘s            Using the available keypad, enter the number of individual MRE’s needed.
still in the transmit queue, regardless of whether you have chosen to defer it or abort it.                 When finished, tap           .
This can happen when the message has been buffered to the TACLINK card and is still
awaiting transmission because of network traffic or communications problems. Should this
happen, you will see the message disappear from the transmit queue since the end system
                                                                                                   Amount of Water
will have received it.
                                                                                                       7.   In the # Water field, tap    to increase/decrease the amount of water
     1.   Tap on the message to select it.                                                                  needed.

     2.   Tap                    .                                                                     8.   You may also tap             to access the Water screen (Figure 7-16).
     3.   To continue sending the message after it has been deferred, highlight the                         Using the available keypad, enter the amount of water needed. When
                                                                                                            finished, tap         .
          deferred message and tap                          . This will resend the entire
          message.                                                                                     9.   To state the measurement of needed Water, tap          and select a
                                                                                                            measurement (i.e., Gallons, Quarts).
5.3.1.4 Sending to a New Unit
                                                                                                   Ammunition
     1.   Tap on the message to select it.
                                                                                                       10. Tap             to access the Ammo Supply List screen (Figure 7-17). A
     2.   Tap                        . The Unit List screen will appear.                                   nomenclature list will be shown.
     3.   Follow instructions in section 5.1.2 Address/Unit List Setup to add a new
          unit, or select an existing unit. Then tap             . The message will be sent
          to any units selected in the Unit List screen.

5.3.1.5 Exit
     1.   Exit the screen by tapping         at the top right.




DRAFT                                          121                             March 16, 2009      DRAFT                                     150                             March 16, 2009
Chapter 7 - Reports                                                     PFED User Manual     Chapter 5 - Communications                                             PFED User Manual

                                                                                             5.4        ALERTS

                                                                                             Any alerts that appear during operation of the device will appear in the Alerts
                                                                                             screen. These messages may be reviewed at any time and can be removed if no
                                                                                             longer needed. If there are no alerts stored in this screen, the icon will display in
                                                                                             grey ( ). When an alert has been stored, the icon will display in red ( ).
                                                                                             When the alert screen has reached a maximum of 50, the oldest alert will be
                                                                                             removed and replaced with the newest.

                                                                                             5.4.1       Accessing Alerts
                                                                                                   1.    Tap on the alert icon ( ) at the bottom as shown in Figure 5-28. This will
                                                                                                         display the Alerts screen (Figure 5-29).


    Figure 7-13 Rapid Resupply Request                                                                                              Alerts
                                                  Figure 7-14 Rapid Resupply Request
                 (Screen 1)                                    (Screen 2)



        : Some fields will require the use of the system keypad that appears on the bottom
half of the screen. If this keypad does not disappear automatically for you, you may need               Figure 5-28 Alerts Button
to tap the keypad (   ) found at the very bottom right of the screen. This will remove the
keypad from your display and allow access to any fields or buttons that may have been
hidden.

7.2.4.1 Rapid Resupply Request (Screen 1)
The supply items listed on this first screen may be requested for any echelon.

Location (Required)                                                                                                                                   Figure 5-29 Alerts Screen

                                                                                                   2.    Any alerts that are no longer needed may be removed by selecting the alert
The Location field is pre-filled with the operator’s location information.
However, this data may be changed.                                                                       and tapping                .

     2.   Refer to section 8.2.1.1 – Location Entry for information on completing the              3.    If you wish to remove all of the displayed alerts, tap           .
          Location information.

Resupply Time (Required)                                                                            : A yellow ( ) exclamation point indicates a medium alert. A red (   ) exclamation
                                                                                             point indicates a critical alert.

The Resupply Time field is pre-filled with the current system date and time.
This information may be changed if needed.



DRAFT                                       149                             March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                           122                         March 16, 2009
Chapter 6 - Messaging                                                PFED User Manual     Chapter 7 - Reports                                                   PFED User Manual

                                                                                          Send, Save, Open Buttons
                                   CHAPTER 6
                                   MESSAGING                                                  35. Tap          after reviewing your report for accuracy. This will queue the
                                                                                                  message for transmission.

6.1        INTRODUCTION                                                                       36. Tap          to save the report request to persistent storage for later review
                                                                                                  and transmission.
Message functions allow you to view messages sent to and received from your                   37. Tap             to access a list of previously saved report requests.
handheld. In addition, you can compose a message that is not available as a
preformatted report. This type of message is known as a free text or plain text                    a.    To open a report request, tap on the request to select it then tap
message.                                                                                                          .
                                                                                                   b.    To delete a report request, tap on the request to select it then tap
6.2        ACCESSING THE MESSAGE SCREEN
                                                                                                                . The selected request will be removed immediately.

                                                                                                   c.    To delete all requests, tap         .
      1.   Tap          on the Main PFED screen. Three option tabs are available.
           The New PTM will display as the default. The other two, Inbox and Outbox                d.    To exit the Open Report/Request screen, tap       at the top right.
           are also available (Figure 6-1).
                                                                                          7.2.4    Rapid Resupply Request
      2.   To access each tab, simply tap on the appropriate tab at the top of the
           screen.
                                                                                          The Rapid Resupply Request can be used for battalion size or larger resupply
                                                                                          requests, or for company size or smaller. For requests pertaining to echelons
                                                                                          below battalion, choose smaller quantitative units (i.e., quarts of water instead of
                                                                                          gallons) and leave any items that do not apply blank. PFED will transmit all
                                                                                          Resupply reports with a priority of Routine.

                                                                                              1.   Tap                 from the Reports/Requests screen. The first Rapid
                                                                                                   Resupply Request screen will display (Figure 7-13). By tapping  , this will
                                                                                                   display the second Rapid Resupply Request screen (Figure 7-14).




                         Figure 6-1 Message – New PTM Screen




DRAFT                                     123                            March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                        148                          March 16, 2009
Chapter 7 - Reports                                              PFED User Manual     Chapter 6 - Messaging                                                   PFED User Manual

Battle Roster (BR) Number                                                             6.3        SENDING A MESSAGE (NEW PTM)

    34. Tap            to access the Battle Roster screen (Figure 7-12). Using the    Sending a message consists of two parts, creating the message and transmitting
        available keypad, enter the Battle Roster Number value. When finished,        the message. A message may be composed and saved for later transmission, or
         tap          .                                                               composed and immediately transmitted.

                                                                                      6.3.1      Composing a Message
                                                                                            1.   Tap the               tab at the top of the screen.
                                                                                            2.   Tap in the Subject and text area fields to input your message using the
                                                                                                 available keypad.

                                                                                      6.3.2      Selecting Recipients
                                                                                      Before transmitting your message, you need to select the recipient of the
                                                                                      message. You can send the message to any unit(s) available.

                                                                                            1.   Tap           at the top left. The Unit List screen will appear that shows a list
                                                                                                 of units stored on the handheld device.



     Figure 7-10 Injury Type Screen          Figure 7-11 Injury Description Screen




                                                                                                                      Figure 6-2 Unit List Screen



                      Figure 7-12 Battle Roster Number Screen                                : To locate specific Call Signs, enter one or more characters in the Names
                                                                                      containing field and tap          .

                                                                                            2.   To select one or more recipients, tap on the desired Call Sign(s) to place a
                                                                                                 check mark in the box. Then tap             . If the call sign you are looking

DRAFT                                  147                           March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                       124                             March 16, 2009
Chapter 6 - Messaging                                                    PFED User Manual        Chapter 7 - Reports                                                   PFED User Manual

         for does not appear in this list, you can manually add the call sign to the list                                               Back Image
         (refer to section 5.1.2 Address/Unit List Setup).                                        Head (tap     Neck (tap      Shoulder        Back (tap         Upper           Lower
                                                                                                   head)        neck area)      (tap just     upper/lower      Extremity       Extremity
    3.   To see all of the recipients of a message, tap        to the right of the                                                below        back area)          (tap           (tap
         field.                                                                                                                shoulder)                      arms/hands)      legs/feet)
    4.   To send a copy of the message to a specific recipient, tap               .               Non Battle    Non Battle    Non Battle     Non Battle       Non Battle      Non Battle
                                                                                                  Cut           Cut           Cut            Cut              Cut             Cut
    5.   To select a copied recipient, or multiple recipients, tap on the desired Call
                                                                                                  Burn          Burn          Burn           Burn             Burn            Burn
         Sign(s) to place a check mark in the box. Then tap                 .                     Sick          Fracture      Sick           Fracture         Sick            Sick
    6.   To see all of the copied recipients of a message, tap         to the right of the        Fracture      Perforation   Fracture       Perforation      Fracture        Fracture
                field.                                                                            Perforation   Shock         Perforation    Nuclear          Amputation      Amputation
                                                                                                  Nuclear       Puncture      Puncture       Biological       Perforation     Perforation
6.3.3    Selecting Priority                                                                                     Wound         Wound
    1.   To select a Priority option, tap     to the right of the Priority field and select       Biological    Other         Other          Chemical         Nuclear         Nuclear
         an option from the list.                                                                 Chemical      Wounded in    Wounded in Shock                Biological      Biological
                                                                                                                Action        Action
6.3.4    Saving Messages                                                                          Shock         Combat        Combat         Puncture         Chemical        Chemical
                                                                                                                Stress        Stress         Wound
In some instances you may not want to immediately send a message. For                             Puncture                                   Other            Shock           Shock
example, if you know you are in an area where you will not be able to transmit                    Wound
messages, you can save the message to wait until you are able. Or perhaps you                     Other                                       Wounded in      Puncture        Puncture
                                                                                                                                              Action          Wound           Wound
are not finished composing the message and would like to finish it at a later
                                                                                                  Wounded                                                     Other           Other
time.                                                                                             in Action
                                                                                                  Combat                                                      Wounded in      Wounded in
    1.   Once your message is composed, tap                .                                      Stress                                                      Action          Action
                                                                                                                                                              Combat          Combat
6.3.5    Opening a Saved Message                                                                                                                              Stress          Stress

    1.   Tap           . The Open Report/Request screen will display (Figure 6-3)                    28. From the pop-up list that displays, tap on the type of injury to select it. The
         containing a list of saved messages.                                                            selection will appear at the bottom of the screen.
                                                                                                     29. To delete a selection, tap on the injury listed at the bottom to highlight it then
                                                                                                          tap      .

                                                                                                     30. To remove all injury types, tap         .

                                                                                                     31. When done, tap             .

                                                                                                     32. To enter a full description of the injury, tap             to access the Injury
                                                                                                         Description screen (Figure 7-11).
                                                                                                     33. Using the available keypad, enter a full description of the injuries. When
                                                                                                          finished, tap         .




DRAFT                                       125                                 March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                     146                              March 16, 2009
Chapter 7 - Reports                                                    PFED User Manual     Chapter 6 - Messaging                                                 PFED User Manual

                                   Front Image (Top)
     Face          Shoulder          Neck            Chest              Upper Extremity
  (tap face)    (tap just below    (tap neck    (tap upper chest        (tap lower arms)
                   shoulder)          area)           area)
 Non Battle     Non Battle        Non Battle   Non Battle              Non Battle
 Cut            Cut               Cut          Cut                     Cut
 Burn           Burn              Burn         Burn                    Burn
 Sick           Sick              Fracture     Sick                    Sick
 Fracture       Fracture          Perforation  Fracture                Fracture
 Perforation    Perforation       Shock        Perforation             Amputation
 Shock          Puncture          Puncture     Nuclear                 Perforation
                Wound             Wound
 Puncture       Other             Other        Exhaustion              Nuclear
 Wound
 Other          Wounded in        Wounded in    Biological             Biological
                Action            Action
                                                                                                                    Figure 6-3 Open Report/Request Screen
 Wounded in     Combat            Combat        Chemical               Chemical
 Action         Stress            Stress
                                                                                                 2.   Tap on the desired message then tap              . The saved message will
 Dental                                         Shock                  Shock
                                                                                                      appear for changes and transmission.
 Combat                                         Puncture Wound         Puncture Wound
 Stress
                                                Other                  Other                      : Tapping         within this screen will return you to the Message screen to create
                                                Wounded in             Wounded in           a new message for transmission.
                                                Action                 Action
                                                Combat Stress          Combat Stress        6.3.6     Deleting a Saved Message
                                  Front Image (Bottom)
                                                                                                 1.   Tap           . The Open Report/Request screen will display (Figure 6-3)
         Abdomen                        OBGYN                      Lower Extremity                    containing a list of saved messages.
      (tap waist area)            (tap lower hip area)            (tap legs/feet area)
 Non Battle                   Non Battle                     Non Battle                          2.   Tap on the desired message then tap               . The saved message will
 Cut                          Cut                            Cut
                                                                                                      be removed. If you wish to remove all saved messages, tap              .
 Burn                         Burn                           Burn
 Sick                         Sick                           Sick                           6.3.7     Transmitting a Message
 Perforation                  Fracture                       Fracture
 Nuclear                      Perforation                    Amputation                          1.   Tap            when the message is complete.
 Exhaustion                   Nuclear                        Perforation                         2.   The Main PFED screen is displayed.
 Biological                   Biological                     Nuclear                             3.   If the transmitted message fails, a red dot ( ) will display in the toolbar at
 Chemical                     Chemical                       Biological                               the bottom of the Main PFED screen. Tap on this red dot to access the
 Shock                        Shock                          Chemical                                 Transmit Queue screen. Here you have the option to retry, abort, defer or
 Puncture Wound               Puncture Wound                 Shock                                    send to a new unit (refer to section 5.3.1 Accessing Transmission Queue).
 Other                        Other                          Puncture Wound
 Wounded in Action            Wounded in Action              Other
 Combat Stress                                               Wounded in Action
                                                             Combat Stress


DRAFT                                     145                              March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                      126                            March 16, 2009
Chapter 6 - Messaging                                                      PFED User Manual     Chapter 7 - Reports                                                 PFED User Manual



      : If the operator’s device is set as a FiST unit, and a message is received while
working in the New PTM window, the alert will display “behind” the keypad and will not be
visible to the operator. However, the alert icon (   ) will flash indicating a new alert has
been received. To view this new alert, tap the icon ( ) to display the Alerts window, or tap
the Inbox or Outbox tabs to view the new alert display.


6.4        RECEIVING MESSAGES (INBOX)

The Inbox allows the operator to sort, view, route, update, forward, reply, delete
and save received messages. Due to memory constraints of the PFED handheld
devices, the Inbox may only retain up to 50 messages. When the Inbox has
reached this maximum, each new message received will cause the system to
delete the oldest message. However, the operator does have the option of saving
or locking up to ten (10) messages that will not be replaced or deleted unless
                                                                                                  Figure 7-7 # of Litter Patients Screen         Figure 7-8 # of Ambulatory Patients
they are manually removed.                                                                                                                                      Screen
      1.    When a message has been received, a popup screen is displayed (Figure
            6-4).




                           Figure 6-4 Message Received Popup



      : If you don’t wish to view messages at this time, tap  to close the          pop-up.
You will then need to access the Inbox to view the message at a later time (Figure 6-5).




        : The system will alert the operator when the Inbox has reached a 60% full capacity,
or it contains approximately 27 messages.                                                                               Figure 7-9 Number of Injuries Screen


                                                                                                Injury Type/Description
      2.    Tap       in this pop-up screen. This will display the most recent
            message received (Figure 6-5). If multiple messages have been received                  26. Tap     to the left of             to access the graphical Injury Type screen
            since the last time the messages were viewed, an           is available to move             (Figure 7-10).
            through the new unread messages.                                                        27. To indicate what type of injury and where it is located on the body, tap on
                                                                                                        the body area in the Front/Back images. The available selections are as
                                                                                                        follows:



DRAFT                                        127                               March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                      144                          March 16, 2009
Chapter 7 - Reports                                                  PFED User Manual     Chapter 6 - Messaging                                                      PFED User Manual

                      Unknown                                           Open Flame             3.   Any received message may also be viewed at any time by accessing the
                                                                        Pyrotechnics
                                                                        Signal
                                                                                                    Inbox located in the Message screen (Figure 6-6) by tapping                  from
                                                                        Panels                      the Main PFED screen.
                                                                        Signal Lamp
                                                                        Smoke: Green
                                                                        Smoke: Red
                                                                        Smoke: Violet
                                                                        Smoke:
                                                                        Yellow
                                                                        Vehicle Lights
                                                                        VS17 Panel:
                                                                        Orange
                                                                        VS17 Panel:
                                                                        Violet

Number of Litter Patients

    20. Tap    to the right of the # Litters button to enter the total number of Litter
        Patients.

    21. Or, tap           to access the # of Litter Patients screen (Figure 7-7).             Figure 6-5 View Message Screen                   Figure 6-6 Message – Inbox Screen
        Using the available keypad, enter the Number of Litter Patients. When
         finished, tap          .
                                                                                                 : At a quick glance of the Inbox, the operator can visually identify several levels of
Number of Ambulatory Patients                                                             status for all messages listed. Message’s that are shown in bold text indicate that they
                                                                                          have not yet been viewed. The icons displayed (Figure 6-6) to the left of each message
                                                                                          indicate the following:
    22. Tap  to the right of the # Ambul button to enter the total number of
        Ambulatory Patients.
                                                                                                       - high priority message
                                                                                                       - message is awaiting update
    23. Or, tap           to access the # of Ambulatory Patients screen (Figure
                                                                                                        - message is awaiting routing
        7-9). Using the available keypad, enter the Number of Ambulatory
         Patients. When finished, tap            .                                             4.   If the user has sent any type of message and the recipient cannot process
                                                                                                    the message, the PFED system receives a CANTPRO message and an
Number of Injuries                                                                                  alert dialog is displayed (Figure 6-7). After the user has tapped                ,
                                                                                                    the transmit queue is displayed with an     icon beside it and a status of
    24. In the # Injuries field, tap   to increase/decrease the number of injured                   ‘Recipient unable to process’ (Figure 6-8).
        personnel.

    25. You may also tap                to access the Number of Injuries screen
        (Figure 7-9). Using the available keypad, enter the number of injured
         personnel. When finished, tap               .




DRAFT                                     143                            March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                         128                              March 16, 2009
Chapter 6 - Messaging                                                 PFED User Manual    Chapter 7 - Reports                                                      PFED User Manual

                                                                                              13. When done, tap                  .

                                                                                          Need Medic
                                                                                              14. If a Medic is needed, tap the Need Medic option to check it.

                                                                                          Priority
                                                                                              15. Tap      for the Priority field and select an option.

                                                                                          Nationality
                                                                                              16. Tap for the Nationality field to select the nationality of the injured
                                                                                                  personnel.

                                                                                          PZ Security
                                                                                              17. Tap      for the PZ Security field and select an option.
 Figure 6-7 Message – Cannot Process           Figure 6-8 Message – Cannot Process
                 Alert                              Message in Transmit Queue
                                                                                          PZ Contamination (Required)
    5.   Once the user taps              , the message is deleted from the system.            18. Tap for the PZ Contamination field and select an option that describes
         If the message was a fire mission, it is also deleted from the fire mission              contamination of the pickup zone.
         database.
                                                                                          PZ Markings (Required)
6.4.1    Sorting
                                                                                              19. Tap for the PZ Markings field and select an option that indicates how the
    1.   Tap the          tab.                                                                    PZ will be marked.

    2.   Tap on each of the column headers (i.e.,                 ,               ,             Priority         Nationality              PZ              PZ         PZ Markings
                                                                                                                                       Security    Contamination
            ) to sort by either message summary, date/time received or
         locked/unlocked. Each time you tap on a header, it will change the sort in          Urgent: save       Foreign               No Enemy    Biological         Chemical
         ascending or descending order. An arrow will appear in the header                   life, limb, or     Civilian                                             Light: Blue
         indicating which column is sorted and by what direction.                            eyesight;
                                                                                             evacuate
    3.   To exit the screen tap   at the top right.                                          within 1 hour
                                                                                             (default)
6.4.2    Viewing                                                                             Priority:          Foreign               Possible    Chemical           Chemical
                                                                                             evacuate           Military              Enemy                          Light: Green
    1.   Tap the          tab and tap on the message you wish to view.                       within 4 hours
                                                                                             Routine:           Prisoner              Enemy       Nuclear            Chemical
    2.   Tap        to read the message.                                                     evacuate                                                                Light: Orange
                                                                                             within 24
    3.   To exit the screen tap   at the top right.
                                                                                             hours
                                                                                                                US Civilian           Enemy,      None               Chemical
6.4.3    Routing                                                                                                                      Need                           Light: Red
                                                                                                                                      Armed
    1.   Tap the          tab and tap on the message you wish to route.                                                               Escort
                                                                                                                US Military                                          Chemical
    2.   Tap        to read the message.                                                                        (field default)                                      Light: Yellow

DRAFT                                    129                             March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                           142                         March 16, 2009
Chapter 7 - Reports                                                 PFED User Manual      Chapter 6 - Messaging                                                PFED User Manual




 Figure 7-4 MEDEVAC Request Screen                  Figure 7-5 Location screen              Figure 6-9 Message Awaiting Routing             Figure 6-10 Message Awaiting Routing
                                                                                                                                                        and Updating


                                                                                               3.   To route a message, tap             . If the message is awaiting route and
                                                                                                    update, the button will appear with both options (         ).


                                                                                                  : If          is tapped, the message will be routed AND the system will be
                                                                                          updated.

                                                                                               4.   To exit the screen tap    at the top right.

                                                                                          6.4.4     Updating
                                                                                               1.   Tap the          tab and tap on the message you wish to update.

                                                                                               2.   Tap        to read the message.

                        Figure 7-6 Direction to Enemy Screen                                   3.   If you wish to update only, tap         .

    9.   On the Direction To Enemy compass, tap the location to identify which                 4.   If you wish to update AND route, tap            .
         direction the enemy is in relation to the operator. If the operator is
                                                                                               5.   To exit the screen tap    at the top right.
         surrounded by the enemy, tap the Surrounded option.
    10. In the Type of Hostile Fire selections, tap the symbol that best describes the    6.4.5     Denying
        type of enemy fire.
                                                                                               1.   Tap the          tab and tap on the message you wish to deny.
    11. When done, tap             . The selections will display in the top half of the
        screen.                                                                                2.   Tap        to read the message.
    12. To remove an enemy information item, tap the item you wish to remove to
         select it then tap         .
DRAFT                                   141                             March 16, 2009    DRAFT                                       130                           March 16, 2009
Chapter 6 - Messaging                                              PFED User Manual     Chapter 7 - Reports                                                     PFED User Manual


    3.   If you wish to cancel both the Routing and Updating options, tap       .
         This will process the message and transmit a free text message indicating              : Some fields will require the use of the system keypad that appears on the bottom
         that the message was denied.                                                   half of the screen. If this keypad does not disappear automatically for you, you may need
    4.   To exit the screen tap    at the top right.                                    to tap the keypad (   ) found at the very bottom right of the screen. This will remove the
                                                                                        keypad from your display and allow access to any fields or buttons that may have been
6.4.6    Forwarding/Replying                                                            hidden.

    1.   Tap the          tab then tap on the message you wish to process (you may      PZ (Pickup Zone) Location/Name
         also forward and reply to messages under the Outbox tab).

    2.   Tap         or          and the Plain Text Message screen will open waiting
         to be transmitted (Figure 6-11).                                                     : When sending to an R5, SWB2 or SWB3 you are not required to enter a PZ
    3.   Select the recipients and input additional comments using the available        Location or a Name.
         keypad.
                                                                                             2.   Tap                                       to enter the appropriate location
    4.   When ready, tap            .                                                             information (Figure 7-5).
                                                                                             3.   Enter a name in the Name field using the available keypad.


                                                                                             4.   Or tap                               to enter a location coordinate (refer to
                                                                                                  section 8.2.1.1 – Location Entry for instructions).

                                                                                             5.   When finished, tap            .

                                                                                        Request # (Required)

                                                                                             6.   Tap               to access the Request Number screen. Using the
                                                                                                  available keypad, enter a value that is five (5) characters long. When
                                                                                                  finished, tap          .

                                                                                        Type
                                                                                             7.   Tap    for the Type field and select either Air (default) or Ground.
                    Figure 6-11 Forwarding/Replying Messages
                                                                                        Enemy Info

6.4.7    Locking/Unlocking Messages                                                          8.   Tap                to enter the direction to the enemy and type of fire
                                                                                                  information (Figure 7-6).
    1.   Tap the           tab.

    2.   Messages that are unlocked are indicated by the open green ( ) padlock.
         To lock a message, tap on the padlock to the right of the message you wish
         to save. The padlock will change to red and closed ( ) indicating that this
         message will not be automatically removed or replaced.
    3.   To unlock a locked message, tap on the closed red ( ) padlock to change it
         back to an open green (     ) padlock.

DRAFT                                     131                          March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                       140                             March 16, 2009
Chapter 7 - Reports                                                  PFED User Manual      Chapter 6 - Messaging                                                 PFED User Manual

    13. When finished, tap             .                                                       4.   To exit the screen tap     at the top right.

Equipment                                                                                  6.4.8    Editing
                                                                                               1.   Tap the            tab and tap on the message you wish to edit.
Use the popup keypad to enter any equipment or other amplifying information
associated with the target.                                                                    2.   Tap         to display the message.
                                                                                               3.   Before making any changes, you must be aware that if you make any
    14. Tap                 to display the Text Entry screen.                                       changes to a message, it can result in causing the database to be out of
    15. Use the available keypad to enter any equipment information.                                sync. Be sure you wish to make changes to the message. If so, then make
                                                                                                    any necessary changes you wish. When ready tap                .
    16. When finished, tap             .
                                                                                               4.   The system will warn you about the database being out of sync. To pass
Send, Save, Open Buttons                                                                            this message tap           . The changes will display in the message screen.
                                                                                               5.   To exit the screen tap     at the top right.
    17. Tap           after reviewing your report for accuracy. This will queue the
        message for transmission. BE AWARE: If your device has been configured             6.4.9    Deleting
        to prompt for either a SALUTE or ATI transmission, you will receive a
        message requesting which type of report you wish to send. Tap the                      1.   Tap the            tab and tap on the message(s) you wish to remove.
        appropriate selection to transmit.
                                                                                               2.   Make very sure the correct message has been checked, the system will not
    18. Tap          to save the report request to persistent storage for later review              ask if you wish to remove the selected message(s). Tap             . The
        and transmission.                                                                           selected message will be removed immediately.

    19. Tap             to access a list of previously saved report requests.                  3.   To delete all messages, tap          .
         a.   To open a report request, tap on the request to select it then tap
                        .                                                                        : Only messages that are unlocked may be deleted (refer to section 6.4.7
                                                                                           Locking/Unlocking Messages for information on unlocking a message).
         b.   To delete a report request, tap on the request to select it then tap
                      . The selected request will be removed immediately.                      4.   To exit the Message screen, tap          at the top right.

         c.   To delete all requests, tap          .
                                                                                           6.4.10 Auto Routing
         d.   To exit the Open Report/Request screen, tap        at the top right.         When the PFED device has been configured as a FiST unit, this device will
                                                                                           route any incoming non-fire support messages automatically “if” the devices
7.2.3    MEDEVAC Request                                                                   Unit List contains specific routing instructions. For example; if a non-fire
                                                                                           support message is received and it is addressed to another unit, and that unit has
PFED will transmit all MEDEVAC reports with a priority of Immediate.                       been configured for routing to another unit in the Unit List, that message will be
                                                                                           automatically transmitted to the other addressed unit. The only indication that
    1.   Tap              from the Reports/Requests screen. The MEDEVAC                    this process has occurred will be an alert (Figure 6-12) to the operator.
         Request screen will display (Figure 7-4).




                                                                                                                     Figure 6-12 Auto Message Routing


DRAFT                                       139                           March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                      132                             March 16, 2009
Chapter 6 - Messaging                                                     PFED User Manual    Chapter 7 - Reports                                                    PFED User Manual

      1.   To open the alert to a full screen view tap    .                                   Platform Type (Required)
      2.   Or if you wish to delete the alert from the system tap     .
                                                                                              The platform ( ) icon on the SALUTE/ATI Report screen allows you to
      3.   To remove the alert from the screen, tap      at the top right corner of the
                                                                                              describe the target or entity being observed in terms of its general type.
           alert window.
                                                                                                  4.   Refer to section 8.2.1 CFF (Screen 1) – Target Description for information
6.5        SENT MESSAGES (OUTBOX)                                                                      on completing the Platform/Target Type information.

Any time a message is successfully sent, either from one of the Report formats                Activity
or as a PTM, it is saved in the Outbox.
                                                                                              This optional field provides extra information about the activity being observed.
                                                                                                  5.   Tap    to the right of the Activity field and select an option from the list.
     : Be aware that the Outbox will only retain a maximum of 50 messages. Once the
maximum has been reached, the oldest transmitted message will be replaced with the                                                      Activity
newest transmitted message.                                                                                   Attacking                      Observing
                                                                                                              Defending                      Recon
                                                                                                              Delaying                       Refueling
      1.   Tap          on the Main PFED screen.                                                              Engaging                       Securing
                                                                                                              Fortifying                     Withdrawing
      2.   Tap the           tab at the top. This screen is very similar to the Inbox
           screen, but displays only the messages sent from your handheld device                              Moving
           (Figure 6-13).
                                                                                              Location (Required)
                                                                                                  6.   Refer to section 8.2.1.1 – Location Entry for information on completing the
                                                                                                       Location information.

                                                                                              Unit or Uniform Description

                                                                                              Use the popup keypad to enter Unit or Uniform identifying information.

                                                                                                  7.   Tap             to display the Text Entry screen.
                                                                                                  8.   Use the available keypad to enter a short description.

                                                                                                  9.   When finished, tap           .

                                                                                              Time of Observation

                                                                                              When you first enter the SALUTE/ATI Report screen, the Time of Observation is
                         Figure 6-13 Message – Outbox Screen                                  set to the current system time, however it may be changed.

6.5.1      Viewing                                                                                10. Tap              to display the Date/Time Entry screen (Figure 4-9).

      1.   Tap the           tab then tap on the message you wish to view.                        11. Tap    on the day, hour, minute, or year to change.
                                                                                                  12. Tap     and select another month if needed.
DRAFT                                      133                               March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                      138                             March 16, 2009
Chapter 7 - Reports                                                     PFED User Manual     Chapter 6 - Messaging                                              PFED User Manual


                                                                                                 2.   Tap        to read the message.
                                                                                                 3.   When finished, tap   at the top right.

                                                                                             6.5.2    Deleting
                                                                                                 1.   Tap the           tab then tap on the message you wish to remove. Make
                                                                                                      very sure the correct message has been checked. The system will not ask
                                                                                                      if you wish to remove the selected messages.

                                                                                                 2.   Tap       . The selected message will be removed immediately.

                                                                                                 3.   To delete all messages, tap       .
                                                                                                 4.   To exit the Message screen, tap       at the top right.


                      Figure 7-3 SALT/SALUTE-ATI Report Screen



        : Some fields will require the use of the system keypad that appears on the bottom
half of the screen. If this keypad does not disappear automatically for you, you may need

to tap the keypad (   ) found at the very bottom right of the screen. This will remove the
keypad from your display and allow access to any fields or buttons that may have been
hidden.


Threat (Required)

The Threat type describes the entity being observed as Hostile, Friendly,
Neutral or Unknown.
     2.   Tap    to the right of the Threat field and select an option from the list.

                                           Threat
                  Hostile                      Neutral
                  Friendly                     Unknown

Size

The Size area on the SALUTE/ATI Report screen allows you to enter information
describing the observed entity’s strength (in numbers), physical dimensions and
orientation (attitude).
     3.   Refer to section 8.2.1 CFF (Screen 1) – Target Description for information
          on completing the Size information.



DRAFT                                       137                             March 16, 2009   DRAFT                                   134                           March 16, 2009
Chapter 7 - Reports                                                    PFED User Manual      Chapter 7 - Reports                                                      PFED User Manual

                                                                                                  4.   If the coordinates, altitude, or heading are over 5 minutes old, tap
                                    CHAPTER 7                                                                                             on the Main PFED screen to adjust the data
                                     REPORTS                                                           (refer to section 8.2.1.1 – Location Entry).

                                                                                             7.2.1     Position Report/Observer Coordinates (OBCO)
7.1        INTRODUCTION
                                                                                                  1.   Tap                  from the Reports/Requests screen.
The PFED application has several preformatted reports that allow you to quickly
                                                                                                  2.   If the laser information is not up-to-date, the system will ask if the operator
and accurately enter and transmit battlefield and status information. All of these
messages are in a "fill in the blank" format.                                                          wishes to update it now. Tap          and follow the instructions found in
                                                                                                       section 4.4.6 Own Unit Information (Own Unit Info) Setup to update the laser
                                                                                                       information. Or, tap            to pass this process.
                                                                                                  3.   Once you have either updated or passed the laser information update, the
           : When entering data of any kind, verify the values are correct before tapping              system will immediately queue a position report for transmission. This
any Ok, Send, Save or any other process button.                                                        report will be transmitted to the unit designated as primary in the PFED unit
                                                                                                       list.

7.2        ACCESSING REPORTS/REQUESTS OPTION
                                                                                                    : If for any reason connectivity to the GPS is lost, warning messages will display
                                                                                             indicating the issue.

      1.   Tap           on the Main PFED screen.
                                                                                             7.2.2     SALUTE/ATI Report
      2.   If the operator’s position information is still current (within a 5 minute time
           frame), the Reports/Requests screen will display listing the available report     This screen is organized according to the memory aid SALUTE and is used to
           formats (Figure 7-1).
                                                                                             report enemy information and activity. When the device has been configured to
      3.   However, if the operator’s position information is too old to verify (has not     send all messages as ATI type, the title bar will indicate which type is being
           been updated for over 5 minutes), the system will display an Attention
                                                                                             processed. PFED will transmit all SALUTE/ATI reports with a priority of
           message (Figure 7-2) asking that the information be updated.
                                                                                             Routine.


                                                                                                     : If a SALUTE/ATI report will be transmitted through a FOS device before it reaches
                                                                                             its final destination, is it recommended that the report be sent as an ATI to correctly
                                                                                             communicate with all devices on the network.


                                                                                                  1.   Tap            /             from the Reports/Requests screen. The
                                                                                                       SALUTE or ATI Report screen will display (Figure 7-3).


  Figure 7-1 Reports/Requests Screen



                                                  Figure 7-2 Position Attention Message




DRAFT                                       135                            March 16, 2009    DRAFT                                       136                              March 16, 2009

				
DOCUMENT INFO
Shared By:
Categories:
Tags:
Stats:
views:6
posted:2/18/2013
language:Unknown
pages:150